NP2 Manual

Contents
Table of Contents
Foreword
Part I Welcome & Introduction
Part II What is the Neuro-Programmer?
Part III What's new in Version 2.3!
11
Part IV User Guide
14
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 14
2 Audio / Visual
...................................................................................................................................
Settings
14
3 Getting Started
................................................................................................................................... 17
4 Sessions................................................................................................................................... 20
5 Session List
...................................................................................................................................
Features
22
6 Session Recommendation
...................................................................................................................................
Wizard
25
7 Session Play
...................................................................................................................................
Screen
26
8 Exporting...................................................................................................................................
Sessions To WAV
30
9 Session Customization
................................................................................................................................... 31
10 Creating ...................................................................................................................................
Recordings
36
Managing Recordings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 36
Creating Recordings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 38
Microphone Recording
.......................................................................................................................................................... 39
Importing
.......................................................................................................................................................... 41
Text-To-Speech
.......................................................................................................................................................... 42
Text-To-Speech.........................................................................................................................................................
Editor
42
Text-To-Speech
.........................................................................................................................................................
Scripting
44
11 Creating ...................................................................................................................................
Sessions [Pro Version Only]
49
Managing & Exporting
..........................................................................................................................................................
Sessions
49
Creating A New Session
.......................................................................................................................................................... 51
Timeline & Previewing
.......................................................................................................................................................... 53
Adding New Tracks.......................................................................................................................................................... 55
Track Options
.......................................................................................................................................................... 57
Editing Track Nodes

..........................................................................................................................................................
(Points)
64
Selections
.......................................................................................................................................................... 69
Scaling
.......................................................................................................................................................... 73
Session Options
.......................................................................................................................................................... 78
Importing BWT & Sound

..........................................................................................................................................................
Files
80
12 Creating ...................................................................................................................................
Scripts
82
Managing & Exporting
..........................................................................................................................................................
Scripts
82
Creating A New Script
.......................................................................................................................................................... 83
Adding Tracks & Track
..........................................................................................................................................................
Options
84
Track View & Previewing
.......................................................................................................................................................... 89
13 Super Learning
...................................................................................................................................
Tool
90
2003 - 2005 Transparent Ltd.
II
Neuro-Programmer 2 Help
14 Sharing Sessions
...................................................................................................................................
& Scripts
93
15 Registration
................................................................................................................................... 96
Part V Important Concepts
99
1 Mind Programming
................................................................................................................................... 99
What is Mind Programming?
.......................................................................................................................................................... 99
Mental Programs .......................................................................................................................................................... 100
The Human Bio-Computer
.......................................................................................................................................................... 101
Hyper-Suggestibility
.......................................................................................................................................................... 103
Willpower, Imagination
..........................................................................................................................................................
and Belief
104
Sensory Modalities
.......................................................................................................................................................... 106
The Myth of Subliminal
..........................................................................................................................................................
Messages
108
2 Brainwaves
...................................................................................................................................
& Entrainment
109
Brainwave Overview
.......................................................................................................................................................... 109
Brainwave Stimulation
..........................................................................................................................................................
(Entrainment)
113
A Brief History
.......................................................................................................................................................... 115
Tones, Auditory "Beats"

.......................................................................................................................................................... 117
Noise & Sound Filtering
.......................................................................................................................................................... 119
Photic Stimulation.......................................................................................................................................................... 120
Hemispheric Synchronization
.......................................................................................................................................................... 123
Part VI How To Program The Mind
127
1 How to begin?
................................................................................................................................... 127
2 Where/When?
................................................................................................................................... 128
3 Relaxation
...................................................................................................................................
Guide
130
4 Programming
...................................................................................................................................
Guide
133
5 Suggestions
...................................................................................................................................
Guide
136
6 Visualization
...................................................................................................................................
Guide
140
7 Mental Techniques
................................................................................................................................... 144
Information
.......................................................................................................................................................... 144
The "Swish" Pattern

.......................................................................................................................................................... 145
Anchors / Triggers
.......................................................................................................................................................... 147
Using Color, Intensity
..........................................................................................................................................................
& Position
150
Using Objects & Symbolism
.......................................................................................................................................................... 151
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................................... 151
Objectifying Emotions
.........................................................................................................................................................
& Feelings
152
Objectifying Body
.........................................................................................................................................................
Functions
153
Using Text & Symbols
......................................................................................................................................................... 154
Event Programming
.......................................................................................................................................................... 155
Modeling & Roles.......................................................................................................................................................... 156
Aversion / Attraction
.......................................................................................................................................................... 159
Your Mental Movie
..........................................................................................................................................................
Projector
160
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................................... 160
Adding Soundtrack
.........................................................................................................................................................
/ Theme Music
160
Rewinding
......................................................................................................................................................... 161
Editing Scenes......................................................................................................................................................... 161

Your Mental Workshop
.......................................................................................................................................................... 162
8 Using Sensory
...................................................................................................................................
Modalities
163
Contents
III
9 Real-Time
...................................................................................................................................
Mental Programming
165
10 When to...................................................................................................................................
use what
168
11 Executing
...................................................................................................................................
A Mental Program
169
Part VII Academic Strategies for Students
172
Part VIII Sports Performance Strategies for Athletes
176
Part IX Example Protocols
180
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 180
2 Energy /...................................................................................................................................
Motivation
180
3 Overcoming
...................................................................................................................................
Shyness
181
4 Healing ................................................................................................................................... 183
5 Public Speaking
................................................................................................................................... 184
6 Stop Nail
...................................................................................................................................
Biting
186
7 Stop Smoking
................................................................................................................................... 187
8 Weight Loss
...................................................................................................................................
/ Muscle Gain
189
9 Getting ...................................................................................................................................
Over Your Ex
191
Part X Your Brain System
194
1 Brain System
...................................................................................................................................
Maintenance
194
2 Brain Nutrients
................................................................................................................................... 196
Part XI Research & EEG Data
201
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 201
2 Session...................................................................................................................................
Research
202
Alpha / Theta - Inducing
..........................................................................................................................................................
202
Beta/SMR (ADD / IQ
..........................................................................................................................................................
/ Study) Sessions
204
Sports Enhancement
.......................................................................................................................................................... 205
Anxiety / Stress / Chemical
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dependency
207
Depression / SAD .......................................................................................................................................................... 209
PMS Relief
.......................................................................................................................................................... 210
Headache Relief .......................................................................................................................................................... 211

Immune System Enhancement
.......................................................................................................................................................... 212
Fibromyalgia / Chronic
..........................................................................................................................................................
Pain Sessions
213
Energy / Chronic Fatigue
..........................................................................................................................................................
/ Wake Up!
214
Blood Pressure / Hypertension
.......................................................................................................................................................... 215
Insomnia & Sleep ..........................................................................................................................................................
Induction
216
3 Alpha / Theta
...................................................................................................................................
Relaxation Methods
217
Simple Relaxation..........................................................................................................................................................
Sessions
217
Dissociative Sessions
.......................................................................................................................................................... 217
Hypnotic Induction
..........................................................................................................................................................
Techniques
217
Alternating Sessions
.......................................................................................................................................................... 218
4 EEG Data
................................................................................................................................... 218
Overview
.......................................................................................................................................................... 218
IV
EEG Guide
.......................................................................................................................................................... 219
Alpha / Theta "Programming"

..........................................................................................................................................................
Sessions
222
Beta / SMR Sessions
.......................................................................................................................................................... 225
Complex & Hemisphere-Specific
..........................................................................................................................................................
Sessions
228
Part XII FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions
232
1 General ................................................................................................................................... 232

2 Session...................................................................................................................................
Effects & Proper Use
234
3 Brainwave
...................................................................................................................................
Stimulation (Entrainment)
237
4 Suggestions
...................................................................................................................................
/ Text-To-Speech
239
5 Licensing
...................................................................................................................................
/ Registration
241
Licensing
.......................................................................................................................................................... 241
Registration
.......................................................................................................................................................... 241
Download License..........................................................................................................................................................
FAQ
242
CD Activation FAQ
.......................................................................................................................................................... 244
6 Troubleshooting
................................................................................................................................... 246
Part XIII Member's Area
249
Part XIV Suggested Reading
251
Part XV Copyright & Disclaimer
254
1 Disclaimer
................................................................................................................................... 254
2 Copyright
................................................................................................................................... 254
Index
255
Top Level Intro

This page is printed before a new
top-level chapter starts
Part
Welcome & Introduction

Welcome to the Neuro-Programmer 2 Documentation.
Please read through all or most of these documents. Programming the mind is a highly interactive
process. While it may be simple and straightforward, doing it correctly is essential to obtaining
results.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
What Is The Neuro-Programmer?

Click here to Get Started!
Top Level Intro

Part
II
What is the Neuro-Programmer?

What is NP?
The Neuro-Programmer is a next generation self-help and mind management tool. Unlike most
self-help tools and books you are used to, NP is designed as a dynamic, flexible solution. It is not
an exaggeration to say that NP can help solve nearly any mental problem, and even many
physical problems as well.
How does NP work?

The Neuro-Programmer system approaches self-help from 2 different angles:
1) The Neurological: Brainwave entrainment
Using complex sound filters and modulations, as well as LED light goggles (if you purchased
them), NP is able to effectively and precisely alter your brainwave patterns as you listen to
sessions.
Brainwave patterns have a huge impact on our daily lives. There are very specific patterns
which correlate to specific mental functions. For example, by looking at a person's brainwave
pattern you can tell whether the person is tired, energetic, focused, day dreaming, depressed,
confused, angry and more. People with ADD have very specific brainwave patterns. So do
people with depression, anxiety and a number of other common disorders. By changing and
optimizing brainwave patterns, a huge range of problems can be dramatically reduced (or
solved) and many other parts of your brain can be enhanced. For instance, memory, focus
and mental speed can be greatly increased using brainwave stimulation. Sleep and advanced
states of meditation can be induced. Headaches can be reduced. You can even stimulate the
release of helpful chemicals such as Human Growth Hormone and Serotonin.
Brainwave Entrainment is not a new technology. It has been studied extensively for a little
over 70 years. For more information on the science behind brainwave entrainment,
click here.
2) The Psychological: Cognitive Linguistics, Visualization & Hypnosis
For problems that cannot be solved using brainwave entrainment alone, there are a number
of proven, time-tested psychological techniques which can be used. Suggestion
(Affirmations) and Visualization techniques can be used to overcome fears, quit smoking,
lose weight, enhance your confidence, performance, motivation, and much more.
For example, Hypnosis is a well known psychological technique. Essentially, the job of the
hypnotist is to first relax the subject, bringing his or her mind down to a receptive level (called
the hypnagogic state). Once there, the hypnotist presents a series of "Suggestions".
Suggestions are phrases or commands (such as "You are confident and assertive"). When
your mind is in a receptive state, suggestions and other psychological techniques (such as
visualization) can have a rapid and dramatic effect on your behavior and emotional response.
What NP does is it replaces the Hypnotist with a Session. The session uses powerful
brainwave entrainment techniques to guide the user's brainwave patterns to a receptive point.
When the user has reached the most absorbent possible state, NP presents suggestions or
alerts the user to begin using visualization techniques. NP also includes hypnosis scripting
capabilities, allowing you to be guided down not only by the sessions' powerful brainwave
stimulation, but also by a professional hypnosis script.
What is the Neuro-Programmer?
And there is also this documentation, which contains a huge amount of information, some of it not
even related to the program. Everything important from brainwaves to psychology to brain
nutrients is covered. The documentation is an essential part of the Neuro-Programmer system.
We hope you take the time to look through it.
Get to know the Session Play Screen
Top Level Intro

Part
III
What's new in Version 2.3!
11
What's new in Version 2.3!

What's new in this version
Updated 10/28/05
New Features!
Customized Scaling - You can now customize the length of any session in NP2. You can also
dynamically scale any session while leaving the ramps alone. To do this, we added Ramp
Markers which can be set during the construction of a session.
Volume Amplification for Microphone recording - If your mic or sound equipment is of lower
quality, recordings can sound muffled or low volume. This amplification feature allows you to
increase or decrease the volume of your recording to solve this problem.
Undo, Copy/Paste, Selections and other useful functionality added to the Session Editor!
Customize Intensity/Volume Levels - You can now set the volumes and intensity levels of
different track types individually in the Customization settings, allowing you to precisely
customize a session to your preference.
Export features added directly to Scripts and Sessions - You can now export a Script directly
from the script list, and you can do the same for sessions.
New Session End Options - Stand-By, Play a sound, Play a session, Execute a file (make a
call to Windows), and more. You can now "Chain" Sessions together in a kind of playlist by
specifying a session to automatically load and play at the end of a session.
Screen flashing improved - Now uses DirectX 9. Synchronization and refresh rate settings are
vastly improved. DirectX 9 or greater is now required to use this feature.
Added an "Optimize for Medium Precision" option the session editor, allowing a compromise
between speed and accuracy when previewing a session.
Major Performance Improvements
Session list no longer needs to completely reload when a session is changed or added. It will
instead dynamically change the session list in a fraction of the time.
Improved the handling of nodes in the Session Editor and other graphical improvements that
should speed up performance
Improved Sound
Added a sound balancing scheme to avoid overclipping, clicks and pops in the sound. If you
are updating from a previous version of NP2, you may have adjust your volume preferences
after this update.
Improved the isochronic tone processing, increasing effectiveness and sound quality
Added the ability to change Sampling Rates under sound settings
12
Improved the Preview Recordings with Session feature on the Play screen. It should now be
a more accurate representation of the volume levels in the session itself.
Improved AudioStrobe
You can now set AudioStrobe levels under Settings or using the AudioStrobe Configuration
Tool. This gives you an easy way to test and adjust the audiostrobe settings for your mind
machine or decoder.
AudioStrobe functionality went through some minor improvements that should improve
effectiveness and keep the signals from interfering with the sound quality at higher levels.
You can now disable AudioStrobe completely from the Customization settings. This can
improve performance and sound quality if you are not using AudioStrobe at all.
Fixed a number of minor bugs
Top Level Intro

Part
IV
14
User Guide
4.1
Introduction
Introduction
Welcome to the Neuro-Programmer 2 User Guide. These documents will help get you started and
give you a firm understanding of the many options and features available in the NeuroProgrammer application.
Index:
Audio Settings
Getting Started
Sessions
Session Play Screen
Session Recommendation Wizard
Exporting Sessions To WAV
Other Features
Session Customization
Creating Recordings
Creating Sessions
Creating Scripts
Super Learning Tool
Sharing Sessions & Scripts
Registration
4.2
Audio / Visual Settings

Your Sound, Recording & AudioStrobe Settings
User Guide
15
On the top right of the Neuro-Programmer screen you will see a speaker icon. You can click this
icon to view the Settings screen.
Sound & Recording Devices

Usually, the Neuro-Programmer will have automatically detected the appropriate sound card
and recording device to use. Sometimes, however, it is necessary to change these settings to
suit your system's configuration. To do so, simply select the appropriate Devices for your
system. Selecting "No Sound" for your Sound Device will prevent any sound from playing, and
will also prevent use of LED Light Goggles.
Sample Rate
You can modify the sampling rate of the sound output of NP2. Increasing this value may
increase the quality of the sound, while decreasing it may increase performance - depending on
your sound card and system setup. Click Reset Rates to reset to default.
Note that changing the sampling rate can affect the way AudioStrobe signals are masked during
playback, sometimes resulting in high pitched sound interference at lower sampling rates. If you
want to use a low sampling rate, disable AudioStrobe in the AudioStrobe Settings screen
(explained below).
Recording Rate
This setting allows you to increase or decrease the sampling rate of your Microphone while
using the recording features of NP2. This will not apply to Text-To-Speech capabilities. Click
Reset Rates to reset to default.
16
You must click Save & Apply to for these settings to take effects. Doing so will stop all
currently playing sessions or other audio, in order to apply your new sound settings. If
you haven't changed anything, click Cancel or your settings will still be applied in this
way.
Also Note: None of these settings will interfere with Export features or capabilities.
Headphone Testing Tool

Use this tool (available under the Tools menu) to test the leakage between sides of your
headphones. If you test the left side and can still hear a sound in the right ear, you may want to
check your settings to make sure you have 3d sound and any special features turned off. You
may also want to try a different pair of headphones..
A little bit of headphone leakage is expected and normal, however.
AudioStrobe Settings
AudioStrobe uses volume to determine the brightness of the LED lights, so if you use goggles you
need to make sure the levels are properly configured. The standard maximum audiostrobe level
is about 5.6% of the main volume. This is the level at which the LEDs should be at their
maximum brightness. However, not all AudioStrobe devices conform to this standard and
computer volume settings can vary. Use these settings and the AudioStrobe Configuration Tool
(explained below) to test your configuration and make any necessary adjustments.
Enable AudioStrobe - AudioStrobe is enabled by default, but if you do not use an AudioStrobe
device you should disable it here. This will increase performance and in some cases it can
improve sound quality, since the AS signals are embedded into the sound itself.
Maximum AudioStrobe Level - The level at which the LEDs of the goggles should be at their
maximum brightness.
Zero AudioStrobe Level - This settings specifies the level when the lights should be completely
off. If you use a sine wave, this will specify the depth of the wave in relation to the Maximum
level. In most cases you will want to leave this setting at 0.
Use the AudioStrobe configuration tool (explained below) for easy configuration of these settings.
AudioStrobe Configuration Tool
User Guide
17
Most relaxation sessions use sine waves, so it is particularly important to use the "Test 1 Hz Sine
Wave" feature. During this test, the lights should neither be completely ON nor completely OFF
for more than a split second. Instead, the lights should undergo a constant dimming and
brightening until you click stop. If the lights are not reaching full brightness, turn the Maximum AS
Level up. If the lights are not dimming properly, turn the max level down.
Tip: for lower volume levels, it may be easier to enter a value into the text box to the right of the
volume level sliders. You can enter any value from 0-1000, 1000 being 100% volume, 500 being
50% volume and so on.
4.3
Getting Started
Getting Started With Neuro-Programmer 2
Using the Neuro-Programmer is very simple and intuitive. To get started, follow these
steps.
Step 1: Get to know NP2 and the interface

First, get to know the Neuro-Programmer and get acquainted with the Session Play Screen.
Step 2: Get an understanding of the concepts behind NP

18
Next, you may want to get some background on the concepts and methods behind NP2.
Obtaining a firm grasp of the concepts beforehand is important to using the program correctly
Here are some useful links:
Theory:
Brainwaves / Brain Training
"Mental Programming" Theory
Research
Guides:
Self-Programming Guide
Suggestion / Affirmation Guide
Visualization Guide
Relaxation Guide
Techniques:
Mental Programming Techniques
Also make sure to read the Disclaimer. Mind Programming and brainwave stimulation is not for
everyone. If you have any doubts, please consult with your physician.
Step 3: Determine your goals

What are your goals in using NP?
It could be to rid yourself of a fear, increase your confidence, decrease depression or anxiety.
Or it could be an enhancement such as increasing memory, focus, mental speed, athletic
performance and more.
Remember, NP is a dynamic solution to a virtually unlimited number of problems. If you have
an emotional or mental problem, NP is probably very capable of helping you with it.
Step 4: Decide on a goal, Choose a session

The next step is to choose the goal you want to work on first. Beginners should probably only
focus on one goal at a time, at least until they get a feel for the application and build confidence
in the technology.
If you have a common problem like Depression or Insomnia, you may want to look through the
Brainwave Training category of sessions. If your problem or goal is listed, try using one of those
sessions and Skip Step 5.
If your goal is not listed in the Brainwave Training category, you may have a more complex
problem, perhaps emotional or behavioral in nature (such as shyness, a phobia or low selfesteem). For that kind of goal, you will need to use psychological techniques, such as
suggestions or visualizations, with one of the sessions under the "Programming" category. Visit
the "How to begin" mental programming section for more information.
User Guide
19
Tip: Use the Wizard

To better help you choose a session, a Wizard has been created, called the Session
Recommendation Wizard, available off of the Tools menu. In it, you can specify your current
equipment (such as headphones), your goals and various personality traits. Based on your
answers it will highlight a number of sessions that will likely be most effective for you. Visit
the section on Sessions for more information.
Step 5: Choose Visualizations or Create Suggestions (if necessary)

After you have chosen a session to use, you may need to create Suggestions (affirmations) or
choose a set of Visualizations to use. Typically, Suggestions should be used in Theta sessions
while Visualizations and Auto-Suggestions should be used with Alpha sessions.
To determine what type of mental programming to use, read through the Important Concepts
and "How to Program The Mind" sections of the documentation.
If you choose to use recorded Suggestions, visit the Recording Creation section of the
documentation. You can either record your suggestions using a Microphone, use Text-ToSpeech features or Import a recording (nearly any sound file can be imported, such as mp3,
wav, wma, ogg, etc).
If you decide to use visualizations, you can choose to use an Alert, instead of a recording. The
alert will act as notification that your mind has reached a receptive state, and that you should
start your visualization and mental techniques.
See the section on How To Begin Programming The Mind.
Step 6: Use your session!

You should now be ready to use your first session. Use it as many times as necessary until you
feel you have completed your goal. The amount of time it takes to reach a goal differs between
individuals, but you should see some progress within a few weeks. If you don't, you may want to
consider changing your protocol or posting your goal in the community forums and asking for
assistance.
Using your first Session
After you have customized the session to your preferences, and selected any necessary
recordings, it is time to start your first session. Make sure of the following before beginning:
1) You should be in a quiet place, free of distraction. Dim the lights, close the door, turn off
your phone and relax.
2) You should be in a very comfortable position, in a chair or lying down. Ideally, your back
should be straight and your head and arms should be supported. If the computer is not the
best place for you to use a session, try clicking the "Export" button. This will allow you to
export the session to WAV which can be then be used on a portable music device (like an
iPod) or burned to an Audio CD.
3) Use headphones if the session requires it!
4) Read the session Instructions! It may contain important information not listed here.
5) Once the session begins, refer to what you read in the Relaxation Guide. Breath from your
20
abdomen, tilt your eyes upwards a bit, etc. It is important to relax and let the session do its
work.
Remember, it can take a couple times for your mind to get used to this technology. Just relax
and try to let go of your daily worries. Use the included hypnotic induction scripts if you have
trouble relaxing with the session alone.
Tips
If you have trouble coming up with a protocol for your particular problem, try browsing the
Example Protocols section.
If you are a student or are interested in increasing general academic performance, there is a
special section for you called Academic Strategies for students
If you are an athlete or are hoping to gain a competitive edge, try
Sports Performance Strategies for Athletes
4.4
Sessions
Session List & Categories
Upon opening the application, you will see a number of buttons and a listing of all available
sessions, with Tabs to categorize them. Initially, you will probably see only 3 tabs, one for
Programming, one for Brainwave Training and one User tab.
User Guide
21
Let's examine the difference:

Programming: Sessions in this category are meant to guide your mind to a receptive,
suggestible state, or to enhance your visualization capabilities (similar to what hypnosis does,
only much more powerful). Sessions in this category are meant to be used with Suggestions,
Alerts or Scripts, which we will touch on later.
Brainwave Training: Sessions in this category do all of the work for you, but are specific to
mental disorders, problems or conditions. For example, this category includes a number of
sessions for reducing ADD or Depression. The effects of each sessions are listed in its
Description, as well as in the Documentation under "Sessions". The methods and extensive
research behind these sessions is also available there.
User: This tab contains the sessions that you have made yourself, or have imported from other
users.
Opening A Session
To Open a session simply double click on it. Alternatively, you can right click on it and then select
"Open / Use Session".
This will open the Session Play Screen.
Session List Features

See this section.
22
4.5
Session List Features

Session Filter
If you right click the session list you can access the Session Filter. It is also available by clicking
View on the main menu.
The Session Filter allows you to narrow the displayed sessions to only the ones you are interested
in, or the sessions you have marked as your favorite. By default, all sessions are shown. Uncheck
the ones you are not interested, or check the Show ONLY selections to view only favorites or only
those recommended by the Wizard.
All User sessions will be shown by default, ignoring all other filters, unless you uncheck the
"Always Show All User Sessions" item.
To reset the Filter to its original state, click Show All Sessions.
Favorites
Any session can be marked as a favorite. Right click any session and a menu will pop up. Click
"Mark Session As Favorite". This will change its icon as below:
User Guide
23
If you want to view only your favorite sessions, use the Session Filter mentioned above.
Custom Session Tabs

Creating a custom Session Tab is very simple. All you have to do is create a new directory inside
the "sessions" folder in your NP2 program directory. To open the sessions directory, click on the
"View" item on the Main Menu and click the "Open Main Sessions Folder" item.
Once the folder opens, right click to create a new folder:
24
Name the folder anything you want the Tab to be named.

After the folder is created, you must drop at least one user-made session into it.
NOTE: You can not drop .NPS_CP sessions into a new folder, they will not work properly. Only
.NPS sessions, which will be in your User Sessions folder, can be used from a custom Tab.
See the section of Sharing Sessions & Scripts for more information.
Session List Building

When NP2 opens for the first time, it checks the program directory for sessions and directories to
build a "session list" which it saves and then displays to you. Every time you refresh the list, it will
check the program directory again for changes or new sessions. If it finds any, it will dynamically
change the session list without having to rebuilt it completely - in order to save processing time.
To refresh the list, you can re-open NP2, click the main Sessions button or right click the session
list:
You can also rebuild the session list completely. This should never be necessary unless there is
an error or if the session list has been corrupted somehow.
User Guide
4.6
25

To help you pick the session that best fits your needs, a Session Recommendation Wizard has
been made available. You can access it by clicking the "Need help getting started?" button or by
clicking the "Tools" button on the left hand side of the screen.
Go through the Wizard until it asks you to click "Finish". Click it and wait for it to process your
results. Once done, you can close the Wizard and the recommended sessions will be marked with
a green checkmark:
Session Icons
Have you noticed the 2 different icons next to the session titles? One of them looks like a pair
of headphones and the other looks like a speaker. These icons indicate whether the session is
meant to be used with or without headphones. Using a session with speakers that is meant to
be used with headphones could render the session completely ineffective. Many of the
headphone-oriented sessions use special left-right techniques which add to they hypnotic or
"dissociative" qualities of the session. Using these sessions with speakers will sound like a
jumbled mess and certainly won't be effective. So, most of the sessions are available in a
headphone-free form as well.
Note: If you switch from Speakers to Headphones or visa versa you will probably have to adjust
the volume to a comfortable level. Make certain that the sound is loud enough to drown out
external noises, but not so loud as to be distracting or uncomfortable. Adjusting the volume is
mentioned later in this document.
26
4.7
Session Play Screen

The Session Play Screen, Specifying options
Once you have chosen a session from the Session List on the main screen, double click on it to
open the Session Play screen where you can specify options and start the session.
When you first open a session a screen will pop up with session instructions. Though many of
these instructions will be similar between sessions, you should read through them at least once
before proceeding.
Once you have read the instructions, click Continue to advance to the play screen:
As you can see, there are a number of options on the play screen. You can click View Info on the
top right corner to view the Description and Instructions. You can also click "Export" on the top
right to export the session to WAV, which you can then burn to an audio CD.
Scroll down for information on customization, adding Recordings (Affirmations) and more.
Making the Session Comfortable

The first thing you will want to do is adjust the volume to a comfortable level. To do this, click
the Play button for a test run. After about 10 seconds, the session will have faded in all the way.
At that time, adjust the volume to a comfortable level.
Recording Volume
User Guide
27
To adjust the volume for Recordings, see the section on recordings below.
Windows (System) Volume Control
In addition to the NP2 volume controls, it may be necessary to adjust your system volume.
NP2 can only raise its own volume to the maximum limit you have set in the system. To
increase the volume further, you need to use the windows volume control. You can access
this easily from the play screen by clicking the "System Volume Control" button. You can also
access it from the View menu.
If you adjust the system volume, you may want to use the AudioStrobe Configuration Tool to
make sure NP2 is configured to work well with your goggles.
Light Goggle LED Brightness and Screen Flashing
If you are using LED Light Goggles, it is important that you adjust the brightness to a
comfortable level as well. To do this click the "Customize" button. See the
Session Customization section for more information.
If you are not using LED Goggles, you may want to consider using Screen Flashing (if you are
not epileptic and have no seizure disorders). The Screen Flashing option will pop up a screen
after the session starts and will flash (like a Strobe light) at the same rate as the session
audio. You can adjust the colors of the flashing by clicking the "Customize" button. Note that
even if you are using Screen Flashing you should keep your eyes closed through the entire
session (except in some special cases). In a dimly lit room, you should still be able to see the
flashing through your eyelids. Photic (light) Stimulation is much more effective with LED
Goggles, but they can be expensive so we include the Screen Flashing feature as an
alternative.
Selecting Recordings
Next, if you have selected a session from the "Programming" category, you may want to select
a recording to be played during your session. To do so, simply check any of the Suggestions in
the Recordings TreeView (click the + and - boxes to expand the categories).
There are 3 types of recordings: Suggestions, Alerts and Scripts. Here is a brief explanation of
the differences between these Recordings:
Suggestions: Recordings which will start playing (on Loop) when your mind has reached is
28
most receptive possible state. Sessions in the Programming category are meant to guide your
brain down to the brainwave patterns commonly exhibited during sleep, deep hypnosis
sessions, meditation or in young children. Suggestions are meant to change your behavior or
emotional response. View the documentation on Hyper-Suggestibility for more information.
You can select more than one Suggestion if you choose. They will play one after another,
with a 3 second delay between them by default.
Alerts: Recordings which will play only once, to notify you that your mind has reached the
most receptive possible state. Alerts are commonly used when you intend to use Mental
Programming Techniques, Visualization or Auto-Suggestions. Visualization is an interactive
process (unlike recorded suggestions). Once the Alert sounds, your Visualization capabilities
should be greatly amplified, along with your general ability to alter your own mind.
Scripts: Scripts will start playing immediately, and may be composed of many other
recordings. Scripts are meant to be used to help you relax or provide mental programming
instructions at strategic moments during a Session. Scripts act much like a hypnotist would,
helping to guide your brain down to a receptive state, and providing you with guidance once
there.
You can only select one Script at a time. Also note that scripts usually have a 5-10 second
delay before starting, simply to allow some time for the user to relax and settle in, so don't be
surprised if the script takes a minute to start or preview.
Recording Volume
Once you have selected the Recordings you are interested in, you should adjust the volume
to a comfortable level. To do this, move the "Recording Volume" slider and then click the
"Play Selected Recordings" button. For technical reasons, you cannot change the recording
volume while the Recordings are playing, so to adjust the volume again click "Stop Playing"
and move the recording slider to try again.
Remember that Recordings will play when your mind has reached a deeply relaxed and
receptive state, so they should probably be at a very low volume or they will startle you.
However, Subliminal Messages do not work so the Recordings must be playing at a volume
loud enough for you to hear and understand.
There is a smaller button next to the Play Recordings button. Clicking it will pop up a menu
allowing you to preview the recordings with the session playing as well. This is useful to
gauge the recording volume in relation to the session.
Previewing Scripts
When previewing Scripts using the Play Selected Recordings button, the selected script will
begin playing after any recordings and alerts you have selected. This is contrary to how it will
be in the actual session, where Scripts will start playing immediately and the recordings will
play later. The reason the preview works differently is because of the 5-10 second delay
many scripts implement, which can cause confusion for new users when trying to preview the
recordings. Also, scripts can be very long while recordings are usually quite short.
User Guide
29
Modulation
There is one more option related to Recordings, called Modulation. What this does is it pans
the recordings, back and forth, from left to right and back again. This has been shown to
make the suggestions more effective, so it is on by default for sessions that require
headphones. You can uncheck the "Modulate Recordings" checkbox to turn it off, or you can
change the speed and depth of the panning by clicking the Customize button. Modulation is
turned off by default for sessions which do not require headphones.
Advanced Customization
NP2 allows you to easily customize all aspects of a session. You can specify the tone pitch or
the background sounds used, you can specify the audiostrobe brightness, the fade lengths, the
delay between Recordings and more, all from a single, simple screen. To do this, click the
Customize button on the lower left corner of the session play screen.
Go here for more information.
Exporting Sessions
Go here for more information.
Other Session Settings

Off of the Settings item on the Main Menu, you will find a number of universal session settings.
Disable Session Start Delay - Every session has a start delay. By default, the delay is 10
seconds and allows you to get settled into your chair, close your eyes and relax. You can disable
the delay by clicking this item, or by setting the delay to 0 on the Session Customization screen.
Disable All Session Intros - Checking this will keep all Session Intro screens from popping up.
Session Intros are very important to beginners. They give special instructions which are very
important to read if you are not familiar with the session already. Use this option only if you are an
advanced user.
30
4.8
Exporting Sessions To WAV

Exporting Sessions
After purchase, any session can be exported to WAV from the Session Play Screen.
There is a button labelled "Export" at the top:
Clicking Export will pop up a dialog asking you where you want to save your session. Choose a
location and click Save. You will then see this screen:
Sampling Rate: The sampling rate determines the number of "samples" generated per second.
44100 is the standard and many CD burning programs will only audio accept files with a 44100
sampling rate, so it is recommended to stick with it.
Length of export: Some sessions have no pre-defined ending time ("never-ending" sessions).
For those sessions you can specify any length you choose.
User Guide
31
When ready, click "Begin Export" to start exporting. It may take a while, so sit back and relax.
You can Pause or Stop the export at any time.
Once exported, the WAV can then be burned to a CD (if it is under 70 minutes in length) or
converted to MP3 using any MP3 converting software (there are dozens of free converters
available online, such as on download.com)
Exporting From Session List

See the session on managing sessions
Burning Audio CDs

See the FAQ entry about this here.
4.9
Session Customization
Customization of Sessions
All sessions can be very easily customized using the Session Customization screen available by
clicking the "Customize" button on the Session Play screen:
Clicking Customize will pop up the following screen:
32
Each of these features are explained below, according to their group.
General
Session Components
The 3 checkboxes in this group represent the 3 audio components of any session: Tones,
Background Sound and Noise (like White Noise). Most Sessions make use of at least 2 of these
components by default, and many use all three. Most sessions also have an optional
component that you can turn on by clicking the relevant checkbox. For example, the above
Session already has Background Sound and Tones enabled, which is why the "Use
Background" and "Use Tones" boxes are checked. When you listen to this session you will hear
soft tones and a soothing background track. But suppose you wanted to hear white noise
instead of a background sound. All you would have to do is check the "Use Noise" box and
uncheck the "Use Background" box. It is that simple!
The Session Start Delay box allows you to specify the number of seconds that the session will
delay before starting, after clicking the play button.
Customize Volume / Intensities: See Advanced Customization below.
Session Preferences
Using the text boxes in this group you can specify the fade times in seconds.
Every Session will fade in and fade out. Fading out is particularly important because a sudden
end to a session can startle the user and possibly cause what is called Somnatic Shock, which
is nauseating and disorienting. Although little is known about Somnatic Shock, it is thought to
occur because at these lower brainwaves the mind is more receptive to all input, even sudden
changes in environment which can trigger the "fight or flight" response.
Session start delay controls the initial countdown delay before a session begins. Change the
number to the number of seconds you need to get situated and relaxed before the session
begins. Change it to 0 to disable the countdown.
User Guide
33
Scaling
Scaling allows you to shorten or lengthen a session based on the time you have available to
you.
To scale a session, simply enter the preferred session length (in minutes) into the Session
Length field and make sure the Session Length option is checked, while the Use Default option
is unchecked. If you want to reset the Session length to default, check "Use Default".
Leave start and end ramps alone
The ramp is often the most important part of a session. It guides the brain down to a state, and
then at the end guides the brain back up. Ramps are usually time sensitive. For example, if the
session ramps from 15 - 10 Hz over a period of 5 minutes, the effect of the ramp would be
greatly reduced if it were scaled to 2 minutes or less.
Using the "Leave ramps alone" option will scale only the area between the original ramp
markers, which can be set during the construction of a session. By scaling everything between
these two markers, the time-sensitive parts of the session (the ramps) are left alone.
Play last node to infinity
This makes the session never-ending. Instead of stopping at the end of the session it will
continue playing the last frequency and background until you click stop on the Play screen.
Recording Times
In this panel you can specify the start and end recording times. By default these times are set
during the construction of a session, and are meant to identify where in the session the user will
be in a state receptive to hypnosis and affirmations.
Tones / Sound
Tone Pitch
Here you can customize the pitch of the Tones in the session, if the Session makes use of
Tones (most of them do). Generally a pitch between 100 - 200 is preferred. Some people do
prefer even deeper carrier tones in the range of 20-100. Others prefer higher tones, which may
be more uplifting and motivating.
Background
Using this screen you can specify your preferred background file. If a session uses a
Background file track, your choice of a sound file here will override whatever sound the Session
uses by default. To do this, simply click "Browse" and a dialog will pop up allowing you choose
a file. If you would like to revert back to the default sound file used in the Session, click "Use
Default".
Here you can also specify the background Smoothing time. By default, all backgrounds are
"smoothed" so that there is no clicking sound when it loops. To do this, NP fades the
background out, while fading the next loop in. By default it fades the loop by 0.6 seconds. You
can change it to any number you want.
Advanced Customization
34
Click the "Advanced Customization" button:
This screen allows you to specify volumes and intensity levels for the individual track types of a
session. This can be especially useful when configuring a session to use a custom background.
Since NP2 can use any sound as the carrier wave for entrainment, the possible selections are
incredibly diverse - ranging from music to nature and environmental sounds. Adding some
sounds may require that you use the advanced customization to adjust the volume of the tones,
filter intensity and volume of the music/sound, to make the session a comfortable and pleasing
experience.
To customize a parameter, check the box next to the trackbar of your choice and adjust the
value as desired. To reset to default, uncheck the box and click Apply.
Flashing / AudioStrobe
Screen Flashing Colors
You can override the default Screen Flashing colors here. Simply click the Set "On" color
button and a color selection screen will pop up.
AudioStrobe Brightness
Controlling the Brightness of your AudioStrobe Goggles is important to a safe, enjoyable
entrainment experience. Drag the slider to the right to increase the brightness, and to the left to
decrease it. Adjust until you are sure it is at a comfortable level for you.
You can also disable AudioStrobe altogether from this screen by unchecking the AudioStrobe
Enabled option. Doing so will make this session incompatible with mind machines, audio strobe
decoders and other light/sound devices.
Recordings
User Guide
35
Like the session fades, Recordings will also fade in and out to avoid startling the user.
You can also specify the Delay between recordings on loop (Suggestions). When a Suggestion
or multiple Suggestions are selected they will play, one after another until the end of the
session is about to guide your mind back up to its normal brainwave state (or until the session
ends in Never-Ending sessions). The Suggestions will be separated by a space of 3 seconds by
default, but you can specify a different number here.
Pan Modulation
Pan Modulation controls the speed and depth of the recording modulation feature. By default,
recordings (suggestions only) will modulate between the left and right speakers at 0.2 cycles per
second. By altering the Speed textbox you can speed up or slow down the panning. You can
also control the Depth of the pan. By default, it is set at 55% depth, meaning the recordings
modulate 55% to the right and then 55% to the left and then back again.
Modulation is turned off by default for sessions which do not require headphones.
Session End Options

Using this screen you can specify the action performed when the session ends, including
hibernating or shutting the computer down completely. This can be especially useful for Sleep
Induction sessions, where you want the computer to turn off when it completes.
Note: These options will not affect what happens when you manually pause, stop or exit a
session.
In the Shut Down Options panel check the option next the action you want NP2 to perform at
the end of a session, such as Shut Down or Stand-By. Note that Hibernate will only work if you
have enabled Hibernation in the Power Options of your computer. If this is not enabled, the
Hibernate action will put the computer into Stand-By mode instead.
Additionally you have a number of advanced session end options:
Open and play session
Check this option and select from the list of session in the drop down box. This option allows
you to "chain" a number of sessions together, in a kind of playlist. When the current session
ends, the session you specify here will be opened, all of its settings will be applied (including
any suggestions or scripts selected) and played.
Play sound file
36
Specify a sound file to play at the end of a session. This is useful if you want to be sure where
the session ends, or if you have an external session of some kind you would like to play after
the current session completes.
Run an application
Additionally, NP2 can make a call to Windows, with command line arguments, to any file you
specify here. Not only can executables be run, but any file. If you specified a sound file here,
for example, Windows Media Player (or you default sound player) would open the file and start
playing.
Be sure to place command line arguments in the separate field labeled "Args".
Saving Your Configuration

All customizations will be saved by default, all you have to do is click "Apply". A name for the
configuration file will be chosen based on the sessions name. However, if you want to name your
configuration something more descriptive, you can click the "Save Config As" button in the lower
left corner. It will ask you for a name, enter one and click Save. You will see the file name appear
in the Saved Configurations drop down at the top of the screen. When you are done, click Apply.
Reverting To Default
If you ever want to revert back to the Default configuration, click "Use Default" on the Play screen
at any time.
4.10
Creating Recordings
4.10.1 Managing Recordings

Managing Recordings
The Recordings list gives you a number of options to manage and export your recordings.
User Guide
37
To rename or delete a recording, click the Rename or Delete buttons or right click any item on the
recording list. You can also press Delete on your keyboard while a recording is selected.
Viewing Recording Folder

All recordings are saved in the recordings folder in your NP2 program directory. You can view this
folder by clicking the View menu and then the "Open Recordings Folder" item.
From this folder you can bring user-created recordings into audio editors or other programs if you
38
want to create special effects or edit them in any way.

OGG Formatting: Microphone recordings will always be saved as OGG files. OGG is a format
like MP3, only free and more precise. You can download an OGG player online, and most
modern audio editing programs should be compatible with the OGG format.
Recording Creation Index:

Managing Recordings
Using the Text-To-Speech Editor
Recording with your Microphone
Importing A Recording
4.10.2 Creating Recordings

Starting A New Recording
Creating new Recordings is a simple, easy process using Neuro-Programmer 2.
First, click the Recordings button on the left hand side of the screen. Then, on the screen that
appears click any of the three buttons: "Text-To-Speech Editor", "Microphone Recording" and
"Import".
User Guide
39
Managing Recordings
4.10.3 Microphone Recording

Microphone Recording
Clicking "Microphone Recording" on the Recordings screen will bring you to the screen below,
where the first tab (called "Microphone") will be selected. If at any time you want to use another
method to create your recording, simply click either the Text-To-Speech or Import tabs.
Recording Type
Selecting a recording type allows you to specify how NP2 will handle the recording during the
session.
An Alert will play once when your mind has reached its most receptive state while a Suggestion
will start looping at that time, and keep looping until the Session tells it to stop.
40
Recording
When ready, click "Record", which is the big, round red button.
Before speaking, wait 1 or 2 seconds for your recording device to initialize. To the left you will
see the words "Now Recording" when NP2 actually starts recording. If you are using Noise
Reduction, it is important that you wait 1 or 2 seconds after NP2 starts recording, so that NP2
can measure environmental static.
When done speaking your suggestions into the mic, click the same button again when you are
finished (it will be labelled "Stop"). A window will pop up telling you it is processing the
recording. It should only take a few seconds, but may take longer if your recording is particularly
large.
After it is done processing, click the "Test Recording" button to hear the results. If you don't like
the results of your recording, simply click the Record button again to overwrite the recording.
Volume Amplification
The volume and clarity of the recording will vary greatly depending on your microphone, sound
card and environment. Because of this, we have included an Amplification feature, which allows
you to increase or decrease the volume of your recording. You can change this setting any time
after saving your recording; the original recording will not be altered permanently using this
feature.
Be sure to test your recording carefully after using this feature. If a recording is amplified too
much, it will "overclip" or be cut off at parts if it exceeds the maximum volume level of the
computer.
Tip: Although the trackbar only goes up to 6000 (6 X the original volume), you can type any
number into the box to the right, such as 10000 or 20000, though in most cases amplification
that high is unnecessary.
Noise Reduction
Noise reduction is a fantastic NP2 feature, allowing you to make clean, professional recordings
using inexpensive recording equipment and outside of a professional recording studio.
When you click Record, NP2 will measure environmental "noise" and microphone errors. Later,
when you start speaking, it will record only your voice. All you have to do is remember to wait a
second or two before speaking. Depending on your equipment, only a fraction of a second may
be necessary, so experiment with your microphone to find the right procedure.
If you want to disable noise reduction, uncheck the "Use Noise Reduction" checkbox. This is not
recommended, however.
Saving
When you are satisfied with your recording, click the Save button in the lower right corner. A
dialog box will open asking you for the name of your new recording. You can change this later,
but you should choose a name that is descriptive of the content in the Recording.
User Guide
41

Managing Recordings
4.10.4 Importing
Importing Sounds For Use As Recordings
The third and final method for creating a Recording is to import a sound file of your choice.
Recording Type
session.
Importing
Click "Browse" and navigate to the sound file of your choice. After selecting a file, information
42
on it will be presented and you can preview it before saving.

Saving
Click the Save button in the lower right corner. A dialog box will open asking you for the name
of your new recording. You can change this later, but you should choose a name that is
descriptive of the content in the Recording.
Note: Importing a file does NOT move or copy the file to the Neuro-Programmer directory or
anywhere else. So, if you import a sound file and then later move the it to a different location,
NP2 will no longer be able to play the recording. So, make sure the recording is in a safe
directory that will not be moved.

Managing Recordings
4.10.5 Text-To-Speech
4.10.5.1 Text-To-Speech Editor
Text-To-Speech Editing
Clicking "Text-To-Speech Editor" on the Recordings screen will bring you to the screen below,
where the second tab (called "Text-To-Speech") will be selected. If at any time you want to use
another method to create your recording, simply click either the Microphone or Import tabs.
Recording Type
User Guide
43
session.
Text-To-Speech Synthesis
Enter the Text you want to use for your Suggestion and click "Play Speech" to test. You can
control the volume of the voice using the Volume slider, and the Rate, or speed, of the voice
with the Rate slider. You also should have a number of different voices to choose from.
Microsoft Sam is the default, but you can also get Microsoft Mike and Mary for free off of the
Neuro-Programmer website (FAQ) or the Microsoft Site. AT&T also has a number of very well
done and inexpensive voices which many users prefer to use.
The Neuro-Programmer also includes a number of advanced features to use with the Text-ToSpeech engine. You can implement pauses in the speech, use multiple voices, increase the
Rate or Volume on the fly, and more, by clicking the "Scripting" button. See Text-ToSpeech Scripting for more information.
Saving
Click the Save button in the lower right corner. A dialog box will open asking you for the name
of your new recording. You can change this later, but you should choose a name that is
descriptive of the content in the Recording.
More Text-To-Speech Voices (other than Microsoft Sam)

For higher quality and international voices, try the excellent voices available at Cepstral.com.
There are free voices (English only) available from Microsoft. You can download them here:
If you have Windows XP: http://www.transparentcorp.com/downloads/sapi51xp.msi
For Windows98/2000: http://www.transparentcorp.com/downloads/sapi.msi

Managing Recordings
44
4.10.5.2 Text-To-Speech Scripting

The Neuro-Programmer uses the Microsoft standard Text-To-Speech engine, called SAPI, which
includes scripting capabilities. Included below is a tutorial on how this scripting system works. It is a
bit technical, but should be easy to understand if you have experience with HTML or XML.
Note: You do NOT need to use the below scripting to use the Text-To-Speech tool. This is an
advanced option for advanced users who are familiar with XML. To use the tool otherwise, simply
type text into the Text-To-Speech Editor. It is very easy to use.
XML TTS Tutorial for SAPI 5.1

SAPI XML TTS for Application Developers
SAPI text-to-speech (TTS) extensible markup language (XML) tags fall into several categories.
SAPI TTS XML supports five tags that control the state of the current voice: Volume, Rate, Pitch,
Emph, and Spell.
Volume
The Volume tag controls the volume of a voice. The tag can be empty, in which case it applies to
all subsequent text, or it can have content, in which case it only applies to that content.
The Volume tag has one required attribute: Level. The value of this attribute should be an integer
between zero and one hundred. Values outside of this range will be truncated.
<volume level="50">
This text should be spoken at volume level fifty.
<volume level="100">
This text should be spoken at volume level one hundred.
</volume>
</volume>
<volume level="80"/>
All text which follows should be spoken at volume level eighty.
One hundred represents the default volume of a voice. Lower values represent percentages of
this default. That is, 50 corresponds to 50% of full volume.
Values specified using the Volume tag will be combined with values specified programmatically
(using ISpVoice::SetVolume). For example, if you combine a SetVolume( 50 ) call with a
<volume level="50"> tag, the volume of the voice should be 25% of its full volume.
Rate
The Rate tag controls the rate of a voice. The tag can be empty, in which case it applies to all
subsequent text, or it can have content, in which case it only applies to that content.
The Rate tag has two attributes, Speed and AbsSpeed, one of which must be present. The value
of both of these attributes should be an integer between negative ten and ten. Values outside of
this range may be truncated by the engine (but are not truncated by SAPI). The AbsSpeed
attribute controls the absolute rate of the voice, so a value of ten always corresponds to a value
of ten, a value of five always corresponds to a value of five.
User Guide
45
<rate absspeed="5">
This text should be spoken at rate five.
<rate absspeed="-5">
This text should be spoken at rate negative five.
</rate>
</rate>
<rate absspeed="10"/>
All text which follows should be spoken at rate ten.
Speed
The Speed attribute controls the relative rate of the voice. The absolute value is found by adding
each Speed to the current absolute value.
<rate speed="5">
This text should be spoken at rate five.
<rate speed="-5">
This text should be spoken at rate zero.
</rate>
</rate>
Zero represents the default rate of a voice, with positive values being faster and negative values
being slower. Values specified using the Rate tag will be combined with values specified
programmatically (using ISpVoice::SetRate).
Pitch
The Pitch tag controls the pitch of a voice. The tag can be empty, in which case it applies to all
subsequent text, or it can have content, in which case it only applies to that content.
The Pitch tag has two attributes, Middle and AbsMiddle, one of which must be present. The value
of both of these attributes should be an integer between negative ten and ten. Values outside of
this range may be truncated by the engine (but are not truncated by SAPI).
The AbsMiddle attribute controls the absolute pitch of the voice, so a value of ten always
corresponds to a value of ten, a value of five always corresponds to a value of five.
<pitch absmiddle="5">
This text should be spoken at pitch five.
<pitch absmiddle="-5">
This text should be spoken at pitch negative five.
</pitch>
</pitch>
<pitch absmiddle="10"/>
All text which follows should be spoken at pitch ten.
The Middle attribute controls the relative pitch of the voice. The absolute value is found by adding
each Middle to the current absolute value.
<pitch middle="5">
This text should be spoken at pitch five.
<pitch middle="-5">
This text should be spoken at pitch zero.
</pitch>
46
</pitch>
Zero represents the default middle pitch for a voice, with positive values being higher and
negative values being lower.
Emph
The Emph tag instructs the voice to emphasize a word or section of text. The Emph tag cannot be
empty. The following word should be emphasized.
<emph> boo </emph>!The method of emphasis may vary from voice to voice.
Spell
The Spell tag forces the voice to spell out all text, rather than using its default word and sentence
breaking rules, normalization rules, and so forth. All characters should be expanded to
corresponding words (including punctuation, numbers, and so forth). The Spell tag cannot be
empty.
<spell>
These words should be spelled out.
</spell>
These words should not be spelled out.
Direct item insertion tags
Three tags are supported that applications the ability to insert items directly at some level:
Silence, Pron, and Bookmark.
Silence
The Silence tag inserts a specified number of milliseconds of silence into the output audio
stream. This tag must be empty, and must have one attribute, Msec.
Five hundred milliseconds of silence <silence msec="500"/> just occurred.
Pron
The Pron tag inserts a specified pronunciation. The voice will process the sequence of phonemes
exactly as they are specified. This tag can be empty, or it can have content. If it does have
content, it will be interpreted as providing the pronunciation for the enclosed text. That is, the
enclosed text will not be processed as it normally would be.
The Pron tag has one attribute, Sym, whose value is a string of white space separated phonemes.
<pron sym="h eh 1 l ow & w er 1 l d "/>
<pron sym="h eh 1 l ow & w er 1 l d"> hello world </pron>
PartOfSp
The PartOfSp tag provides the voice with the part of speech of the enclosed word(s). Use this tag
to enable the voice to pronounce a word with multiple pronunciations correctly depending on its
part of speech. The PartOfSp tag cannot be empty.
The PartOfSp tag has one attribute, Part, which takes a string corresponding to a SAPI part of
speech as its attribute. Only SAPI defined parts of speech are supported - "Unknown", "Noun",
"Verb", "Modifier", "Function", "Interjection".
User Guide
47
<partofsp part="noun"> A </partofsp> is the first letter of the alphabet. Did you <partofsp
part="verb"> record </partofsp> that <partofsp part="noun"> record </partofsp>?
Context
The Context tag provides the voice with information which the voice may then use to determine
how to normalize special items, like dates, numbers, and currency. Use this tag to enable the
voice to distinguish between confusable date formats (see the example, below). The Context tag
cannot be empty.
The Context tag has one attribute, Id, which takes a string corresponding to the context of the
enclosed text. Several contexts are defined by SAPI and are more likely to be recognized by
SAPI compliant voices, but any string may be used. See documentation for a particular voice for
more details.
<context id="date_mdy"> 03/04/01 </context> should be March fourth, two thousand one.
<context id="date_dmy"> 03/04/01 </context> should be April third, two thousand one.
<context id="date_ymd"> 03/04/01 </context> should be April first, two thousand four.
Voice Selection Tags
There are two tags which can be used (potentially) to change the current voice: Voice and Lang.
Voice
The Voice tag selects a voice based on its attributes, Age, Gender, Language, Name, Vendor,
and VendorPreferred. The tag can be empty, in which case it changes the voice for all
subsequent text, or it can have content, in which case it only changes the voice for that content.
The Voice tag has two attributes: Required and Optional. These correspond exactly to the
required and optional attributes parameters to ISpObjectTokenCategory_EnumerateTokens and
SpFindBestToken functions. The selected voice follows exactly the same rules as the latter of
these two functions. That is, all the required attributes are present, and more optional attributes
are present than with the other installed voices (if several voices have equal numbers of optional
attributes one is selected at random). See Object Tokens and Registry Settings for more details.
In addition, the attributes of the current voice are always added as optional attributes when the
Voice tag is used. This means that, a voice which is more similar to the current voice will be
selected over one which is less similar.
If no voice is found that matches all of the required attributes, no voice change will occur.
The default voice should speak this sentence.
<voice required="Gender=Female;Age!=Child">A female non-child should speak this sentence, if
one exists.
<voice required="Age=Teen">
A teen should speak this sentence - if a female, non-child teen is present, she will be selected
over a male teen, for example.
</voice>
</voice>
Lang
The Lang tag selects a voice based solely on its Language attribute. The tag can be empty, in
48
which case it changes the voice for all subsequent text; or it can have content, in which case it
only changes the voice for that content.
The Lang tag has one attribute, LangId. This attribute should be a LANGID, such as 409 (U.S.
English) or 411 (Japanese). Note that these numbers are hexadecimal, but without the typical
"0x".
The Lang tag is a shortened version of the Voice tag with the Required attribute containing
"Language=TTS_Engine". So the following examples should produce exactly the same results:
<voice required="Language=409">
A U.S. English voice should speak this.
</voice>
<lang langid="409">
A U.S. English voice should speak this.
</lang>
Custom Pronunciation
An alternative to using the tag with the DISP and PRON attributes is to use custom
pronunciation. Using custom pronunciation, tags in the form of the following.
wordcan be written as
/disp/word/pron;
More specifically, if you want to recognize the word hello only when it is pronounced as ah and
display greeting when recognized, you would normally use something like the following.
hello
Using custom pronunciation, the above would translate to the following.
/greeting/hello/ah;
The Scripting Button

There is a button in the Text-To-Speech editor which contains a number of preset XML tags. This
should make scripting much easier.
User Guide
49

Managing Recordings
4.11
Creating Sessions [Pro Version Only]
4.11.1 Managing & Exporting Sessions

Exporting Sessions
After purchase, sessions can be exported a number of ways. If you want to add recordings and
apply other customizations and options, export from the Play screen.
For a quick export of a session, you can export directly from the Session List screen. Simply
select a recording and click the export button. Or right click the selected item to bring up the
session management menu.
50
Note: Exporting from the session list will not include any customizations, affirmations or other
settings from the Play screen. Also, if any session tracks have been specified as "Muted by
default" they will be excluded from the export, since the export uses the default session
configuration.
Burning CDs from Sessions
See the FAQ entry about this here.
Managing Sessions
On the User Session list screen you can Rename, Duplicate, Delete and Export sessions. To do
this simply right click the session list item you want to manage.
To delete a session you can also press the Delete key on your keyboard.
Playing from the Session List

On this screen you can also play a session you have selected. It will play the session in its default
configuration, so if any session tracks have been specified as "Muted by default" they will be
excluded from the preview.
Editing Sessions
Click Edit or double click the selected session list item to bring up the Session Editor screen
where the session can be modified.
Session Creation Index:

Managing & Exporting Sessions
Creating a new session
User Guide
51

Adding New Tracks
Track Options
Editing Track Nodes
Selections
Scaling
Session Options
Importing BWT & Sound Files
4.11.2 Creating A New Session

If you have the Professional version of the Neuro-Programmer, you can create your own
sessions using the powerful built in Session Editor.
Building a New Session

To create a new session, you can either click on the "Session Editor" button on the left hand side,
and then "New User Session", or you can click the "New Session" on the main sessions screen.
A new session will look like this at first:
52
Let's examine the above screen. What you see here is a single track with 2 Nodes, one at 15 Hz
and the other at 10 Hz. This means that this session, by default, will guide the listener's
brainwaves from 15 Hz down to 10 Hz Alpha.
All sessions are composed of 4 basic properties:
Session Options
Edited using the "Edit Options" button, session options include the Session Length,
Description, Instructions and other features.
Start and End Recording Times
The Author of a session needs to specify when the Neuro-Programmer should start playing
recorded suggestions, and when they should stop playing as well. You can change these
variables in the Session Options screen, and their times are indicated on the Tracks with
vertical blue-ish white lines.
Ramp Markers
Represented by small red markers at the top of every track, these values are also used to
mark the beginning and ending ramps, which are used in Customization settings for the
dynamic scaling option "Leave start and end ramps alone". For more information,
click here. You can also set these values in the Session Options screen.
Tracks
Tracks represent the content of a session. In the above screenshot, there is only one track,
named Tones1 because it is a Tone-based track. There are 4 types of Tracks possible in NP
Sessions. Tones, Background, Noise and AudioStrobe. You can have an unlimited number of
tracks in any session, but the more tracks you have the more computer power it will take to
play the session.
Nodes
User Guide
53
Nodes are points within a Track which represent the way the track will entrain brainwaves in
the listener. If a Node is set to 10, the Track will act to entrain brainwaves at 10 Hz, which
would be Alpha. If a Node is set to 5, the Track will entrain brainwaves of 5 Hz Theta. Nodes
also allow you to specify changes in the session such as Volume, Intensity and other
variables we will touch on later.
Undo: You can undo the last action by clicking the Undo button or by pressing Control + Z on the
keyboard. This is an essential feature when using selection and scaling features. If you make a
mistake, click Undo immediately. To redo the last action, click Undo again.
To improve performance on slower machines, you can disable the Undo function by clicking the
smaller button to the right of the Undo button. Note that this will erase any current undo action
history.

Adding New Tracks
Track Options
Editing Track Nodes
Selections
Scaling
Session Options
4.11.3 Timeline & Previewing

Every Track has a vertical and horizontal rule. The vertical represents the target brainwave, while
the horizontal represents the timeline in minutes. Every new session has a length of 30 minutes
by default, but you can change this to any number in the Session Options panel, discussed later.
To preview your session, simply click the Play button. If you would like to preview from a specific
point in the session, click anywhere on the track and a yellow vertical line will appear, indicating
the preview start position (called the Playback Cursor):
54
The preview start position here is set at 6 minutes, indicated by the yellow vertical line.
After setting the start position, click Play again. A red line will appear and start moving to the right
as the time progresses.
Click Rewind to set the start position back to 0.
Preview Optimization
There is one more important aspect of Previewing, called Preview Optimization. In order to
preview the session at points along the timeline (greater than 0), NP2 has to judge what the
session will sound like at that time. There are 3 ways for NP to do this.
There is a small button to the right of the Play button you can click to change your preview
setting:
Optimized for Speed - Should be nearly instantaneous, but loses some of its accuracy in
regards to phase and sound files. If you are using any sound files, it will play them from the
beginning no matter where in the timeline you position the cursor (to avoid having to process
the entire sound file at once).
Optimized for Medium Precision - Increases the accuracy and will process any sound files
contained in the session in order to position their starting points according to the timeline.
Optimized for High Precision - The preview will be exactly as it will be when you export or
play the session from the beginning. This preview takes much longer than the others, and the
length of time it takes to process will increase as you move the cursor further from the
starting point.
By default, preview is optimized for Speed. In most cases, there will be little to no audible
difference between the 3 types of optimization. However, in certain situations where the Phase
is changed (explained later), or when tracks have different node placements, a precise preview
becomes necessary to accurately gauge how the session will sound at various points on the
Timeline. If you are using a musical piece or a sound file other than a nature sound, you may
want to set it to Medium Precision so NP2 will "fast forward" to the correct time in the song,
instead of playing from the beginning as is done when optimized for Speed.
Setting the preview to High Precision will take significantly longer, so it is not recommended
unless you either want to be absolutely sure of what the session will sound like in the final
version, or you are using special Phasing effects that require increased precision for an
accurate preview.
User Guide

Adding New Tracks
Track Options
Editing Track Nodes
Selections
Scaling
Session Options
4.11.4 Adding New Tracks

Adding New Tracks
Click the "Add Track" button add a new track. An Add Track dialog will pop up:
55
56
Using this dialog you can specify the name and Type of your new Track. The different Track
Types are as follows:
Background: A Background Track will use an external sound file and will loop the sound file
until the session ends. While playing, the track will also be filtering the sound file and
embedding brainwaves directly into it via the various Modulation types (explained later).
Noise: A Noise Track will generate Noise (sounds like rain, wind or ocean waves), and will also
embed brainwaves directly into the noise, using methods similar to those used in the
Background track.
Tones: A Tones Track will generate tones. It can generate Binaural, Monaural or Tone Pulses
and has a number of options related to each (explained later).
AudioStrobe / Light: An AudioStrobe Track is used to send signals to AudioStrobe-compatible
LED Light Goggles, if you have any. This track is also used to specify the frequencies used for
the Screen Flashing option, as well as the colors used. If an AudioStrobe track is not specified,
the Screen Flashing function will take its frequencies from the first (top-most) Track in the
Session. However, if you do not specify an AudioStrobe track, LED Goggles will not work with
your session.
Copying Nodes from and existing Track
Using this dialog you can also copy all nodes from an existing track. To do this, click the "Copy
nodes" checkbox and then select the Track you want to copy nodes from. This allows you to
use one track as a template for all other tracks. Only the Node times and frequencies will be
copied over. The rest of the Node options will not be carried over to the new track.
Click OK to add your new Track.

Adding New Tracks
Track Options
Editing Track Nodes
Selections
Scaling
Session Options
User Guide
57
4.11.5 Track Options

Track Options
To access a Track's options, right click anywhere on the track (except on Nodes).
All Tracks have options unique to their type. After right-clicking the track, click the "Options..."
item. Depending on the Track's Type, it will bring up one of 4 different screens.
All options screens have some similar options:
Name / Title
One of them is the Name/Title of the track. All Tracks have a name, which is displayed in the
background of the track in transparent blue.
Balance
All Track options screens will also have a Balance slider. Using this slider, you can control the
speaker assignments of the track. This is particularly useful for providing a different pulse into
each ear, and therefore entraining different brain hemispheres. If you modify the Balance slider
on an AudioStrobe tracks, it will affect which eyes are "flashed". Note that the Balance slider
will not affect the Tones track if you select Binaural as the entrainment option, since it requires
both ears.
Optional & Muted Tracks
All Tracks also have the option of being a Required track and to be Muted by default. These
options relate to Advanced Session Use, where you can enable and disable certain types of
tracks from the Session Customization screen. If a track is marked as Required, the user will be
unable to disable it. If a track is muted by default, the user will have to enable the track before it
will be used in the session. These options allow you to give the user as many customization
options as possible while not sacrificing any of the basic elements of your session.
58
Note: If 2 or more tracks of the same Type have are set to different requirements, the strongest
requirement will be applied. For example, if one Tones track is set as Required and the other as
Optional, Tones will be required. If both tracks are set to Optional and only one is set to be
Muted by default, both tracks will be played until both are set to be Muted by default. Of course,
if you want a track to be Muted you can mute it at any time by right clicking and selecting
"Mute", but in this case the user would not be able to un-mute the track for customization
purposes.
The Tones Option Screen
Tone Track options have a number of special features. First, a Tone track can produce 3
different types of tones:
Binaural: Binaural Tones are actually composed of 2 slightly different tones, one in each ear.
The tones are then combined in the brain, and subtracted from each other to form a 3rd beat,
called a Binaural Beat, which pulses at a rate equal to the difference between the 2 tones. So
if you set a Binaural Tone Track Node to 10 Hz, and its Pitch is 200, NP will automatically
create 2 tones, 195 and 205. View the section on Tones, Auditory "Beats" for more
information.
Monaural: Monaural Beats are the same as Binaural Beats but are not produced in the brain.
instead, they are embedded into the sound and do not rely on left-right speaker assignments.
Using Monaural beats will produce much the same effect as using Pulsed tones with a Pulse
WaveForm of "Sine". View the section on Tones, Auditory "Beats" for more information.
Pulse: By far the most effective of the three tone types, Pulse uses only one tone and simply
turns it on and off, by increasing and decreasing the volume. The abruptness of this method
produces a very strong neural response, and is therefore usually the best choice for
entrainment using Tones.
Pulse has a number of options the others don't. When using Monaural or Binaural beats, the
Waveform of the pulse generated will always be Sine because of the way 2 tones subtract
from one another, meaning it will look like this:
User Guide
59
Pulsed Tones, on the other hand, have the option of using 2 other waveforms, which are
generally more effective:
Triangle:
And the most effective (and default), Square. No, it does not look exactly like a square,
because if it did you would hear small, annoying "clicks" after every pulse. Semi-Square
waves are still just as effective, however.
In addition to the Waveform option, you can also specify the starting Phase angle of the
pulse. By default it starts at 90 degrees, which would mean the sound would start in the
middle of one of the above pulses. For example, if the pulse was set to Triangle wave and the
phase set to 90, the pulse would start at the top (peak) of the triangle wave above.
Binaural and Monaural beats always start at a 90 degree phase angle, which is why all Phase
options are set to 90 by default (in case you decide to use Monaural or Binaural beats).
Tone Generation Options
Tone Track Options have a group of features which control the Waveform of the tones and
their pitch. (Note that the above discussed Waveforms apply to the Pulse waveform, not the
waveform of the Tone).
60
Use the Waveform selector to choose from 3 different types of Tones. Sine is a pure, relaxing
tone, and is usually best for entrainment. Triangle and Square waves sound like 80's
synthesizers, and can be popular with younger users, but are generally not used otherwise.
On this screen you will also see 2 Ratios. These control the Pitch of the tone in reference to
the Rate of the pulse. Typically, users prefer that the Pitch decreases as the Rate decreases,
since as the Rate decreases the listener's relaxation will increase and brainwaves will slow
down. By default, the Rate:Pitch ratio is 20:200 and 1:100, meaning that if you set a Node to
20 on a Tones Track, the pitch of that Tone will be 200. If you set it to 1, the Pitch will be 100.
If you set it to 10, the Pitch will be 150, and so on. Changing this ratio gives you an easy way
to change the pitch of all the Track's Nodes at once.
Note that you can override these ratios on a Node by Node basis if you choose (explained
later).
The Background Options Screen
The Background Options screen has many of the same options as the other screens,
including the waveform and Starting Phase, which will control the starting phase of the 5
different types of Modulation used in the background tracks (explained later).
User Guide
61
The main highlight of the Background Options screen is your ability to specify a different
background file and specify the number of seconds that NP should "smooth" the loop by.
Click Browse to open up a file select dialog, allowing you to specify a background file of your
choice. NP can use nearly any sound file type: MP3, WAV, OGG, WMA. The NeuroProgrammer 2 has its own sound format, which will have the extension ".NPSND", which
stands for Neuro-Programmer Sound.
NP will also "Smooth" the background loop for you. When a Background Track plays, it loops
the sound file you specify. However, sound files rarely loop smoothly, often producing a small
"click" at the end of every loop which can be very annoying after the first couple iterations.
So, NP has remedied this problem by fading out the last loop while fading in the next,
producing a smooth loop no matter what sound file is used. Here you can specify the number
of seconds the fade in/out will last, or you can disable Smoothing altogether by unchecking
the "Smooth Background Loop" box.
The Noise Options Panel
Noise Track Options are much the same as the others, with one exception: the Noise
generation Color and Options.
Color: Noise can be generated using a number of formulas. We have narrowed them down to
the 3 most popular, which are commonly called "colors". Brown tends to be the most relaxing,
often sounding like wind, while Pink and White can sound more like rain or static.
Noise Options: Noise Options define how the noise is generated in relation to speaker
assignments. There are 3 options: Stereo, which produces a separate track of Noise for each
speaker. Mono, which creates the same Noise for both speakers. And Inverse, which makes
both speakers the inverse of each other.
Using Mono makes the Noise sound as if it is coming from inside the front of your head, or
directly in front of you. Inverse makes it sound as if it is coming from middle or back of your
head. These effects will only really apply when you use headphones.
Note: If you use Inverse, make sure it is only for sessions which require headphones. If the
62
tracks combine with each other in a subwoofer they will cancel each other out to produce
silence. This may confuse the listener.
The AudioStrobe / Screen Flashing Options Panel
AudioStrobe Options contain only one unique feature, the ability to set Colors for the Screen
Flashing feature. Generally, the best color for "Off" is Black. The "On" color can be changed
to suite the mood of the session.
Also note that the Balance slider will not affect Screen Flashing, but will affect which eye is
"flashed", or stimulated.
Default Node Settings
All Options panels have a button labelled "Edit Default Node Settings". Clicking this will bring
up the following screen, where you can edit the default settings for all newly created nodes.
User Guide
63
The same screen is used for all Tracks (and the "Apply Settings To All Nodes" screen,
explained later), so some of the settings will be greyed out (disabled) if they do not apply to
the Track in question.
Features on this screen are grouped by the Tracks they apply to. These settings screen are
explained in more detail later.
Muting & Removing / Deleting a Track
To mute or remove a Track simply right click anywhere on the track, except on a node:
As you may have noticed, right clicking is a very important part of using the Session Editor.
For more information on the other options available via Right clicking, see the bottom of the
Editing Nodes section.

Adding New Tracks
Track Options
Editing Track Nodes
Selections
Scaling
Session Options
64
4.11.6 Editing Track Nodes (Points)

Dragging & Editing Nodes
On every Track there are a number of points, represented by small orange/yellow circles. These
points represent the brainwave state the listener will be in when the Track reaches that point on
the timeline.
You can drag Nodes to any point on the Track using your mouse. As you do, a ToolTip will pop up
tell you the Frequency and Time that the Node currently represents.
In the above screenshot, the Node is being dragged by the mouse, and is currently set to 12.5 Hz
(Vertical), and at about 7 minutes (Horizontal). This means that when the Track is listened to, the
User's brainwaves will be guided down, and at the 7 minute mark should be dominated (roughly)
by 12.5 Hz activity, which is just above Alpha (so the user would probably be more relaxed in this
state).
To edit a Node manually, you can left or right click on it. A left click will bring up the Node Options
screen, while a right click will display a menu allowing you to edit or delete the current node, or
add a new one a few minutes ahead on the timeline.
If you click "Edit Node", a Track-Specific screen will be displayed, giving you the general Node
options and options for that particular Track type.
Node Options
Node Options for every Track have some similar settings. One of them is Rate, or Frequency.
This number controls the Vertical position of the Node and therefore the brainwave state of the
listener. Another global setting is the Minutes box, which controls the Horizontal (timeline)
position of the node. There is also a Volume slider for every node, which represents the volume
level for the Track at that particular point in time.
All Node Options screens also have a "Ramp To" and "Ramp From". By default, all Nodes ramp
to each other (diagonally). By turning ramping off, the transition from one node to another will
be abrupt:
User Guide
With ramping
65
Without ramping
Tones Node Options Panel
Tone Node Options have a number of settings related to the Pitch and the 3 Tone-based
entrainment methods discussed earlier.
First, using this panel you can manually specify a Tone Pitch by unchecking the "Use Rate To
Pitch Ratio" box. If you remember, the Rate To Pitch ratio is set in the Tone Track Options
panel and acts to assign a pitch to each Node automatically based the Node's position on the
Track (vertically). This options screen allows you to manually overridden this ratio.
The Wave Depth slider applies to the Pulse method only, and controls the depth of the pulse.
By default, it is set to 100%, meaning the tone will be modulated from 0 to 100% and then
back again. If you were to slide this setting to half way, the tone would be modulated from 50
- 100% and back again, so the tone would at no time be completely silent.
The Binaural / Monaural panel of this screen shows you the voices used if you specified
either Binaural or Monaural tone-based entrainment methods. If you specified Binaural, Voice
1 will be given to the left ear and Voice 2 will be given to the right (unless you click "Invert
Voices" to switch the sides). If you specified Monaural, both voices will be combined on both
sides to form the pulse. View the section on Tones & Auditory Beats for more information.
Background Node Options Panel
66
Here you can specify the intensity of the 5 different filters applied to background sounds in
Neuro-Programmer 2. To raise the intensity of a filter, select the slider under its name and
drag the bar upwards. Doing so will make the filter more noticeable and in most cases more
effective, though will also decrease the subtlety and may distort the music or sound. In most
cases, a low intensity of about 20-30% is all that is required to promote effective entrainment.
Here is an explanation of the filters applied:
1) CrossFeed Modulation - This acts kind of like the "Balance" or "Pan" functions of any
stereo or media player, but instead of simply increasing or decreasing the volume of each
side, it feeds sound between sides. It does this in a circular, sine wave pattern at a rate per
second specified by the user (the rate being equal to the brainwave frequency, or band, you
wish to entrain). Crossfeed Modulation produces a very subtle entrainment that doesn't
negatively affect the music/soundscape.
This method only works with stereo sound files and only works effectively with headphones
on.
2) Pulse (Isochronic / Volume Modulation) - This method simply increases and decreases the
volume of the sound files in a triangular pattern at the specified rate per second. This is the
oldest and, according to many, the most effective form of entrainment - though it is probably
the least subtle.
This method will work with mono or stereo files and doesn't require headphones.
3) Low-Pass Filter Modulation - This method removes high frequencies in sine waves at the
specified rate per second. Used properly, it can be an incredibly effective and subtle way to
present a repeating stimulus. It can also be used to make "ocean wave" sounds out of noise
or similar sound arrangements.
This method will work with any sound file and doesn't require headphones.
4) Pitch Modulation - This method increases and decreases the pitch of the sound file in a
sine wave pattern at the specified rate per second. This can be especially useful with wind or
soundscapes with deeper tones. It is turned all the way down by default, as it is not at all
subtle when used with music.
User Guide
67
This method will work with any sound file and doesn't require headphones. This is NOT
recommended for use with music, except at very long intensities (like 1 or 2%).
5) Auto-Pan - This method increases and decreases the volume of the left and right sides in
a sine wave pattern at the specified rate per second.
This method will work with any sound file but does require headphones for maximum
effectiveness.
Note: In most cases it is not a good idea to combine Auto-Pan and Crossfeed, as they both
use techniques based on speaker assignments and can interfere with each other.
Noise Node Options Panel
Noise has many of the same options as the Background Track's nodes, but is missing the
Pitch and Crossfeed filters. Pitch and Crossfeed cannot be reliably applied to Noise, because
Noise is essentially a number of frequencies (pitches) chosen at random.
One option that is unique to Noise is the Smoothness slider, which will apply a global "LowPass" filter to the Noise. As explained above, a Low-Pass filter removes High Frequencies,
which can be grating on the ears. Setting the Smoothness to a high level will remove most of
the higher frequencies, and leave the track sounding deep and relaxing, like a soft wind.
Note that setting the noise Smoothness to 100% will produce silence, since it will be removing
all frequencies, high and low.
Also note that the Noise Track implements a Low-Pass Modulation filter in the same way the
Background track does. This filter is set to 0 by default, because the Smoothness is also an
LP filter and they can interfere with each other, causing the Low-Pass Modulation to raise in
intensity. However, NP is built to deal with this situation and in most cases you can use them
together without a problem.
AudioStrobe Node Options Panel
68
Using this screen you can specify a different level of Brightness for each Node on the
AudioStrobe Track. The Brightness will not apply to Screen Flashing. Also note that
AudioStrobe Brightness can be overridden by the user in their Session Customization
preferences. See Advanced Session Use for details.
Syncing, Moving, Clearing and Settings Options for ALL Nodes

Right clicking anywhere on a track (except on the nodes) will bring up the a number of useful
features an options:
Apply Settings To All Nodes - Use this feature to apply settings to All nodes within the track.
This is very useful for adjusting the volume and other node options.
Sync Nodes With Other Track - A very useful feature allowing you to Sync the nodes of the
selected track with those of any other available track. Note that only the positions of the nodes
are synchronized, not the options. The volume, filters, pitch and other options will not be
synchronized. Any new nodes created will use the default node options for the track (you can set
this in the Track Options.
Sync All Tracks With This - Use this feature to synchronize the node placements of all other
tracks with this one.
Move All Nodes - Use this feature to move all nodes vertically (frequency) or horizontally (in
User Guide
69
minutes).
Clear All Nodes - Clears all nodes except the first one (there must be at least 1 node per track).
Refresh Track - Clicking this will refresh the vertical scaling of the track, which conforms itself to
the frequencies used by the nodes in order to give you a better overall view of the track structure.
Selecting Nodes
You can also affect multiple nodes at once using selections. See the section on selections here.

Adding New Tracks
Track Options
Editing Track Nodes
Selections
Scaling
Session Options
4.11.7 Selections
Selections
Selections allow you to affect a large number of nodes at once, copy and paste or scale the session
dynamically.
To create a selection simply click anywhere on a session track and drag your mouse to the left or right:
70
Tip: To select the entire contents of the track, press Control + A on your keyboard.
Other Tracks:
When you create a selection, all the tracks in the session will contain the selection because
some selection actions can affect other tracks (such as Cut). The originally selected track's
selection will be a bit darker than the others. Similarly, the playback cursor (vertical yellow line)
will be brighter on the selected track but will also show up on all tracks at once.
Editing Selections
To edit a selection right click the selected track and click "Edit Selection". If no selection exists,
click the "Set Selection" item from the right click menu. The selection editing screen will then
pop up:
Here you can finetune your selection to the exact parameters you wish. In the text boxes next to
Minutes specify the selection start and end values. You can also specify these values in
timespan form, allowing you to edit minutes, hours and seconds individually.
If you enter a value into the Selection Length field it will automatically add that value to your
starting selection value.
Click "Set Playback Cursor" if you want to clear the selection and set the point of playback for
User Guide
71
previewing. Clicking "Select None" will clear the selection and set the Playback Cursor to 0.
Select All will select the entire contents of the track.
Copy/Paste
After selecting a set of nodes, you can copy them by pressing Control + C on your keyboard or
by right clicking the selection and clicking "Copy Nodes".
Once copied, click anywhere on the track (the yellow playback cursor should appear) and press
Control + V on your keyboard, or right click the track and click "Paste Nodes". The copied
nodes will then be duplicated and the new nodes placed in relation to the current position
(yellow line).
You can also paste nodes from one track to another (or from one session to another), but only
the node placements will be pasted, not the settings such as volume or intensity levels.
Deleting Nodes
While nodes are selected, you can either press the Delete key on your keyboard or right click
and select "Delete Nodes" from the menu.
Applying Settings To Selected Nodes
Use the Apply Settings to Selected option to change the parameters of a all the selected nodes
at once.
72
Depending on the currently selected track type (tones, background, noise, etc), different
settings will be available to you. Volume (or audiostrobe brightness) is always available for all
tracks.
Advanced Selection Options
Right click your selection and move your mouse over "Advanced Selection Options".
Using this menu you can perform a number of useful tasks with your Selection:
Cut Selection: Use this to cut the selected time out of the session altogether. Any nodes inside
the selection will be deleted, and any nodes after the selection will be moved backward and the
session length changed accordingly.
Select All - Selects the entire content of all tracks. You can also press Control + A on the
keyboard to use this feature.
Copy Nodes (All Tracks): Instead of copying nodes from one track to another, you can copy
the nodes of all tracks at once and then paste them all at once. This is very useful if you want to
keep all the tracks synchronized. You can also press Control + Shift + C on the keyboard to use
this feature.
Delete Nodes (All Tracks): Deletes the nodes selected in all tracks. You can also press
User Guide
73
Control + Delete on the keyboard to use this feature.

Move Selected Nodes: Brings up a dialogue to move the selected nodes vertically (by
frequency) or horizontally (forward or backward in time).
Scale Duplicate Selections: See the section on dynamic scaling.

Adding New Tracks
Track Options
Editing Track Nodes
Selections
Scaling
Session Options
4.11.8 Scaling
Scaling
Scaling is an easy way to dramatically change the timeline of a session and the placement of
nodes. It can also be a way to duplicate patterns.
Note about Ramp Markers and Recording Times: When you scale a session, the ramp
markers (red triangles) and recording times (vertical light blue lines) will automatically change and
scale along with the session and nodes.
Selection Scaling
To scale a portion of your session, create a selection:
74
After you create the selection, right click on the track. Mouse over the Advanced Selection
Options menu to view the Scale / Duplicate Selection options.
You have two options on this menu:

All Tracks: Any nodes selected in any track will be affected by this scale.
This Track Only: Only nodes in this track will be affected by the scale.
Note that the session itself will be scaled according to the options on the Scale Selection screen
(below), regardless of whether you choose to edit all track nodes or not.
Scale Selection screen
User Guide
75
Selected Segment: The Scale Selection feature allows you to edit the selection itself from
this screen, to make it easy for you to precisely define the area you want scale. Click the edit
button to define the parameters of the selection.
Selection Scaling:
Scale Length: Initially the number in this field will be the present length of the selection.
Change this number to expand or contract its length and scale its content. When you change
this number the "Session Length" value you will change, if you have the Scale Session option
checked.
Node Handling:
You can scale a selection without nodes, but if there are nodes selected they can be handled
in a number of ways:
Scale Nodes: The nodes will be scaled along with the selection, moving either forward or
backward along the timeline.
Duplicate Node Pattern: Instead of moving the selected nodes, their pattern will be
duplicated such as in the screenshot below. Note that this option only applies if the selection
is enlarged. Otherwise the nodes are left in their present position.
76
Expand Left: The selection is scaled to the left and the nodes are moved to the right end of
the selection:
Expand Right: Nodes are left alone.
Session Scaling
Scale session accordingly: Make sure this option is checked if you want the session length
to be scaled along with the selection. If it is not checked and there are no nodes selected, the
scale will have no effect. This option is mainly useful when duplicating node patterns.
Other Scaling Options

Insert Time
You can insert time at any point in the session. This allows you to easily expand a specific part
of a session, or to create distance between certain nodes.
To insert time, left click the part of your track where you want insert time. Make sure the
playback cursor (yellow line) is in the correct position:
User Guide
77
Right click the track and click "Insert Time...". An input box will open, allowing you to specify the
number of minutes you want to insert.
Cut Selection
You can take a portion of your session out completely by using the Cut Selection feature. Any
nodes in the selection will be deleted and the session will be scaled down accordingly. For more
information, see the section on Selections.

Adding New Tracks
Track Options
Editing Track Nodes
Selections
78
Scaling
Session Options
4.11.9 Session Options

Editing Session Options
Every session has a set of global options, such as Length and Description. You can edit these
settings by clicking the "Edit Options" button to the left of the Save button on the bottom of the
Session Editor.
Here you can specify the length in minutes, or you can use the TimeSpan box to specify it in
hours, minutes and seconds.
Play session's last nodes to infinity
A session can also be played to infinity, which allows the user to decide when to stop the session.
The last nodes of every track in your session will then be played until the user clicks "Stop" on the
session play screen.
Start / End Recording Times
If your session is meant to be used with Mental Programming techniques such as recorded
Suggestions, you will also want to specify a Recording Start and End time here. The Start time is
User Guide
79
when the recordings will start fading in, and the stop time is when the recordings will be faded out.
If you don't want the recordings to fade out at all, click the "Play recordings until session ends"
box.
These values are represented by the vertical blue-ish white lines in every track.
Ramp Markers
If your session implements ramps (such as in relaxation sessions, where a session often begins in
beta and ramps to alpha or theta), it is a good idea to set the beginning and end ramp times. The
first should mark the time when the first ramp of the session ends, and the second should mark
the time when the last ramp of the session begins.
If the user decides to customize the length of the session in the Play screen, NP2 will use these
marker settings to determine what part of the session should be scaled (the part between the
ramp markers).
If your session does not ramp, or dynamic scaling is unnecessary, check the option under the
Ramp marker times.
Ramping values are represented by the little red triangles at the top of every track.
Description & Instructions
Instructions will be displayed when the user opens a session. You should include any necessary
equipment, settings, mental techniques or anything else that needs to be used with this session. It
is also a good idea to specify an optimal time and place to use the session, whether the session is
meant to be used with eyes open or closed, and whether or not headphones are required.
The Description area allows you to explain the research behind the session and its various
benefits.
Misc Data
Use this option to store private miscellaneous data for your own reference. This data will not be
seen by the user unless the session is brought into the session editor.
Saving Your Session

To Save your session simply click the Save button on the bottom right side of the Session
Editor screen. You will be prompted to choose a name for your session, which you can change
later at any time from the User Sessions screen by clicking "Rename".

Adding New Tracks
Track Options
80
Editing Track Nodes

Selections
Scaling
Session Options
4.11.10 Importing BWT & Sound Files

Importing
There are 2 buttons on the User Sessions screen which will allow you to import a session from
various sources:
Importing BWT (Brainwave Transform) Files

BWT Files are made in either Brain Sound Studio or Neural Noise Synthesizer. While they are
both also made by Transparent, their files are a different format, made for a different type of
track view. So when you import them into NP2 you unfortunately won't be able to edit them. But
you will be prompted with a simple options screen:
User Guide
81
This screen allows you to specify many of the same options that you would in the Session
Options screen of a regular NP session.
If you are importing a Brain Sound Studio (BSS) BWT File, you will need to specify your
preferred background sound (since BSS is made to filter sound and music).
Importing Sound Files
Importing sound files allows you to use NP2 with any sessions made with other entrainment
software and hardware. Most devices can export to a sound file of some kind, which can then
be imported into NP2.
After clicking the button to Import, you will be prompted to select a sound file. After you have
made your choice, the Session Editor will open with a single track labelled "Imported Sound".
From there you can add your own tones or other components you wish, or you can simply click
Save to assign a name to the imported session.
82

Adding New Tracks
Track Options
Editing Track Nodes
Selections
Scaling
Session Options
4.12
Creating Scripts
4.12.1 Managing & Exporting Scripts

Exporting Scripts
Scripts will be exported along with a session export, if a script is selected. But you can also export
a script directly, without the addition of a session, from the Session List screen. This is useful if
you prefer to use only the scripting features of NP2 for yourself or your clients - or if you are
assembling a session in a separate audio editing program.
User Guide
83
Managing Scripts
On the Script list screen you can Rename, Duplicate, Delete and Export scripts. To do this simply
right click the script list item you want to manage.
To delete a script you can also press the Delete key on your keyboard.
Script Creation Index:

Managing & Exporting Scripts
Adding Tracks & Track Options
4.12.2 Creating A New Script

Scripts allow you to add hypnotic inductions, verbal guidance and complex forms of suggestion to
your session, such as Dual Induction where a different set of suggestions are played into each ear.
Usually, you should tailor a script for a specific session, or build a generic script for a specific
session length, especially if you plan to vocally guide the listener back up to a normal (Beta) state
near the end of the session. The Script will start playing as soon as the session begins, but will also
fade out along with the session. If your script is too long, it will be faded out prematurely. If it is too
short, the entrainment may not match the script.
Creating A Script
To begin, click the Scripts on the left of the screen. A list of current scripts will display. Click New
Script at the top.
84
Now you should see an empty script. The length is set, by default, to 30 minutes. You can change
the length by clicking Edit Options on the bottom.

4.12.3 Adding Tracks & Track Options

Script Tracks are used to specify where the script components will start and stop playing. You can
add an unlimited number of tracks in the NP2 Script Editor, and each track can be precisely
controlled via the Script Track options screen. A number of effects and options can also be applied
using these options.
In the Script Editor, click the "Add Track" button on the top right corner of the Script Editor.
User Guide
The following screen will pop up:
Here you can set the many features of a script track.
Select your Recordings

85
86
First, you should determine what recording you will use. You can select a sound path directly, or
you can choose from the installed Recordings already available. Clicking the Browse button will
allow you to pick from nearly any type of sound file on your hard drive (MP3, WMA, OGG, WAV,
etc).
Tip: When you share script files with other users, you can include the necessary sound files in the
same directory, or tell you friend to put them in the Script Files directory. NP2 will detect the files
automatically.
If you decide to use one of your installed Recordings, click the Use Recording radio button and
select the desired recordings from the treeview. You can select multiple recordings and can
specify the delay (in seconds) between them.
You can also Import recordings directly into your the recordings selector using the "Import" button.
If you select more than one recording, you can specify the sequence in which the recordings will
be presented:
This can be particularly useful for Dual Induction and other hypnotic techniques.
User Guide
87
TimeLine
At the top of the Script Track options screen you will see a "Timeframe" group which allows you to
specify where on the timeline (in minutes) the script will begin and end. If the duration you specify
exceeds the length of the recording(s) you selected, they will loop unless you disable looping
under the Track Options tab.
If you don't want the recording(s) to loop, you can tell NP2 to Auto-Scale the length of the track to
the selected recording(s) under Track Options.
Auto-Scaling automatically changes the end time to match the length of the recording(s) and the
start time you set. You can turn on Auto-Scaling by checking the Auto-Scale checkbox, or by right
clicking the track in the track view.
Track Options Tab

Click the "Track Options" tab to access Volume, Balance (Speaker Assignments) and advanced
track options such as Fading and Pan Modulation.
Volume & Speaker Assignments (Balance)

You can individually modify the volume and balance (pan) of all tracks in a script, making it
easy add Dual Induction effects to your session.
88
Pan Modulation
Enabling pan modulation will cause the recording(s) you selected to be panned from right to left
speaker assignments at the rate per second you specify. This can be handy for automating the
Dual Induction process and other special effects.
Fade
If you want your recordings to fade in and out, you can specify the duration of the fades here.
Looping
By default, the recording(s) you selected will be looped if the length of the track exceeds the
total length of the recording(s). You can disable this feature by unchecking the "Enable
Looping" checkbox.
If you leave Looping enabled, you can specify the delay between loops.
Your New Script Track

Optionally, you can enter a title for your Track at the top of the screen.
When done, click "OK". The Script Track will look something like this:
Move your mouse over the Track to drag, shorten or lengthen the track as needed.
To change the length of the entire Script, click "Edit Options" on the bottom right of the Script
Editor.

User Guide
89
4.12.4 Track View & Previewing

Playing, Fast Forwarding
To preview your Script, click the Play button at the bottom left of the Script Editor.
As the script plays, a vertical yellow line will move along the top, indicating the current position.
If you want to jump ahead and preview at a specific point in your script, click the top of your
script. A red arrow will move to that point, indicating the currently selected preview position.
If you then click play, the audio will start at the point in the timeline you indicated.
To reset the start position to 0, click the Rewind button to the left of the Play button.
Removing, Muting and Playing Tracks Individually

If you right click the track you will see a number of options available. You can mute the track,
preview it by itself, Auto-Scale, edit options or Remove the track altogether.

90
4.13
Super Learning Tool

The Super Learning Tool (SLT) is the best way to memorize a large amount of information quickly,
by allowing you to present pre-recorded information when your mind is at its most absorbent. Lower
brainwave patterns will also assist in committing the information directly to long term memory. So,
not only will you memorize more using the SLT, you will also retain what you memorize
permanently.
The SLT makes the process particularly easy, by scaling itself to the recorded material you select,
and allowing you to specify the number of times you want the material to loop.
You can access the SLT off of the Tools item on the Main Menu, or by clicking the "Tools" button on
the left of the main screen.
SLT is like a Wizard:
Click "Begin", and on the next subsequent screen make your headphone selection. The below
screen determines which Super Leaning Template it will use (in the Templates directory).
User Guide
91
Click Next. On the next screen you will choose the recorded material which will be played when
your mind reaches its most absorbent state during the session.
Selecting The Recorded Material
92
On this screen you can select any of the already installed recordings, or you can choose to use a
sound file on your hard drive. Click the "Browse" button to import a sound file.
To test the recording, click Preview. As the recording plays, adjust the Recording Volume to your
preference.
To hear the recordings with the SLT session, click the little button to the right of Preview. A menu
will pop up, select "Preview Recordings with Session" as below:
When ready, click "Next".
Specifying The Repetitions
Here you can specify how many times you want the recorded material to loop. The more
repetitions the better, but the more loops you specify the longer the session will be. So, you have
to gauge how much time you have to use the session, and specify the loop number appropriately.
When finished, click "Next".
Using the Super Learning Tool

As you can see, the next screen (below) looks much like the session play screen. You can
User Guide
93
customize, change the volume, export and view all the information on the session.
Notice the total length of the session is displayed under the stop button. As mentioned above, the
length of the session will be scaled according to the recorded material length and number of loops
specified. On this screen, the length will change if you click Previous and change your settings, or
if you click Customize and change the delay between recordings (increasing the delay will
increase the total length).
Click the play button when you are ready to begin. Like all sessions, you should be in a quiet
place where you can relax. Make sure you are in a comfortable position, in a chair or lying down,
with your eyes closed through the entire session.
See the Academic Strategies protocol for more information on using the Super Learning Tool
and other features useful for students and academics.
4.14
Sharing Sessions & Scripts

Sharing your home-made NP Sessions and Scripts is an important part of the community. Read this
section over before trying to send or upload any of your NP files.
Configuring Files For Easy Sharing

If your Session or Script uses sound files that are not built into NP2, you will have to include the
necessary sound files along with the script or session file you wish to share.
94
To make it easy, simply include any necessary files in the same directory as the session or script.
When someone wants to play or import a file, NP2 will automatically detect the presence of the
sound files in the same directory.
There is one exception, however. If you are sharing a Script that uses one or more custom-made
Recordings from the Recordings list, it may not import correctly unless the person are you are
sharing with has the same Recording list. The best solution to this is to copy the necessary
recordings into the Script Files folder. You can access both folders from The View menu. Once
you have moved the recording, edit your script and instead Import the recording from the Script
Files folder.
Exporting Sessions & Scripts

There are 2 ways to share a Session or a Script:
The Scripts and User Sessions Folder
The easiest way to share an NP2 file is to locate it in your Script or User Session directories.
The best way to access these directories is by using the View item on the main menu:
User Guide
95
Save As
Both Sessions and Scripts are typically saved to their default folder locations (above), but can
also be saved to a custom location of your choice, from within the Session or Script editors.
In either editor you will see, on the bottom right of the screen, the Save button along with a
smaller button to its right. Click that button for additional saving options:
Upon clicking Save As you will be prompted to give it a name of your choice, and after that you
will be given a chance to save it anywhere on your hard drive. For example, you could save it
to your Desktop and then easily email it to your friend from there.
Importing Sessions & Scripts

To import a file is easy. If you know where it is on your hard drive, you should be able to find it
and simply double click it (if you have associated NPS and NPSCRIPT files, from the Settings
menu).
Another method is to use the File item on the main menu:
If there are any additional sound files needed for the Script or Session, they will be imported into
the appropriate NP2 directories automatically, if they were included in the same directory.
96
4.15
Registration
If you have the downloadable version, you should see this screen when the program first opens:
To continue with your trial, click Continue. If you have already purchased, click Enter Key to enter
your key.
Circled in red is your the location of your Hardware ID.

If you have purchase the application but have not yet acquired a license, or you need a new one,
you will need the Hardware ID. After nothing your ID, go to this page:
User Guide
97
http://www.transparentcorp.com/products/np/getlicense.php and type in the same information you

used to purchase the application (should be in your email receipt). You will then be mailed your
license, based on the hardware ID provided.
Entering In Your License

When you have your License Key, enter it in using the above screen. Be sure to enter in your
name and key EXACTLY as they are given to you, CAPS and all. Copy and paste the information
if possible.
Have Questions?
Visit the FAQ!
Top Level Intro

Part
Important Concepts
Important Concepts
5.1
Mind Programming
5.1.1
What is Mind Programming?
99
What does the term "Mind Programming" mean?

Mind Programming incorporates a number of techniques, schools of thought, disciplines, theories,
and practices. Its basic goal is to change one's reaction to internal and external stimuli or to help
the mind create a physical or emotional effect on its own (e.g.: happiness, confidence). It
harnesses the brain's built-in programming mechanisms to help increase intelligence, end bad
habits, stop negative mental patterns and much more. It allows you to focus all subconscious
resources on tasks you wish to accomplish. In other words, Mind Programming can help achieve
whatever you desire.
The truth is everyone's mind is programmed, and at one point or another, everyone has
reprogrammed their mind in some way. Do you start to feel better almost instantaneously when
taking medicine, despite being aware of the time it takes for the medicine to take effect? Can you
make yourself hungry by thinking of food? Have you ever experienced the Placebo effect? Did
you know that if you smile for approximately sixty seconds you will become happier? All of these
things are a direct result of the mind being conditioned, or programmed. The mind programming
covered in this application however, is much more broad and powerful than these examples.
Intentional Mind Programming has existed for thousands of years. Yogis and Buddhists have
been using deep meditation for mind programming, among many other things. Hypnotists have
been programming the minds of people for over a century. Psychotherapists have been helping
people install new and healthier programs. In fact, until just recently, programming the mind in
this deeper sense has been an expensive, lengthy process. It has required extreme practice,
patience, and dedication. And while it still requires (and will always require) these three things,
mind programming has advanced far past older methods. It is now faster, inexpensive and easier
to learn; actually this application does most of the work for you!
Thanks to recent advances, people are able to use carefully prepared
audio and visual stimulation to induce an extensive variety of mental states. Many of these leave
the mind more receptive to reprogramming.
Your subconscious is constantly working, constantly responding to situations, and constantly
acting on your fears and desires (although not always in the way you would like). After
reprogramming your mind, your subconscious will work for you and you alone. If you want
something of yourself, let your subconscious be your ally, program it in!
Take some time to read over the following sections:

Mental Programs
Willpower, Imagination and Belief
Sensory Modalities
100
5.1.2
Mental Programs
What is a Mental Program?
A Mental Program is a set of instructions, embedded deep in the brain. It executes upon an
internal or external stimulus, causing the mind and body to follow the set of instructions until the
program stops. They can also be constantly running, with no end in sight.
Mental Programs are largely sub-conscious and completely out of our control. There are many
reasons for this. One reason is that they are often state-bound, meaning they could only be
remembered in the same (or similar) state to the one in which the program was first coded into
memory.
Another reason would be that many Mental Programs are coded during a traumatic event, where
most brain activity is switched to the right side of the brain, which is emotion-based and largely
non-verbal.
How are Mental Programs formed?

Most Mental Programs are formed when we are very young, and are influenced primarily by the
actions and words of parents during the first 7 - 8 years of our lives, when our brains are
functioning mostly in Delta and Theta (see Brainwaves). In these years, our minds are hypersuggestible and will accept comments from an authoritative figure as fact. Furthermore, the mind
is very open to programming when in an emotional or traumatic state.
For example, to a child, trauma often exists in the form of sharp parental disapproval. Many
parents will become frustrated with children when they are having trouble reading, possibly
slapping the child and saying, "You'll never learn!" The child's mind, being in such an open,
receptive state, would associate the activity (reading) with the negative experience (being
slapped). Moreover, the parent saying "You'll never learn" would affect the child (if old enough to
understand the sentence), perhaps leading to learning problems and self-sabotaging behavior
later in life. These are simple, and all too frequent, examples of mental programming in action.
How can Mental Programs be intentionally programmed, or coded into memory?
Psychologist Ernest Lawrence Rossi wrote in his book The Psychobiology of Mind-Body Healing,
the Limbic System works to convert words, feelings and visualizations into a language that the
body can understand. Using the techniques described in these documents, people can reprogram
their minds, erasing old, unwanted programs, and bringing new, healthier programs into memory.
What's more, by stimulating brainwaves we can create specific mental states which greatly
amplify the effect of these techniques.
Index:
Sensory Modalities
Further Reading
Software For The Mind, Emmett E. Miller, M.D.
Important Concepts
101
Programming and Metaprogramming in the Human Biocomputer, John C. Lilly

What To Say When You Talk To Your Self, Shad Helmstetter, Ph.D.
The Power of Your Subconscious Mind, Dr. Joseph Murphy, Ph.D.
Brain Lateralization and Rescripting, Thomas Budzynski, Ph.D.
Suggestology and Outlines of Suggestopedy, Georgi Lazonov
5.1.3

The Human Identity
What are you? Are you your brain? Are you your body? Are you a combination of the two? When
most people use the word "I" they tend to mean it in reference a whole person, made up of many
different pieces. "I" usually refers to the personality, the body and the brain. That is deceiving,
though, because one could still be called "I" even after losing most of the above. And if we are
made up of only our personality, body and brain, why is it we can observe our own emotions, our
own thoughts? What is doing the observing? Seasoned meditators have learned to clear their
mind and watch as their thoughts flow by, as a psychotherapist would observe a patient. What is
watching your thoughts? If common knowledge is true (that "I" is made up of our thoughts and
feelings), observing our thoughts without intervention should not be possible, because we should
be our thoughts. But that is not true. In order for a thought to be observed there must be
something doing the observing.
There is a part of the brain that is inherently different than any other part. Its purpose is to
observe your brain and interact with your will. It is the consciousness. It is self-awareness. John
C. Lilly, M.D., calls it the Self-Metaprogram, or a mental structure that observes, controls,
organizes and governs other mental structures. It might not even be a specific part of the brain, it
might be made up of hundreds of little pieces from all other parts of the brain, but this observing,
conscious mechanism exists in all humans. It is more base than intelligence, thought or emotion.
It is the only part of you that hasn't changed since you were born. If you were to take away
everything but it, you would be left without any motion, emotions, sensations or thoughts. You
would desire nothing. You would not even fear death.
Try this little experiment. Think of something that makes you embarrassed or angry. Observe as
your stomach tenses up and your mood changes from calm to angry. The part of you that is
observing this brain-body reaction has no bias, no filters, and no anger. Anger and
embarrassment are simple mechanisms of the brain. They can be turned on and off at will, like
light switches. You just turned one of them on. After a little knowledge and practice, it becomes
just as easy to turn them off.
So, in effect, your brain is a computer. The brain consists of all of your emotions, all your pain, all
your thoughts, memories, beliefs, judgments and personality quirks. You, the user and the
observer of this computer, can control all of it via Mind Programming.
Mind Over Body

In recent years it has become apparent that the brain is the single most powerful acting force
upon the body. The body and mind are inseparable.
The most obvious example of this principle can be found in what the scientific community calls
the "placebo effect", which is a broad term used to describe a huge range of unexplained
phenomena such as so-called miracle cures. In essence, the placebo effect is a response to a
102
stimulus one believes will work. Simply believing something will work is often enough to make it
work. In fact, Psychologist Ernest Lawrence Rossi wrote in his book, The Psychobiology of MindBody Healing, that the placebo effect accounts for nearly 56% of the effectiveness of analgesics,
like Morphine. This means that when you take a pain killer, more than half of the effect is the
direct result of your belief in the pill. And the effect is not in any way limited to pain killers. The
placebo response shows up in nearly every therapeutic agent!
Rossi also wrote that the Limbic System works to convert words, feelings and visualizations into a
language that the body can understand, the language of neuro-chemical messenger molecules
called neuropeptides, which flow through the entire body. He concludes that Mental Programs
become hard-wired into not only our brain, but into individual cells as well.
There are more studies that directly link the mind and body. Dr. Candace Pert wrote of these links
in her book Molecules Of Emotion. Her pioneering work into the brain-body connection has led to
the discovery of a complex network of chemicals, stimulated by the brain, directly affecting the
health of the body on the cellular level. She discovered a number of cellular receptors and
preferential chemical bindings that act as information pathways from the brain to all cells in the
body. It has been shown that all events, from sex with a preferred partner to a traumatic event,
affect the body directly, positively or negatively.
It has been also shown that generally happy people are three times less likely to get the common
cold (and other ailments) than unhappy people (Journal Of Psychosomatic Medicine, July 11,
2002). This could be linked to the infamous stress hormone, Cortisol, which has numerous
adverse effects on the human body (cancer, heart disease, etc).
Studies done by the famous Cleve Backster indicate an even more direct connection from the
brain to individual cells. He allegedly separated cells from the body and measured cellular
reactions to emotional changes in the mind of the patient. This particular study is intriguing but
should probably be regarded with skepticism until follow up studies are done. Still, it is very clear
that as goes the mind, so goes the body.
Therefore, two assumptions can be made.
1) The mind is able to change the body if properly programmed to do so.
2) In order for the body to be kept in peak physical condition, the mind must also be
kept in a peak mental condition.
Index:
Mental Programs
Sensory Modalities
Further Reading
Programming and Metaprogramming in the Human Biocomputer, John C. Lilly, M.D.
NLP, The New Technology Of Achievement, The NLP Comprehensive Training Team
Important Concepts
103
Molecules Of Emotion, Dr. Candace Pert

Imagery and Healing, Jeanne Achtenberg
The Psychobiology of Mind-Body Healing, Ernest Lawrence Rossi
Hypnosis in Anesthesiology. Sadove, M.S., Illinois Medical Journal
Meditations from the Tantras, Swami Satyananda Saraswati
Awakening The Mind, Anna Wise
5.1.4
Hyper-Suggestibility is a term used to describe a drowsy, child-like state where information is rapidly
absorbed into the subconscious; bypassing the usual mental filters that information is put through.
In this state of extreme receptivity, images and verbal suggestions are more likely to be accepted
and acted upon. [see Tom Budzynski, Ph.D., under Further Reading]
It is common knowledge that children learn faster than adults. Researchers believe that one of the
reasons for this is that young children spend most of their time with the dominant brainwave being
Theta or Delta. But children don't just learn words and arithmetic; they learn how to survive, indeed,
how to think. They are, in effect, building up a subconscious that will support them later in life. For
example, in the first years of childhood subconscious mechanisms need to be built to handle limb
and body movement. Later comes recognition, then speech, and so on.
To fully explain it, let's jump ahead a couple years to something you may be more familiar with:
learning how to drive. When first learning you may have been nervous, having to be constantly
watch the road. Conversations were very distracting, because all of your concentration had to be
focused on driving. But it isn't that way any more is it? Now you can drive to work and back and not
even remember half of it. This is because driving has become a subconscious mechanism, not a
conscious one.
In this same way, your subconscious has developed an action to suit nearly every situation. If you
don't like public speaking, it is because your subconscious has built up a nervous reaction to it. If
you love eating pineapple, it is because your subconscious has a good reaction to it. Most of the
time you will have no idea where these mental programs come from, because they were coded into
memory while you were a child, at a time when your subconscious was growing faster than your
long-term memory.
In the Theta, or hyper-suggestibility, state, learning things and committing them to the subconscious
is much faster. But since you are an adult you only enter the Theta state when sleeping or while
using mental tools like the Neuro-Programmer, so the only way to use the hyper-suggestibility of
Theta is with recorded suggestions [see Michael Hutchison, MegaBrain, 1994].
A study was done by Felipe at Yale University where attitude changing suggestions were given to
subjects during various mental states. Only during drowsiness or sleep did the suggestions have
any significant effect. During alert, waking states and deeper sleep stages, the suggestions had little
to no effect on attitude and behavior.
Inducing a Receptive Brainwave State:
104
Alpha/Theta Research
Index:
Mental Programs
Sensory Modalities
Further Reading
EEG Patterns Associated with High Hypnotizability: Practical Clinical Implications Hammond, D.
Corydon, Ph.D.
The Case for Alpha-Theta: A Dynamic Hemispheric Asymmetry Model. Tom Budzynski, Ph.D.,
ISNR (International Society for Neuronal Regulation)
Clinical Guide to Light and Sound, Thomas Budzynski, Ph.D.
Learning and sleep. Rubin, R (1970). Nature, 226, 447.
Verbally induced behavioral response during sleep. Evans, R J., Gustafson, L. A., O'Connell, D.
N., Orne, M. T. & Shor, R. E., Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 1, 1-26.
Attitude change during interrupted sleep, A. Felipe, Yale University Doctoral dissertation
Mega Brain Power, Michael Hutchison
Programming & MetaProgramming in the Human BioComputer, John C. Lilly, M.D.
5.1.5

Imagination VS Willpower
Willpower is meant to fail.
Have you ever tried to relax in a nervous situation? The more you try, the more you fail. Some
lucky people have learned to take deep breaths and picture something relaxing or humorous, like
Important Concepts
105
a naked audience. Nevertheless, most people will go through their entire lives without being able
to relax on command.
Willpower is a mechanism that was built to give your brain an easy way to disobey your orders.
Most of the time, it is doing this for your own good, or the good of the human race. For instance, if
a man, during sex, starts willing himself not to have an orgasm it will probably make it happen
two times faster. But a commonly known method of delaying orgasm is to think of baseball or
some other non-sexual subject.
The mind responds to what you believe, not what you want. If you believe something, your mind
will go to whatever lengths necessary to make that belief true, including changing you and your
perception, or even changing the world around you if it can.
Belief and Imagination - "I'll believe it when I see it!"

What is more convincing than actually experiencing something? Not even a testimonial from a
very reputable source can replace actually witnessing an event. Your subconscious mind works
this way too, if you experience something, your subconscious mind lets down its guard and
accepts it as true.
Belief and Imagination both trigger the same mental mechanism. In fact, it could be said that
belief and imagination are the same mechanism, because they have the same effect. Many
studies have been done on the result of imagination vs. belief. A basketball player who believes
he can shoot and score is much more likely to make a shot than one who doesn't believe.
However, if the person who doesn't believe imagines himself shooting and scoring, it is almost as
likely to happen.
Try a little experiment. Get a rubber band and shoot it at a spot on the wall 10 times. Now sit back
and take 5 minutes to imagine the rubber band hitting the exact spot on the wall every time you
shoot it. It never misses in your mind. Every time you shoot it hits. In your mind, shoot 10 times
and make it hit every time. After 5 minutes of visualization, shoot at the same spot another 10
times. The vast majority of people will find their shots are much more accurate than before. If you
are already good at shooting rubber bands, try something else, like flipping a quarter and catching
it with your eyes closed.
The Mind can't tell the difference

The subconscious mind can not tell the difference between imagination and real experience.
Don't believe us? If you imagine food, you will become hungry and start to salivate. If you
imagine an attractive person, you will start to get excited. You, of course, know it is not real, but
your subconscious mind does not and its mental reaction is the same.
Using sensitive medical equipment, scientists can spot which parts of the brain "light up" when a
person has an experience. What is amazing is that the exact same areas light up when the
person is asked to simply imagine the same experience. The neural, electrical response to a real
experience is almost identical to that of imagination! So identical, in fact, that the subconscious
mind has trouble telling the difference.
The quirk of imagination is something that can be leveraged with Mental Programming. If you
imagine yourself strong, thin and healthy, your mind, thinking it is real, will act to make the
visualization a reality.
The remarkable effects of imagination increase with the clarity of the experience inside your
head. Visualizing while in deep Alpha, near Theta, is enormously powerful because you are near
a dream state, which is as vivid as mental imagery gets.
106
Index:
Mental Programs
Sensory Modalities
Further Reading
Introducing NLP, Joseph O'Connor & John Seymour
Peak performance: Mental training techniques of the world's greatest athletes, Charles Garfield
The Mental Edge, Kenneth Baum
Megabrain, Michael Hutchison
5.1.6
Sensory Modalities
What is a Sensory Modality?
Sensory Modality is a phrase coined by the inventors of NLP (neuro-linguistic programming),
Richard Bandler and John Grinder. It refers to the way you remember information or imagine a
situation. Researchers have discovered that people tend to use senses to interpret reality.
As humans explore their world they use senses to internalize their experiences. The same is true
of memories and feelings. When thought occurs in your brain, you use senses to understand the
thought and find the meaning behind it.
There are three main senses that are used to organize thought: Sight (visual), Hearing (auditory)
and Feeling (kinesthetic).
What is a Primary Sensory Modality?

Primary Sensory Modality is the dominant sense; the one you use the most to mentally describe
situations and even emotions. When you think of a memory, what occurs in your brain? Do you
see the situation without sound or feeling? Do you hear sounds and people talking? Do you get a
strong emotional feeling or do you feel your body interacting with the environment? Would you
generally say you are more aware of sounds, visuals or feelings? Asking such questions can
reveal what your Primary Sensory Modality is, or you can use the NLP test off of the Tools menu.
What is a Secondary Sensory Modality?

Secondary, or non-dominant, sensory modalities are the two main senses you use other than your
primary sense. Chances are, you use these senses quite a bit as well. Everyone has dreams and
Important Concepts
107
memories that make use of senses we normally don't use. In many ways, it makes these
experiences special and makes them easier to remember. If your primary sense is sight, you
probably remember a dream where you ended up with a strong emotion; fear, love,
embarrassment. When you remember that dream, you probably feel the emotions all over again.
In another dream maybe you heard voices or heard yelling in your ears. That is also engaging a
sensory modality which may not be your primary.
Examples Of Sensory Modalities
Cognitive Function
Figuring out a math problem
Modalities
(Visual) You see the numbers in your head.
(Auditory) You hear the numbers being spoken.
(Kinesthetic) You figure the number out using your
hands or writing in the air
Remembering something
(Visual) You see yourself in the memory, third person

or first person.
(Auditory) You hear the sounds in the memory; people
talking, dogs barking, etc.
(Kinesthetic) You feel the emotions and tactic objects
of the memory. You may remember the temperature
that day, or that the wind was blowing.
Feeling an emotion
(Visual) You see the situation as it keeps replaying

itself in your mind.
(Auditory) You hear words and sounds, harsh or
loving.
(Kinesthetic) You feel the emotion much like you
would feel a bee sting or food poisoning.
Using Sensory Modalities

See the section on Using Sensory Modalities.
Index:
Mental Programs
Further Reading
108
Using Your Brain for a Change, Richard Bandler

Frogs Into Princes, Bandler and Grinder
5.1.7
The Myth of Subliminal Messages

This topic was written to help dispel many of the myths regarding Subliminal Messages and similar
products, since we are asked about them often.
We researched subliminal messages quite extensively before producing NP, and even conducted
many of our own tests. If, during our research, we had found even the slightest trace of
effectiveness, we would have integrated them into the application.
What are Subliminal Messages?

By definition, subliminal refers to that which is below perception. "Sub" meaning below and
"Liminal" meaning the threshold for sensory perception.
Subliminal messages have also been called Subliminal Affirmations, Silent Sounds, Ultrasonic,
Subsonic, SupraSonic Sounds/Messages and various other names. Although the methods may
differ, the lack of impact of these products on behavior is the same.
Some people have asked us if the Suggestions that NP uses are the equivalent of Subliminal
Messages. The answer is no, because the suggestions are loud enough to be perceived. They are
not below perception.
Subliminal Messages: Fact or Fiction?

The effectiveness of subliminal messages is one of the most wide spread myths of all time.
It all seems to have started with a 1957 marketing agent named James Vicary, who claimed to
have increased popcorn sales by 58% and Coke sales by 18% in a New Jersey movie theater by
flashing the messages "Drink Coca-Cola" and "Hungry - Eat Popcorn." Although it was later
admitted by Vicary that he fabricated the results, this hoax is, to this day, still mentioned as proof
of the effectiveness of subliminal messages. You can find it mentioned in subliminal message
products all over the world, including numerous computer applications, even though nobody has
ever reproduced the results claimed by Mr. Vicary.
The belief in subliminal messages probably reached its peak in 1974 when the FCC banned
subliminal messages from advertising, probably more as a response to public paranoia than
anything else. One survey showed that 68% of the public believed in subliminal messages.
Surprisingly, this number may be even higher today.
Subliminal messages have become a $50-million-a-year industry, even though no study has ever
come close to proving their effectiveness. Hundreds of professional, yet open minded, studies
have been conducted over a span of nearly 50 years, by various institutions, from Universities to
Psychiatry associations. Even the Department of Defence has conducted numerous studies. Not
one of them yielded a positive result. All of them revealed the truth; subliminal messages do not
have any effect on behavior. In fact, no brain response at all can be detected using subliminal
Important Concepts
109
messages. This means that if subliminal messages are perceived at all, it isn't by the brain. So
how would subliminal messages ever have an impact on behavior?
The January 1991 issue of the University of California, Berkeley, Wellness Letter noted that
double blind tests have consistently shown that subliminal tapes fail to produce their claimed
effects. There is also no evidence that subliminal messages actually affect behavior. Interestingly
enough, "One research team noted a 'non-specific placebo effect' ... tapes without subliminal
messages produced a greater effect that those with them"! In a separate study, Timothy E. Moore
showed that subliminal tapes didn't even meet the minimal criteria for perception. He concluded
that it is highly unlikely that they have any effect at all, much less a significant effect on behavior
or thought patterns. [Glendon College, York University. Subliminal Self-help Auditory Tapes: An
Empirical Test of Perceptual Consequences.].
Conclusion
Subliminal messages are completely non effective and there is no research behind them. We
highly recommend that you do not waste your money and time on subliminal message products.
In fact, you should hold highly suspect any company that claims to use subliminal messages. It is
the company's job to research fully all of their products. A simple online search of "Subliminal
Messages" reveals the above information, so keep that in mind when buying from self-help
vendors.
5.2
Brainwaves & Entrainment
5.2.1
Brainwave Overview
Brainwaves
Your brain is made up of billions of brain cells called neurons, which use electricity to
communicate with each other. The combination of millions of neurons sending signals at once
produces an enormous amount of electrical activity in the brain, which can be detected using
sensitive medical equipment (such as an EEG), measuring electricity levels over areas of the
scalp.
The culmination of electrical activity of the brain is commonly called a BrainWave pattern,
because of its cyclic, "wave-like" nature. Below is one of the first recordings of brain activity.
With the discovery of brainwaves came the discovery that electrical activity in the brain will
change depending on what the person is doing. For instance, the brainwaves of a sleeping person
110
are vastly different than the brainwaves of someone wide awake. Over the years, more sensitive
equipment has brought us closer to figuring out exactly what brainwaves represent and with that,
what they mean about a person's health and state of mind.
Here is a table showing the known brainwave types and their associated mental states:
Wave
Frequency
Mental State
Important Concepts
111
Beta
12hz - 38hz
Wide awake, alert mental state. This is generally the mental state most
people are in during the day and most of their waking lives. Using selfprogramming techniques at this level is not very effective, since the
mind is not receptive. However, stimulating Beta waves directly can
have a huge impact on intelligence, attention, mood, emotional stability
and more.
SMR (sensorimotor rhythm) (12 - 15Hz): Related to body
motion as well as the ability to concentrate and fall asleep.
Stimulating this can result in relaxed focus and improved
attention. Generally a good thing to increase.
Beta 1 (15 - 20 Hz) - Can increase mental abilities, IQ, focus
Beta 2 (20 - 38Hz) - Highly alert, but also anxious
Alpha
8hz - 12hz
Awake but deeply relaxed and not processing any information. The
brain almost immediately starts producing lots of Alpha upon eyes
closed relaxation. This is the mental state you are in early in the
morning or while daydreaming. This state enhances the vividness of
visualization techniques, and also makes the mind more receptive to
suggestion.
Theta
3hz - 8hz
Light sleep or extreme relaxation. Theta is also known as the hypersuggestible state, where mental programming using recorded
suggestions is most effective.
Theta 1 - (3 - 5 Hz) If suppressed, can improve concentration,
ability to focus attention
Theta 2 - (5 - 8 Hz) Very relaxed and dreamful sleep, good for
mental programming
Delta
0.2hz - 3hz
Deep, dreamless sleep. Delta is the slowest band of brainwaves. When

your dominant brainwave is Delta, your body is healing itself. Under
most circumstances, you do not dream in this state and are completely
unconscious.
Entrainment of the brain at this level is difficult. 2 hz and below is
technically not fast enough to produce entrainment, in its strictest
sense, and would be seen on an EEG as simple cortical evoked
potentials. However, it is theorized that Delta has specific effects on the
limbic system, the amygdala and hypothalamus in particular, which
operate at delta frequencies. The limbic system affects emotions and
the control of autonomic functions. Delta frequencies appear to "sooth"
these neural structures and can be very effective reducing migraines,
fibromyalgia, chronic pain and blood pressure.
Although Delta is generally not as good as Alpha or Theta for
meditation, people have found success using Delta for this purpose
along with relaxation and of course sleep.
The Significance of Brainwaves

You can tell a lot about a person simply by observing their brainwave patterns. For example,
anxious people tend to produce an overabundance of high Beta waves while people with
ADD/ADHD tend to produce an overabundance of slower Alpha/Theta brainwaves.
112
Researchers have found that not only are brainwaves representative of mental state, but they
can be stimulated to change a person's mental state, and even help treat a variety of mental
disorders. Certain Brainwave patterns can be even be used to access exotic or extraordinary
experiences such as "lucid dreaming" or ultra-realistic visualization.
See the Brainwave Stimulation (Entrainment) Section
Dominant Brainwaves
At any one time, your brain is emitting all or most of the different types of brainwaves.
Nevertheless there is usually a dominant frequency, or one that is more powerful and prominent
than all the others. In fact, during the 1960's and 70's, the dominant frequency was the only
frequency considered to be relevant.
As a result, mental states are typically described in the form of the dominant frequency. So if a
session is described as "Alpha" it means that the dominant frequency resulting from that
session will be the Alpha brainwave, such as in the figure below.
Non-Dominant Brainwaves
With advances in EEG technology, we can now detect all the brainwave bands at once and
analyze them in minute detail. Sometimes it is necessary to focus on non-dominant frequencies
in order to accomplish certain goals. With some Brainwave Training sessions, the dominant
frequency is even completely ignored, because non-dominant frequencies affect many different
aspects that people find important. For instance, a higher frequency Alpha wave (while the
individual is "in" Beta) is associated with a high IQ. As another example, activity in the high
SMR region is associated with movement and control over energy levels. When the NeuroProgrammer focuses on these non-dominant frequencies, it is not trying to affect your dominant
brainwave, but more to simply increase activity in a certain band, or to increase blood flow
throughout the entire brain.
Index:
A Brief History
Photic Stimulation
Important Concepts
113
Further Reading
The Rediscovery of Audio-Visual Entrainment Technology, David Siever
Journals:
[to learn more about the research being done on specific brainwave bands (SMR, Beta 1, etc)]
NeuroReport
Journal Of Neurotherapy
Electroencephalography and Clinical Neurophysiology
5.2.2
Brainwave Stimulation (Entrainment)
Brainwave Entrainment
The Neuro-Programmer uses sound and light to directly affect the brain through a complex neural
process called Brainwave Entrainment.
What is Brainwave Entrainment?

Brainwave Entrainment refers to the brain's electrical response to rhythmic sensory stimulation,
such as pulses of sound or light.
When the brain is given a stimulus, through the ears, eyes or other senses, it emits an electrical
charge in response, called a cortical evoked response (shown below). These electrical
responses travel through the brain to become what you "see and hear".
Scientists measure this activity using sensitive electrodes attached to the scalp.
114
When the brain is presented with a rhythmic stimulus, such as a drum beat for example, the
rhythm is reproduced in the brain in the form of these electrical impulses. If the rhythm
becomes fast and consistent enough, it can start to resemble the natural internal rhythms of the
brain, called brainwaves. When this happens, the brain responds by synchronizing its own
electric cycles to the same rhythm. This is commonly called the Frequency Following Response
(or FFR).
FFR can be useful because brainwaves are very much related to mental state. For example, a
4 Hz brainwaves is associated with sleep, so a 4 Hz sound pattern would help reproduce the
sleep state in your brain. The same concept can be applied to nearly all mental states, including
concentration, creativity and many others. It can even act as a gateway to exotic or
extraordinary experiences, such as deep meditation or "lucid dreaming" type states.
If you listen closely to most sessions, you will hear small, rapid pulses of sound. These pulses
may be harder to detect if you turn off Tones, but Noise and Background Sounds are also
embedded within them. As the session progresses, the frequency rate of these pulses is
changed slowly, thereby changing your brainwave patterns and guiding your mind to various
useful mental states.
Brainwave Entrainment has over 70 years of solid research behind it. See a
Short History Of Brainwave Entrainment.
What is Entrainment?
Entrainment is a principle of physics. It is defined as the synchronization of two or more
rhythmic cycles. The principles of entrainment are universal, appearing in chemistry, neurology,
biology, pharmacology, medicine, astronomy and more.
CASE IN POINT: While working on the design of the pendulum clock in 1656, Dutch scientist
Christian Huygens found that if he placed two unsynchronized clocks side by side on a wall,
they would slowly synchronize to each other. In fact, the synchronization was so precise not
even mechanical intervention could calibrate them more accurately.
A clock is a simple example of a system responding to entrainment, but the same rules apply to
more complex systems such as the brain.
Technical Questions:
See the FAQ on Brainwave Stimulation
Important Concepts
115
Index:
Brainwave Overview
A Brief History
Photic Stimulation
5.2.3
A Brief History
A Short History of Brainwave Entrainment Research
Brainwave entrainment was first identified in 1934, although its effects had been noted as early as
Ptolemy.
Not long after the discovery of the Alpha brainwave by Hans Berger in 1929, researchers found
that the strength of the wave could be "driven" beyond its natural frequency using flickering lights.
This is called "Photic Driving", which is another word for brainwave entrainment using photic
(light) stimulation. In 1942 Dempsey and Morison discovered that repetitive tactile stimulation
could also produce entrainment and in 1959, Dr. Chatrian observed auditory entrainment in
response to clicks at a frequency of 15 per second.
By the 1960s entrainment started to become a tool rather than a phenomenon of the brain.
Anesthesiologist M.S. Sadove, MD, used photic stimulation to reduce the amount of anaesthesia
needed for surgery. Bernard Margolis published an article on brainwave entrainment used during
dental procedures, noting less anaesthesia required, less gagging, less bleeding and a general
reduction in anxiety.
In 1972, Dr. Gerald Oster studied Binaural and Monaural Beats in a landmark article published in
Scientific American. In it, he examined the potential of auditory beats generating responses in the
brain. Although noting that Binaural Beats had very little entrainment value, monaural beats were
shown to elicit very strong neural responses.
In the 1980's studies continued with Dr. Norman Shealy, Dr. Glen Solomon and others
researching entrainment for headache relief, Serotonin and HGH release, as well as general
relaxation.
In 1981, Arturo Manns published a study indicating the incredibly strong entrainment using
Isochronic Tones, as opposed to monaural or binaural beats.
Studies continued into the 90's with researchers such as Dr. Russell, Dr. Carter and others who
explored the vast potential of using entrainment with ADD and the learning disorders. Research
has also been conducted into PMS, Chronic Fatigue, Chronic Pain, Depression, Hypertension and
a number of other disorders. Steady research continues today with the work of Dr. Thomas
Budzynski, David Siever, psychologist Michael Joyce and many others.
There is over 70 years of solid research behind entrainment. So why hasn't it become more well
116
known? Mainly because our culture is very much dependent on drugs, and, in comparison to the
pharmaceutical giants, there is not a lot of money to be made in entrainment: it is inexpensive,
easy to use at home and can be a viable solution to a huge variety of problems. Also, the idea
that software or an inexpensive piece of hardware is able to directly affect the brain sounds
preposterous at first, until you read the research and discover the science behind it. We have
found that most people are skeptical until the day they actually use the software. Despite the
combination of solid scientific, empirical and a huge amount of anecdotal evidence, the world is
still very skeptical of entrainment and brain training. But the word is spreading. Every day more
psychologists, mental health clinics, coaches, teachers and professionals are discovering
entrainment, and finding it incredibly useful.
Index:
Brainwave Overview
Photic Stimulation
Further Reading
Responses to Clicks from the Human Brain: Some Depth Electrographic Observations, Gian
Emilio Chatrian, M.D., Magnus C. Petersen, M.D., and Jorge A. Lazarte, M.D. - Rochester State
Hospital (1959).
Academic Performance Enhancement with Photic Stimulation and EDR Feedback, Thomas
Budzynski, Ph.D., John Jordy, M.Ed., Helen Kogan Budzynski, Ph.D., Hsin-Yi Tang, M.S., and
Keith Claypoole, Ph.D., Journal of Neurotherapy
Repeated stimulation induced neuronal activation (SINA), with cognitive and behavioral
functioning changes in ADHD children., Harold Russell, Ph.D., Journal of Neurotherapy
A Comparison of Depths of Relaxation Produced by Various Techniques and Neurotransmitters
by Brainwave Entrainment, Shealy, N., Cady, R., Cox, R., Liss, S., Clossen, W., Veehoff, D.,
Shealy and Forest Institute of Professional Psychology A study done for Comprehensive Health
Care.
Auditory beats in the brain., Oster, G., Scientific American, 229, 94-102.
Isochronic Tones and Brainwave Entrainment, David Siever, C.E.T.
The central effects of rhythmic sensory stimulation., Walter, V. J. & Walter, W. G.,
Electroencephalography and Clinical Neurophysiology, 1, 57-86
Visual Evoked Responses Elicited by Rapid Stimulation, Kinney, J.A., McKay, C., Mensch, Lurisa,
Encephalography and Clinical Neurophysiology, Vol 34: 7-13
The Interaction of Certain Spontaneous and Induced Cortical Potentials, Dempsey, E., Morison,
Important Concepts
117
R., American Journal of Physiology, 135, 310-307

Neurochemical Responses to Cranial Electrical Stimulation and Photo-Stimulation via Brain Wave
Synchronization., Dr. Roger K. Cady, Dr. Norman Shealy, Study performed by the Shealy Institute
of Comprehensive Health Care, Springfield, Missouri, 1990
The Application of Audiostimulation and Electromyographic Biofeedback to Bruxism and
Myofascial Pain-Dysfunction Syndrome, Dr. Arturo Manns, Miralles, R., Adrian, H., Oral Surgery,
1981, Vol. 52
5.2.4

Isochronic Tones & Tone-Based Pulses
Consistent, rhythmic stimuli entrains and stimulates brainwaves, which is what our products use in
order to promote mental states (read the Overview for more information). Isochronic tones are
the most effective form of rhythmic stimulus. In essence, an Isochronic tone is an evenly spaced
tone-based pulse which simply turns on and off at a specified rate per second. Because the tones
turn off so quickly, they produce extremely strong responses in the brain, which leads to most
effective possible brainwave stimulation.
The Neuro-Programmer also provides 2 other types of tone-based pulses, using Sine and
Triangle waves. Though they may not be as effective, they can be more relaxing in some cases.
Monaural & Binaural Beats

When two or more tones of any frequency are played together the waves add or subtract from
each other, forming a single wave. Monaural and Binaural beats occur as a result of the sum of
two waveforms which are so close together that they add and subtract enough from each other to
be perceived as a pulse, or beat, which can then be used to entrain the brain (rhythmic stimulus).
The frequency of the beats is the same as the difference between the pitches of the 2 tones. So
for example, if 2 tones, one with a pitch of 200 Hz and the other using 210 Hz, are played at the
same time, a pulsating rhythm of 10hz will result, the difference between the two.
Here is a visual example of what happens when 2 slightly different tones are combined. The
waveform sum is the resulting monaural or binaural "Beat". The lower of the two tones is called
the carrier and the upper is called the offset.
118
Binaural beats are different from Monaural beats in that they are produced in the brain as
opposed to in the ear or otherwise. Binaural beats are the result of 2 slightly different tones being
played into each ear, which are then being combined in the brain itself, forming a beat that
entrains the brain from the inside out. This technique has some advantages and disadvantages.
One advantage is that in order for the brain to create a binaural beat, it must use both
hemispheres of the brain (right and left), which can result in what is called "hemispheric
synchronization". Binaural beats can also be very hypnotic.
Unfortunately, Binaural Beats suffer from the limitation inherent in the brain's "sound mixing"
mechanisms. The volume depth of the resulting "beat" is about resulting "beat" is about 3
decimals, or 1/10th the volume of a whisper, so they don't produce a very strong neural response.
Binaurals also require headphones and will be completely ineffective without them. Even
surround-sound, stereo speakers will significantly reduce the effect. And since a single binaural
beat requires the use of both ears, you cannot target each hemisphere individually, making
dissociation and more complex sessions like the Depression Reduction session impossible.
Index:
Brainwave Overview
A Brief History
Photic Stimulation
Further Reading
Isochronic Tones and Brainwave Entrainment, David Siever, C.E.T.
Effects of 18.5 Audiovisual Stimulation On EEG Amplitude at the Vertex, Frederick, J., Lubar, J.,
Rasey, H., Brim, S., Blackburn, J., Proceedings AAPB Thirteenth Anniversary Annual Meeting,
1999
Important Concepts
119
Auditory Beats in the Brain, Gerald Olster, Scientific American 229

The Effect of Repetitive Audio/Visual Stimulation on Skeletomotor and Vasomotor Activity in the
Low Hypnotizable TMJ Subject, Dr. Norman Thomas B.D.S., B.Sc., Ph.D. & David Siever, C.E.T.
Hypnosis, 1988.
Responses to Clicks from the Human Brain: Some Depth Electrographic Observations, Gian
Emilio Chatrian, M.D., Magnus C. Petersen, M.D., and Jorge A. Lazarte, M.D. - Rochester State
Hospital (1959).
The Interaction of Certain Spontaneous and Induced Cortical Potentials, Dempsey, E., American
Journal of Physiology (1942)
The Application of Audiostimulation and Electromyographic Biofeedback to Bruxism and
Myofascial Pain-Dysfunction Syndrome, Dr. Arturo Manns, Miralles, R., Adrian, H., Oral Surgery,
1981, Vol. 52
5.2.5

As you read in the topic on Brainwave Stimulation, any pulse of sound can entrain the brain, so it
is not limited to just tones. White Noise and even Sound Files can be filtered to provide pulses and
other forms of modulation which entrain the brain.
Below is an example of a form of volume modulation (or Pulse).
Notice that the waveform is not as clean as it was in the section on Tones. Instead of just one tone
playing, there are many playing at once. Nevertheless, you can clearly see 5 pulses in the figure,
and the brain would respond individually to each of them.
Filtered Sound VS Tones

Advantages
Filtered sound does have some major advantages over tone based entrainment. From an
entrainment perspective, it can be very useful for inducing creativity. In fact, no tone or photic
stimulation methods can not even compare to a piece of filtered classical music when it comes to
inducing "out of the box" and other creative mental states. It can also be very helpful for lucid
dreaming. Noise (sounding like rain or a fan) can be particularly useful for use while sleeping,
since it is a very soft, consistent body of sound.
Entrainment using filtered sound can also be very subtle. Although you may hear minor distortion
using some sound files, most of the time it is barely noticeable, unlike tones and pulses of light.
120
Disadvantages
Sound files, in particular, can be tricky because there are so many varieties of ambient and
musical sounds. You may have noticed this if you tried to use some of your own sound files as
backgrounds. Sometimes it sounds very subtle, but other times it can distort the sound
completely. When there is a high level of distortion, you may have to make your own session and
change the filter intensities manually until a satisfactory filtering level is achieved.
The major disadvantage to using backgrounds is that they are not as precise as using tones.
Tones have the luxury of being able to turn completely on and off, while a piece of sound needs
to remain at least partially on to avoid sounding choppy and distorted. This means that the
"pulses", or modulations, will leave less of an electrical imprint on the brain, and the effect of the
entrainment will be reduced.
Despite these disadvantages, it is often worth the sacrifice since backgrounds and noise can be
both subtle and relaxing yet still retain near complete effectiveness.
Index:
Brainwave Overview
A Brief History
Photic Stimulation
5.2.6
Photic Stimulation
Photic Stimulation (PS) involves using the eyes to entrain the brain by delivering rhythmic pulses of
light at a frequency corresponding to the desired brainwave, usually through flashing screens,
strobe lights, or LEDs mounted on comfortable goggles. Photic Stimulation can be used on its own
or in conjunction with audio-based entrainment, like tone pulses.
People have been using light to affect the brain almost as long as they have been using drums to
enter altered states of consciousness. Ptolemy noted that when looking at the sun through the
spokes of a spinning wheel, a feeling of euphoria would take over. Shamans would have their
subjects walk single-file past a fire, obscuring the light in a rhythmic fashion. In WWII, many people
noticed that those who monitored the radar frequently entered altered mental states because of the
rhythmic pulses of light coming from the screen.
In fact, strobe lights were first used to alter the minds of the audience. Now they are just a stage
effect, but when they first came out they were there for the specific reason of lulling the audience
into a certain brain frequency.
Special Attributes of Photic Stimulation

Because the input from light stimulation comes from the eyes, it has many distinct differences
from other entrainment methods.
First and foremost, because of the immense size of the primary visual cortex it can affect
Important Concepts
121
surrounding brain areas and cause photic induced seizures in those prone to seizures (such as
epileptics), particularly when red LEDs are used alone, or when the lights are set too bright. This
is one of the reasons it is so important to customize your session to comfortable level. Square
wave photic stimulation has also been shown to produce more seizures, probably because of the
harmonics it produces (on most sessions, the safer sine wave stimulation is used).
So, if you are prone to seizures you should not using screen flashing or LED Light Goggles.
Photic stimulation does have some advantages though. It has been shown to vastly increase
blood circulation in the brain, even at very low frequency rates. It may also be of special
importance in treating headaches, PMS and releasing helpful neurochemicals such as HGH, and
it has can be particularly effective with brain damage, slow wave disorders and increasing
cognitive functioning when using square wave stimulation.
How Do I Use Photic Stimulation?

To use photic stimulation you need to either use screen flashing or LED Light Goggles. In both
cases your eyes must be closed. Yes, you read it correctly: your eyes must be closed.
Light stimulation relies on the thinness of the eyelids which allows light to pass through.
Screen Flashing
Screen flashing is built into NP2. To get the most out of the pulsing light, use it in a dimly lit
room with your eyes closed. In a dimly lit room you should be able to see the light through your
eyelids. Otherwise, it will not do much good to use the screen flashing options.
LED Light Goggles

If you are serious about using Photic Stimulation, it is highly recommended that you buy a set
of LED Light Goggles. LED lights (such as the lights used inside a computer) are mounted on a
set of goggles. The Neuro-Programmer then "talks" to the goggles, telling it when to flash the
LEDs. Since the LEDs are so close to your eyelids, the effect will be tripled as compared to
screen flashing.
Goggles can be used with NP2 without any additional equipment. Visit our products page for
information on purchasing Light Goggles for yourself.
Color
If you use screen flashing or purchase a pair of goggles that allows you to customize the color
combinations, you will be able to generate some special effects. Below is a list of colors and their
associated effects.
Red - Red is good for energy, body building, adrenaline and is also the universal color of sexual
attraction. Unfortunately, it is not very relaxing and tends to produce a "fight or flight" response, or
heightened anxiety, in beginners. Red should generally not be used alone.
Brown - Brown helps reduce depression, irritability, chronic fatigue and also helps with migraine
headaches, the immune system and mood regulation.
Orange - Good for increasing appetite and slow the rate of blood flow.
Yellow - Yellow can be used for creativity and insight, but may not be very relaxing.
122
Green - A peaceful, soothing color, much like blue. Green has also been known to reduce allergic
reaction to foods and MSG.
Blue - A soothing color, great for relaxation. It has also been known to increase metabolism,
promote growth and cause the brain to release eleven different neurotransmitters. Pulse rate will
slow and breathing will slow. Use blue for stress and anxiety relief, or general relaxation.
Indigo - Good for reducing pain (releasing endorphins).
Violet - The universal "spiritual" color. Violent tends to bring out the spiritual side of people of all
cultures. It also reduces hunger and irritability.
White (or a combination of colors) - Good for visualization, since more (or all) of the color
spectrum is represented.
Index:
Brainwave Overview
A Brief History
Further Reading
Visual Potentials Evoked by Light- Emitting Diodes Mounted in Goggles, Ronald Lesser, Hans
Luders, G. Klem and Dudley Dinner, Department of Neurology, Cleveland Clinic Foundation, in
Cleveland Clinic Quarterly, vol. 52, No. 2, Summer 1985, pp. 223-228:
Influence of Red Light and Pattern on Photic Driving, Takeo Takahashi and Yasuo Tsukahara,
Department of Neuropsychiatry of Tohoku University School of Medicine, Tohoku, Japan, in
Tohoku Journal of Experimental Medicine, 1979, 127, pp. 45-52:
Visual Evoked Responses Elicited by Rapid Stimulation, Jo Ann S. Kinney, Christine L. McKay,
A.J. Mensch, and S.M. Luria, Naval Submarine Medical Research Laboratory, Naval Submarine
Medical Centre, Naval Submarine Base New London, Groton, Connecticut (1972).
Interhemispheric Relationships of Responses to Sine Wave Modulated Light in Normal Subjects
and Patients, Donker, D., Njio, L., Storm Van Leewan, W., Wieneke, G., Encephalography and
Clinical Neurophysiology (1978)
Human Visual Responses to Sinusoidally Modulated Light. Van Der Tweel, L., Lunel, H.,
Encephalography and Clinical Neurophysiology (1965)
The central effects of rhythmic sensory stimulation, Walter, V. J. & Walter, W. G.
Electroencephalography and Clinical Neurophysiology, 1, 57-86.
White and Red Lights in Photic Stimulation, David Siever, C.E.T.
Important Concepts
123
MegaBrain Report: Special Light and Sound Issue

Light Years Ahead, Brian Breiling, Psy.D.
Influence of Colour on the Photo Convulsive Response, T. Takahasi and Y. Tsukahara,
Department of Neuropsychiatry and Department of Physiology, Tohoku University School of
Medicine, Sendai, Japan (1976).
The Treatment of Migraine with Variable Frequency Photo-Stimulation, D.J. Anderson, B.Sc.,
M.B., B.S. (1989).
Slow Wave Photic Stimulation in the Treatment of Headache - A Preliminary Report, Glen D.
Solomon, M.D.
Note: Pregnant women and those who are wear a pacemaker, or have had or are prone to seizures,
are photosensitive, epileptic, whether knowingly or not, should not utilize photic stimulation.
Additionally, those who are under the influence of medication or drugs should consult their
physician before using this application.
Finally, because children are more susceptible to seizures than adults, it is recommended that
those under the age of 18 consult a physician prior to the use of this application.
5.2.7
What is Hemispheric Synchronization?
Hemispheric synchronization refers to a state when the brainwave pattern of the left and right
brain hemispheres become similar.
There are 2 brain hemispheres, a left and a right, connected via a neural structure called the
corpus callosum. The right hemisphere is associated more with emotions and creativity while the
left is associated more with logic and speech. Despite popular misconception, most people have
plenty of right brain activity, and may even have a lack of activity in the left.
Someone with similar activity in both brain hemispheres is usually healthier, happier, more
optimistic, more emotionally stable and less prone to mental disorders. Increased levels of
synchronization are found naturally with experienced meditators and people who have found ways
of becoming highly content with their lives.
Since the discovery of hemispheric synchronization and its associated effects, it has become a
highly sought after effect, even prompting companies to market products based solely on this
effect. However, you should keep in mind that while synchronization of the hemispheres and a
well balanced brainwave pattern are good, they should not be goals in themselves. Instead,
synchronization should happen naturally as you pursue your goals with entrainment and selfprogramming, because while synchronization is associated with health, it is not a miracle cure
124
and nor is cerebral asymmetry the cause of every mental disorder (as many companies would
have you believe). Additionally, the techniques used to fully restore a healthy brainwave pattern
in cases of extreme cerebral asymmetry (such as in major depression) are often not as easy as
using simple entrainment methods such as binaural beats.
Hemispheric synchronization has also been called hemispheric symmetry, coherence and
cerebral synchronization.
What produces Hemispheric Synchronization?

Hemispheric Synchronization is a byproduct of nearly all types of brainwave entrainment.
In 1980, Tsuyoshi Inouye and associates at the Department of Neuropsychiatry at Osaka
University Medical School in Japan found that photic stimulation in the alpha range produced
hemispheric synchronization. Dr. Norman Shealy later confirmed the effect, finding that photic
stimulation produced "cerebral synchronization" in more than 5,000 patients. In 1984, Dr.
Brockopp analyzed audio-visual brain stimulation and in particular hemispheric synchronization
during EEG monitoring. He said "By inducing hemispheric coherence the machine can contribute
to improved intellectual functioning of the brain."
There is similar evidence that CES (electrical stimulation), motion systems, acoustic field
generators and even floatation tanks can increase EEG symmetry.
The Neuro-Programmer takes hemispheric coherence a step further by delivering different
stimulation to each ear in certain sessions in order to correct common hemispheric asymmetries.
For example, depressed individuals tend to have an overactive right (emotional) brain
hemisphere, so the depression reduction session acts to decrease right brain activity while
increasing left, the end result being a more coherent, healthy and well balanced brainwave
pattern.
The below figures are snapshots of brain activity before and during a typical NP2 alpha session.
Before the session, the brain is incoherent and completely asymmetric, while after the session the
brain hemispheres have clearly become more synchronized.
Before a Neuro-Programmer session (audio only):
After:
Important Concepts
125
Index:
Brainwave Overview
A Brief History
Photic Stimulation
Further Reading
EEG Changes Induced by Light Stimuli Modulated with the Subject's Alpha Rhythm, Tsuyoshi
Inouye, Noboru Sumitsuji and Kazuo Matsumoto, Department of Neuropsychiatry, Osaka
University Medical School, Japan, Electroencephalography and Clinical Neurophysiology, 1980,
49, pp 135-142:
Pain Reduction and Relaxation with Brain Wave Synchronization (Photo-Stimulation), Dr. Norman
Shealy, Dr. Richard Cox Inc. Study performed by the Forest Institute of Professional Psychology,
Springfield, Missouri, 1990, 9pp.
Review of Research on Multi-Modal Sensory Stimulation with Clinical Implications and Research
Proposals, Dr. Gene W. Brockopp, unpublished, 1984:
Top Level Intro

Part
VI
How To Program The Mind
6.1
How to begin?
127
What is Mental Programming?

Click here for more information.
How do I get started?

Use one of the Programming sessions
In order to effectively self-program, your mind first needs to be guided to a receptive, relaxed,
absorbent state. Sessions that accomplish this are located under the Programming session
category. If this is your first time using brainwave entrainment, you may want to take some time
to get used to the Alpha and Theta sessions. Try out one of the sessions and make sure it is
sufficiently pleasant and relaxing. If it isn't, try customizing the session or finding a new one
using the Wizard. You can also try some of the relaxation techniques explained in the
Relaxation Guide.
Determine the type of mental programming to use.
There are 2 basic types of self-programming:
1) Suggestions and Hypnotic Scripts - Using recorded suggestions, looped or played during
a session while your mind is in its most receptive possible state. When the recordings fade out,
the Neuro-Programmer will take your mind back up to a normal brainwave pattern. As it is doing
this, it is good to repeat any suggestions you gave yourself and affirm that they are true
2) Visualization and Mental Techniques - Visualization is essentially the creative use of
imagination or a "lucid dreaming" state. There are a number of very effective mental "tricks"
you can use to program your mind. For more information refer to the Visualization Guide.
Normally, Alpha sessions are used for Visualization and Auto-Suggestion (explained in the
Suggestions Guide).
Your first attempt at Mind Programming

For your first time, it might be a good idea to test Mental Programming, in order to build up
confidence in it. Choose something about yourself that you have never been able to overcome or
get past. Maybe you have road rage. Maybe you have trouble speaking up in meetings. Maybe
you can't urinate in public restrooms.
Choose something that you have never been able to surmount, but not something that is too hard
for your first attempt. Quitting smoking can be a one or two week programming process.
Changing your eating habits can also be very hard to break. For your first attempt you should not
choose to re-program a habit. You should instead re-program an imperfection; something you
have possessed for a long time and have learned to live with, despite your dislike of it.
Reprogramming an imperfection is a great experience and builds confidence in this technology.
After confidence has been built, more challenging re-programming tasks can be completed
successfully.
Keep At it
128
Never give up trying to Mental Program. Mental Programming is a process. It can happen all in
one session or it can take weeks to fully re-program your mind, depending on environmental
factors, as well as the depth of any unwanted mental barriers blocking your way. Don't give up.
After some practice and a few successes, reprogramming the mind completely may only take one
session. You need to build confidence in the technology and confidence in your ability to change.
If it is not working for you, something is wrong. See the forums on the website
(Transparentcorp.com) or mail support (support@transparentcorp.com).
6.2
Where/When?
Where / When to use mental programming
As you may know by now, Mental Programming is best used with the sessions under the
"Programming" tab on the Sessions screen. These sessions will relax you, bringing your mind to
its most receptive possible state, where mental programming will be most effective.
Note that the below recommendations may not apply to the sessions under the "Brainwave
Training" category. You should carefully read the instructions of any session you choose to use.
The instructions should give you an idea of when the session should be used, and any other
special requirements. For example, the Sleep Induction sessions should obviously be used before
bed, while the Stress Relief session may better serve as a welcome break right after work, or
while on break.
For Mental Programming Sessions:
Choose a relaxed, uninhibited environment

For Mental Programming to be effective, you must be in a relaxed and comfortable
environment. Any distraction or stress will serve only to bring you out of the desired
brainwave state. If you are not able to completely relax in your environment, Mental
Programming will not work.
Be habitual. Choose the same place and time every day

Your mind is a creature of habit. The more you program, the better it gets at relaxing and
opening itself to what you give it. Similarly, if you program at the same time and place every
day, your mind will pick up on this pattern and make you more relaxed and open at that time
and place.
Choose the least stressful time of day

For a busy, stress-filled lifestyle, the best time to program is as soon as you have time to relax,
and as soon as you are in a place that is free of distraction.
Busy lifestyle aside, the best times to program the mind are as follows:
129
1) Just before bed

The absolute best time to program your mind is before bed. This allows your mind to process the
information you give it while sleeping, completely free of distraction. You will wake up refreshed
and with a new mental program fully installed. However, you should be aware that doing Mental
Programming before bed can cause insomnia, especially when you use the Theta sessions.
This is not because it keeps you from sleeping, it is simply because Theta is sleeping. A halfhour Theta session can replace up to 4 hours of sleep. If you have difficulties falling asleep, try
using the Brainwave Training session for insomnia or sleep induction.
A Theta session just before bed can also alter your dreams and make them weirder, more vivid
and completely random.
It is therefore recommended to only use Alpha sessions just before bed. This will lessen the
likelihood of insomnia and probably not affect your dreams
2) In the morning, just after waking up
In the morning, your brainwaves are already at a very low point, dominated by Alpha waves,
making relaxation during the session that much easier. Note that, You may not want to use Theta
sessions because it could cause you fall back asleep.
3) After lunch or dinner
A full stomach is very relaxing. In fact, all your body wants you to do is relax after eating. So, if
you have some time, start to program your mind within a half hour after eating. Most people find
they can go deeper, faster.
4) After exercising
The body is often much easier to relax after a strenuous activity such as Yoga or a
cardiovascular workout.
Post-Programming Environment
Post-programming environment is very influential on Mental Programming. Suppose you are
trying to quit smoking using this technology. You program your mind every day for a week. But
every day you see other people smoking, you see your friends smoking and you are constantly
thinking about smoking. This reinforces the idea that you like smoking, because cigarettes are
constantly on your mind. Your subconscious mind responds to those constant thoughts by doing
everything in its power to fulfill them.
It is easy to see how an environment can quickly override any positive Mental Programming
you have done. Nevertheless, if you keep at it, keep practicing, your Mental Programming will
be more and more powerful. In the case of the smoking example, you would probably think of
smoking less and less until you realize one day that you haven't thought of it in a week and
didn't even realize that you had no desire to smoke!
Remember that desire for something usually comes from thinking about it. You can easily make
yourself physically hungry by thinking about food or smelling food that you enjoy eating.
Further Reading
Further Reading
The Relaxation Response, Herbert Benson, M.D.
130
Awakening Mind I, James Mann, Enlightened Enterprises

6.3
Relaxation Guide
This guide is here to help you use the Neuro-Programmer technology to its fullest advantage.
Use the below techniques while in a session. If during a session you begin to tense up, use any (or
all) of the below techniques to relax again. You can also use many of these techniques during the
day, if you have problems with stress, road rage, anxiety, etc.
Scan Your Body For Tension

Tension is your worst enemy in Mind Programming. No technology can alter your brainwaves
while you are tense. You must relax your body completely so your mind is free to wander where it
likes. To do this, turn your attention to different parts of your body in a "scanning" fashion, such as
from your head to your toes. Focus on each part for 5 - 15 seconds, making sure it is completely
relaxed before moving on to the next part. For instance you could start by relaxing the scalp, then
the forehead, then the eyes, cheeks, mouth, jaw, neck and so on.
Eyes Closed
For all sessions except for a few in the Brainwave Training category, your eyes should be closed
during the entire session. Closing the eyes eliminates about 80% of the external input an
average brain receives.
Eye Position
Eye position is a great way to help bring your mind down to an open brainwave. When you look
up, the visual part of your brain is stimulated. That is why many people look up when they are
trying to solve a math problem, or trying to remember something visual. This is also the position
of your eyes when you are in REM sleep. So, when you close your eyes turn your eyes slightly
upwards. This triggers your brain to start producing massive amounts of Alpha brainwaves. For
many people, the natural position of the eye (upon closing) is slightly upwards. Push your eyes up
even more, but not so such that it is uncomfortable. It may take a second to get used to, but if
your eyes feel uncomfortable after a period of time, just let them rest at a level you are used to.
131
Focus on the Beats

All sessions produce "beats," or what sounds like short, rapid pulses. Your brain's electrical
response to each individual beat is what causes the shifts in brainwave pattern. Focusing your
mind on the beats will cause more of your brain to process the signals, resulting in stronger
entrainment.
Count Down
Counting down (in your head) from 10, 20, 50 or 100 is a great way to relax your body and help
your mind focus. It is recommended to count down in this fashion:
"Ten.. I am relaxing more and more with every number I count. Nine... I am continuing to relax
with every number I count. Eight... at the count of zero I am completely relaxed. Seven... my mind
and body are completely relaxed at the count of 0......" and so on.
Also, visualizing the numbers is very helpful. As you think each number, visualize it floating in 3d
space, spinning, glowing or reflecting light.
Visualize
Visualizing is a great way to take your mind down to where it needs to be. Visualize simple
objects, like tacks. Add color to them, make them spin in 3d. Make them glow and reflect the
world around them.
Think of a place where you are most relaxed (like bed)

Thinking of a place where you normally relax is a great way to fool your body (and mind) into
relaxing by itself. Your bed is the most obvious choice, but maybe the couch or on a beach would
suit you better.
Breath Through Your Abdomen

Breathing is directly linked to brainwaves. Breathing deeply will cause you to rapidly relax.
However, there is a catch. Breathing through your chest is associated with the Fight Or Flight
response, which occurs during stressful (or awkward) situations. Eliciting this response will keep
you from being relaxed. Breathing from your abdomen, on the other hand, feels great and is
incredibly relaxing. To know if you are breathing correctly, put one hand on your chest and the
132
other on your belly. When you breath in, the hand on your belly should rise while the hand on your
chest should stay pretty much where it is.
Breath Evenly
Try to keep your breathing at a steady rate. Also, inhale at the same rate as you exhale. People
have a tendency to take a long time inhaling and then exhaling really fast, or visa versa. Creating
a balance between the two will help you relax and also increases the effectiveness of your Mental
Programming.
Relax With Your Breaths

Take deep breaths, through your abdomen, and on each exhale relax a bit more. Relaxing on
exhale is much easier if the exhale is slow and long. Relax a small amount on every exhale until
the relaxation builds up and you are soon fully sedated.
Relax Eyelids
Relax your eyelids. Your body can tell when you are faking relaxation by the tension in your
eyelids. Relax your eyelids and your mind is fooled into relaxing.
Let Your Jaw Drop

Go ahead and let your jaw drop a little till it is relaxed. The jaw is a great place for your body to
hide tension. Don't worry, nobody is looking, so just let it drop a little.
Relax your body as you feel it tense up

At times you may feel that certain parts of your body are tense. This is your body telling you that
in order to go deeper, you must relax that part of your body. If you feel your legs, arms or any
other part of your body is tense, relax it slowly and let it go.
[Odd] Side effects of relaxation

When you begin using this technology, you may find some side effects. They are completely
normal and will eventually go away.
1) Saliva - when the body relaxes, it usually increases its saliva production. Don't worry about it,
its normal. If you swallow more than normal, that is fine. Just try to relax and think of something
else.
133
2) Twitching - when your body relaxes in an unfamiliar place (like the computer chair), it will put
up some resistance in areas that you hold very tense during the day. These areas will "twitch" as
you relax them. Don't worry about these twitches, they are normal and will eventually go away,
especially if you learn to relax more during the day, which is a very healthy thing to do.
3) Bringing up past memories - Remembering things you haven't thought of for decades is
perfectly normal. Sometimes you might think of something you find undesirable and may have to
restart the session. Look at it as a way to know what your subconscious needs help with. Use it as
a guide to help you re-program your mind.
4) Itching - most people experience random itches the first couple times they use the NeuroProgrammer. This is completely normal. Try to ignore them. Giving in and scratching them will
only cause more to surface. Take a deep breath (through your abdomen) and just ignore the
itches. After the first couple times they will go away.
[Good] Side effects of relaxation

Daily relaxation is possibly one of the most rewarding activities that you can do for your body.
Sometimes even more rewarding than exercise.
1) Increased helpful neurochemistry such as Serotonin, which helps regulate moods (such as
happiness).
2) Increased circulation and body heat. You will probably feel very warm after relaxing. This is
because of increased circulation that is allowed by the lack of tension in the muscles. You may
even feel heat in extremities that would be normally cold, such as your hands or feet.
3) Improvement in emotional stability
4) Increased energy
5) Improvement in memory and organized thoughts
6) Improvement in Mental Programming
Further Reading
The Relaxed Body, Daniel Goleman
Book Of Floating, Michael Hutchison
6.4
Programming Guide
This guide provides general guidelines you should follow when programming your mind. In fact,
these guidelines are essential and you should review them carefully before proceeding. These apply
to all forms of Self-Programming.
Program for incremental goals

In order for programming to work, you have to program something that is physically possible. If
you are trying to lose weight, programming for a loss of 200 pounds in a week is physically
impossible, and will be doomed to failure. Instead, program for an incremental weight loss of 20
134
or so pounds, and make the goal a month or more. Use your best judgment when it comes to
realistic programming goals. However, keep in mind that sometimes the best emotional change
comes very quickly, so if you feel yourself making rapid progress in any area, don't hold back, let
it develop as fast as it feels comfortable.
Program as if it has already happened

When programming, do not program for it to happen any time in the future. Even if you are
Event Programming, program it as if you are remembering the event in the past, as if it had
already happened. This may seem backwards, as if you are lying to yourself, but your
subconscious mind can't tell the difference. The subconscious mind's primary mission is to
confirm what you already know to be true.
For example, if you want to program yourself to eat healthy. Using Visualization and Suggestions,
you could visualize yourself, in 3rd person, eating greens and loving it; smiling the entire time,
and feeling completely full afterwards. While doing this, you could suggest to yourself "I eat
healthy food."
Program in 3rd person

When visualizing, it is vital that you visualize yourself as if you were in a movie. Do not see
yourself from your mind's eye; that just engages your memory, not your imagination. Imagination
is the key to programming.
For suggestions, it is usually recommended that you use "You" instead of "I". So when making a
suggestion you would say: "You are happy!" to yourself. Hypnotherapists advise that people do
this because it plays into the social aspects of Mind Programming. If you say "I am happy" to
yourself, you might consciously (or subconsciously) reject it, but if you say "YOU are happy" your
mind takes the information as if it was coming from an outside source, an observation from
another person, and it lets down all of its guards.
However, sometimes phrasing suggestions in the form of "You" vs "I" can be awkward. We
suggest trying "You" first and then trying "I" to see if it makes any difference for you.
Program using more than one sensory modality

When visualizing or playing out events in your head, use different senses. Most people in the
U.S. use primarily visual cues to work out an event in their minds. Programming is much stronger
if you use all sensory modalities.
Feel the situation, hear everything going on around you, and imagine it as you want it to happen.
Ignore the problem, focus on the solution

This is by far the most significant part of Mind Programming, and the part many people find the
hardest to put into practice. In essence, your mind is unable to process negatives at a
subconscious level. By its very nature, a negative is processed at the conscious, not
subconscious, level.
First, let us explain what a negative is. A negative is where you present an idea and then appends
the sentence to imply the opposite of the idea. So for instance saying "I do not like smoking" is a
negative. While you read it correctly, your subconscious mind will process that information as "I -like smoking".
The reason for this has to do with how your mind processes information. The subconscious mind
135
processes ideas and returns images and meaning to the conscious mind. So when you say "I do
not like smoking", your mind first has to figure out what "I" and "smoking" means, it doesn't care
about the "not" part. The negation is processed at higher cognitive levels.
Your subconscious mind is like a child. Try telling a child about a cookie jar and then telling the
child not to take a cookie from it. You shouldn't have presented the idea in the first place! That's
the way the mind works.
So, in the case of smoking, the best solution would have been to tell yourself, "I like healthy
lungs".
Repetition
Repetition is very important in Mental Programming. Your mind is used to repetition and
reinforcement. Repeating the programming process as often as possible is very important. Even
after succeeding in programming, occasionally reinforcing that program will be very helpful to its
long-term success.
Keep It Simple
Do not to program too much at once. One programming session should focus on one program,
two at the most. And while you want to be as specific possible, do not overdo it. For instance, say
"I enjoy eating healthy food, like salad and fruit" instead of "I eat greens and grains, only until I
am moderately full, and occasionally reward myself with dessert".
Also, try not to use big words. Your subconscious mind might understand them, but it will take
more processing power to do so, which means a slower programming process. Using smaller,
simple, concise words when possible is always best. Smaller words will also allow you to fit more
repetitions into a single session.
Belief and Confidence

Belief and confidence play a huge role in how your mind processes information. Have you ever
tried to open a door you thought was locked? It probably seemed very locked to you when you
tried, but upon someone else opening it you realized that it was your belief that caused the door to
be locked to you.
When you program your mind, cause yourself to believe that what you are programming is true.
Make yourself believe. If you cannot believe, imagine it as vividly as you can, because
imagination and belief both stimulate the same neural mechanism (the Limbic system, etc).
Confidence will increase naturally as you have success with this amazing technology. The more
success you have, the easier programming will be. Soon you will be able to completely control
your brain and everything your brain controls.
Don't Question It, Just Let It Happen

The last thing you want to do after programming is continually ask yourself whether or not it
worked. The best programming experiences happen after you have forgotten about programming
them in the first place and then suddenly realize "wow, it worked!" If you are waiting for a mental
program to kick in, relax, give it a minute and act as if it will start working soon. See
Executing A Mental Program.
Further Reading
136

What To Say When You Talk To Yourself, Shad Helmstetter, Ph.D.
6.5
Suggestions Guide
"The key to successful suggestions and auto-suggestions is to say, or hear, them with
belief, conviction and expectation. Listening to or repeating suggestions is much more
effective if you put meaning into each word."
What is suggestion?
A suggestion is a statement, or set of statements, that explains what you want in language that
the subconscious mind can understand. A suggestion, as opposed to an auto-suggestion, is a
statement that is coming from an outside source, whether it is a hypnotherapist, a psychologist, a
friend or a recording.
Since suggestions come from an outside source, they require very little mental energy to process,
so you can use them while in a Theta state. Theta is also called the "hyper-suggestibility" state.
This is where your mind accepts anything you give it, completely bypassing any mental filters that
we use to accept or reject ideas. In a hyper-suggestible state, you can effectively reprogram your
mind by playing pre-recorded tracks filled with specially worded suggestions.
Scroll to the bottom to read the Guide for more information.
What is an Auto-Suggestion?
Auto-Suggestion is the same as a regular suggestion except that it is a statement that you give
yourself, in your own head, without the use of a recording device. Auto-Suggestions are typically
used while in the Alpha state, because in Alpha you can organize your thoughts without affecting
your brainwaves and level of relaxation.
Note that Auto-Suggestion in Alpha should be thought-only. Do not use your voice during any
session. Expressing ideas in actual words is a function of the Beta brainwaves and will quickly
take your mind out of the open state that the Neuro-Programmer produces.
Scroll to the bottom to read the Guide for more information.
Advantages / Disadvantages
Suggestions can be especially potent for emotional problems, since visualizing specific emotional
solutions can be difficult.
137
They do have their disadvantages, however. For instance, when trying to program out bad habits,
such as smoking, suggestions might not be the best solution. As you will understand after reading
the Guide, you shouldn't suggest "I will not smoke" because smoking is the problem, not the
solution.
For bad habits and other re-programming situations, Mental Techniques could be your best
option.
Proper Use / Effectiveness

For Mental Programming to be effective, the recordings should always be plainly audible. With
Theta sessions, the goal is to drill the suggestions into your brain; to make it so repetitive that you
end up getting used to the suggestions and they become a hum in the background, flowing
directly into your subconscious as you fall to the brink of sleep. The volume level shouldn't startle
you out of the target brainwave, but you should definitely be able to clearly hear and easily
understand the suggestions.
Recordings should not be "subliminal." See Subliminal Myths for more information.
In order for suggestions to be effective you have to be 1) at least partially conscious 2) in a
suggestible, receptive mental state and 3) able to hear and comprehend the suggestions before
learning (through repetitiveness) to ignore them and let them fade into the background, where
they can directly affect the subconscious.
Being completely awake and listening to suggestions will do little, but being deeply asleep or
using "subliminals" to do all the work for you will also do little (in fact, probably less than if you
were listening to them while wide awake). The best possible programming scenario would be in a
very drowsy state, on the brink of sleep, but still conscious enough to hear and comprehend the
recordings.
Examples Of Suggestions/Auto-Suggestions
Note: These examples do not use any of the techniques in the Mental Techniques section, many
of which would be very appropriate. These also do not take into account any Brainwave Training
sessions which would also be extremely helpful. These are just examples of suggestions.
Also, "You" and "I" can be used interchangeably. You need to figure out for yourself which one
works better for you.
Problem
Suggestion
138
Fear
I AM bold and daring. I AM confident.
Misdirected Love
I feel ONLY friendship towards [insert name of person].
Smoking
You enjoy feeling healthy and having healthy lungs.
Feeling Stupid
I AM intelligent. I am smart and everyone around me notices my

intelligence.
Always Late
You are early for appointments. You are known for being on time.
Bad Posture
I have good posture. My back is straight. I enjoy looking proud and

keeping my back straight.
Feeling Ugly
You love the way you look. You are attractive. People around you
notice your confidence and find you attractive as well.
Injury / Wound
I AM healing. My body is rapidly healing itself.
Shy / Not Confident
I AM confident and assertive. I am forward. I approach every

situation with a winning attitude.
Low Self-Esteem
You love yourself. You realize that you are like everyone else. The
admiration you have for others is now also directed at yourself.
Low Sex Drive
You are motivated to have sex. You enjoy and crave sex.
Low Energy
You are energetic and motivated.
Suggestion Guidelines / Special Wording Guidelines

The key to successful suggestions and auto-suggestions is to say, or hear, them with belief,
conviction and expectation. Listening to or repeating suggestions is much less effective if
you don't put meaning into each word.
139
1) Use Positives
Your suggestions should describe what you want rather than what you don't want. Use "I am
confident and assertive" instead of "I am not shy."
Your mind cannot process negatives. This is because in order for your mind to process a
negative it must first look at the meaning of the sentence. When you say "I am not shy", your
subconscious processes only the words that have meaning, which in this sentence is "I" and
"Shy". So the suggestion your subconscious is getting is "I -- Shy" which could have the opposite
effect!
This also applies to words that mean negatives. Don't say "I am fearless" when you could say "I
am bold."
2) Believe in what you say or hear
There is a lot of evidence that suggestions that one believes to be true have a much higher
success rate than suggestions that one does not believe in. You can fake belief, however. Try
your best to cause your mind to believe what you are saying or hearing. Repeat it and keep
repeating until it makes sense, until you yourself believe it.
Even if you are lying to yourself, such as saying "I AM healthy" when you are clearly not, you
should try to believe it. If you can't believe that, then you can probably believe that what you are
doing is helping you reach your goal. Transfer that belief directly to your suggestion. You ARE
healthy.
3) Keep it simple
- No big words. Suggestions are much more powerful if they are short and easy to say. If they are
easy to say they are probably easier for your mind to process. Do not make suggestions that are
long and wordy.
- Keep it short. Since you should only be programming one thing at a time, your suggestions
should not be more than 2 or 3 sentences. This also means you can fit more into a single
programming session, increasing the repetition and thus increasing the effectiveness.
Also, it might be a good idea to use very simple sentences with few embellishments. To the
subconscious, there is no difference between "I really like pie" and "I like pie." It probably won't
hurt to use embellishments, and it might even work a bit better for YOU. However, if you leave
them out you can fit more repetitions into a programming session.
4) Use Present Tense
Suggestions that you have phrased in the future will always stay in the future. The mind cannot
act on future suggestions, because it simply believes that it doesn't have to. You have just told it
that it is going to happen, so why should your mind care?
- Do not use the word "will". Suggest "I AM energetic" instead of "I will be energetic".
- You can use "ing". Suggest "I AM healing" instead of "I AM healed." if you are not comfortable
lying to yourself. Both will be effective, however.
5) Repetition
Repeat your suggestions as many times as you can during a programming session. Repetition is
something your mind is accustomed to and it will expect it in order to allow you reprogramming to
140
Further Reading
What To Say When You Talk To Your Self, Shad Helmstetter, Ph.D.
Book Of Floating, Michael Hutchison
Patterns Of The Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D., Bandler and Grinder
Trance Formations, Bandler and Grinder
6.6
Visualization Guide
What is visualization?
Visualization is the act of imagining something happening or imagining something as you want it
to be. When you use the Neuro-Programmer to take your mind to a very open state, visualization
causes your subconscious mind to use its faculties to make your visualization come true. It can
also be used to desensitize you to harmful or disturbing memories.
For the purposes of this document, visualization isn't always just visual, despite its name. In fact,
using most or all of your senses increases the overall effectiveness of all Mental Programming.
Visualization is the most potent way to program your mind and it is incorporated into most of the
techniques discussed in the Mental Techniques section.
Examples Of Visualization
Note: These examples do not use any of the techniques in the Mental Techniques section, many
of which would be very appropriate. These also do not take into account any Brainwave Training
sessions which would also be extremely helpful. These are just examples of simple visualization.
Problem
Visualization
141
Overweight
Picture yourself 10 - 20 pounds lighter, looking and feeling great.

See yourself eating greens instead of sugars. Picture yourself
getting up in the morning and looking at the scale, imagine it reading
10 - 20 pounds lighter than you are now. Cause yourself to feel
lighter, like a feather; as if a 20 pound weight had suddenly been
lifted.
Social Anxiety / Shyness
See yourself walking around in a crowd of people, supremely

confident and assertive. Picture yourself as taller than everyone
else. See and hear yourself talking to people with great confidence
and see them respond positively to what you are saying.
Smoking
Set the goal at slowly reducing the number of cigarettes. So see

your pack with only a few missing cigarettes at the end of the day
instead of more. See yourself going about your day without a
cigarette. Picture the cigarettes by themselves and make them
morph into a set of black lungs.
Road rage
See yourself on the road, smiling as other drivers pass you. See the
rear-view mirror as grayed out, you can only see what you want to
see. If you feel adventurous, you can picture a scene that will make
you angry, such as a tailgater, and try to see the scene from the
view of another driver. Another driver wouldn't care that YOU are
being tailgated, and neither should you.
Genetic Problem
Say you have a skin disorder. Picture your skin as healthy as

normal. Feel the satisfaction of knowing that your skin is healing
itself. Picture other people mentioning how good your skin looks
now.
Issue with a person or clique Picture walking by the person(s) without noticing them; they are
completely invisible. Feel your confidence and relaxation as you
pass by or when you are in the presence of these people.
Performance / Nervousness
Say you have a test in the morning. Picture yourself taking the test
quickly and with great focus. Feel yourself as confident and secure
in your good grade. See the grade on the paper as A++ or 90something.
Injury / Wound
See your injury as completely healed with no scar tissue remaining.

If it is an internal injury, picture a white light or other healing energy
flowing around the general area. Picture yourself drinking a potion
that will accelerate your healing by 10 times. Feel the relief that such
a potion would bring.
Bad Memories
Sift through each memory individually. Do 2 things to each scene.

1) See the scene from a different perspective (like a fly on the wall),
make the colors of the scene black and white. If you remember the
memory a certain way (visually, auditory or through feeling), use a
different sense to remember the scene.
2) Re-write the memory the way it should have happened. Make
sure that this time everything happens as it should have happened
for you to benefit the most.
Depression
See yourself as happy and smiling, with good posture. Picture

yourself smiling in front of a clock that is rapidly spinning through the
hours of a day, indicating that you are happy throughout the entire
day. Picture your brain releasing "happy chemicals". See the
chemicals hit your bloodstream (visualize it) and feel the sensations
of suddenly being happy for no reason.
142
Why does it work?

Because visualization and belief are directly linked, and the subconscious mind cannot tell the
difference between imagination and reality.
The downside to visualization, the self-fulfilling prophecy - "Whatever you do,

don't look down!"
Visualization is great once you learn the power it has, but it can be the worst enemy of people
who do not realize its power. Most people have experienced a moment when what they thought
was going to happen actually did. Usually, when you think of something that could happen it is
something you are trying to avoid. Think of the first time you rode a bike. All you could think
about was "am I going to fall" or "when I lose my balance it is going to hurt." Upon thinking that,
you would probably fall, as you imagined you might. This is why people will always yell "Whatever
you do, don't look down!" when you're high above the ground. Doing so would remind you of
falling, and thus make you more likely to fall.
Visualization Guidelines
143
1) Practice
The more real your visualization is, the more effective it will be. If you don't feel confident about
your visualization abilities, try practicing. Start out with a tree or something even simpler, like a
toy truck. See the object. Rotate it in 3d. Add color, add reflections.
2) What if I can't visualize?
Some people believe they can't visualize, or that they have no mental imagery. That is
impossible. Whether you know it or not, your brain must think in images, at least some of the
time. What does a blue sheep look like? Unless you are completely confused by what a blue
sheep would look like, you just visualized it. Keep practicing and you will be able to make that
mental image even stronger. Practice is vital to effective visualization.
If you still believe you can't visualize images, you are probably of an Auditory or Kinesthetic
Sensory Modality, which means audio or feeling could be more effective for you, at least at first.
Remember that in the context of this application, visualization means using all three major
senses, not just sight.
Take the Sensory Modality test (off of the Tools menu) and use that information in your
programming. If you are Auditory, you could try increasing or decreasing the volume of imagined
sounds, as opposed to altering the size of a picture. If you are kinesthetic try focusing on
imagined emotions or the feeling of things such as wind or the carpet beneath your feet.
3) See yourself in 3rd person.
When you visualize, it is very important to view yourself as if you are watching a movie; view
yourself in 3rd person. The reason for this is because of the way the mind processes information
coming from behind the eyes. If you visualize behind your own eyes, your mind will treat it as a
memory. For reasons not well explored by science, if you visualize yourself from another
person's viewpoint, the power of the visualization multiplies.
4) You don't have to be in the picture
You don't have to be in the visualization if there is nothing you are supposed to be doing. For
instance, say you want to quit smoking. You could picture your favorite cigarettes on a table and
cause them to morph into a set of black, very unhealthy looking lungs. If you visualize this
vividly, it will disgust you and your subconscious enough to not crave the cigarettes near as
much, if at all. This kind of visualization is used often in the Mental Techniques section.
5) Use objects
You can use real or completely made up objects to impress a point onto your subconscious. For
instance, if you wanted to accelerate your healing, you could put a mental bandage on the
wound, while repeating to yourself that the bandage accelerates healing time by 10 times. As
another example, say you wanted to not be bothered by your arrogant boss, you could put a
mental shield around yourself or use a mental syringe to inject yourself with an "immunity" to your
boss' arrogance.
6) Feel everything associated with a scene
There is usually much more to a scene than visuals. Every scene evokes emotion, even if you
are not in the scene. If you are visualizing yourself winning a competition, make yourself feel the
overwhelming joy and relief that comes with it. If you are visualizing yourself confidently speaking
up to your boss and demanding a raise, feel the confidence and the energy rush.
7) Increase the color and brightness of a scene
When you find a piece of mental imagery that you particularly like, one that makes you feel the
exact way you desire to feel, increase its color and the intensity of its lighting. This is a good way
144
Further Reading
Seeing with the Mind's Eye, Mike Samuels, M.D.
Creative Visualization, Shakti Gawain
6.7
Mental Techniques
6.7.1
Information
What are Mental Programming Techniques?
Programming Techniques are special visualization and suggestion strategies that have been
proven to be especially effective for specific purposes.
Most human problems are shared by a large percentage of the population. Many people bite their
nails, have bad posture, have relationship problems, hate their supervisors, eat when they are not
hungry, etc. Mental Programming Techniques have been developed to deal with these common
problems. Most uncommon problems, however, can be adapted to one or more of these
techniques. Some of these techniques, like "Swish", are particularly useful and can be adapted to
almost every situation.
Note: Mental Programming Techniques are meant to be used with Alpha Programming
sessions, where you do not have a recording that loop. Using these techniques with Theta
sessions will probably just work to bring you back up to Alpha or Beta.
Index:
The "Swish" Pattern
Anchors / Triggers
Using Color, Intensity & Position
Event Programming
Modeling & Roles
145
Your Mental Movie Projector

Your Mental Workshop
6.7.2
The "Swish" Pattern

This technique was developed by Richard Bandler, one of the creators of NLP (Neuro-Linguistic
Programming). It is a proven and widely used method of changing a behavior; to take an undesired
thought and make it trigger something pleasant.
The key to using the Swish technique is speed and intensity. Once you have the necessary images
in your mind, you must "Swish" them very quickly, but the intensity of the conflicting images must
be present. Also, you must repeat the actual Swish process (Step 4) until it is sufficiently coded into
memory (usually 10 or more repetitions).
Step 1
Pick something unpleasant. It could be a memory, a mental state, something you might expect to
happen, anything. Pick something that you want your mind to react positively to. Visualize it in full
detail. Don't leave anything out. Try to feel everything associated with your selection; all the
emotions, environmental variables and body sensations. Do this once, before proceeding. Just
keep the intensity of the visualization in the back of your head for use in later steps.
Step 2
Pick something pleasant. It could be a memory of your significant other or simply an image that
makes you very happy. A memory is typically more powerful, though. Just make sure it is
something that is very familiar to you and something makes you intensely happy. Visualize this as
you did in step 1.
Step 3
Create 2 frames. Put the unpleasant memory in one frame and the pleasant memory in the other.
Make the pleasant frame much smaller and put it in the corner of your mental "field of vision" for
now. Make the unpleasant frame big and bright.
Step 4
Now "Swish" the two frames.
Very quickly, cause the smaller, pleasant frame to become larger than the unpleasant one. Make
sure to feel the intensity of the new image over the old. At the same time, make the unpleasant
frame become smaller and dimmer. In the instant this occurs, enthusiastically say "Swish!" to
yourself, or, if you are good at audio visualization, actually hear a swish-like sound as the frames
switch places.
146
Step 5
Repeat Step 4 as much as time permits or until you know that it has worked.
Step 6 - Test it
If you used the Swish technique correctly then thinking of the old, unpleasant image should
instantly trigger the new, pleasant one. Thus the unpleasant situation triggers a positive, pleasant
response!
Examples Of Classic Swish

Problem
Swish Protocol
Bad Memory
Visualize the bad memory in the big frame. "Swish"

into a memory of something that makes you happy.
Dim and shrink the bad memory frame while
increasing and brightening the new, good frame.
Hearing people chew with their mouth

open is infuriating
Imagine hearing the sound (and seeing it as well, if

that bothers you). Make sure you feel the aggravation
you normally would upon witnessing it in reality. Now,
as above, pick any happy memory. Make this one
particularly relaxing, because that will be particularly
contrary to the old memory, which is very arousing, but
in a bad way. Swish the two frames and repeat until a
test of the unpleasant memory elicits the new, happy
reaction. After that, you will actually enjoy the sound of
people chewing with their mouth open.
Intimidated by boss
Visualize your boss in front of you or passing you in the

hall. Feel the intimidation and the knot in your
stomach. Now "Swish" that image with another one
that is relaxed and happy, one that makes you feel
confident and in control. Do this as many times as
possible and make sure it is quite vivid.
Examples Of Adapted Swish

Here are some examples of Swish being adapted to other types of mental programming, such as
147
habit control and healing.

Problem
Smoking
Swish Protocol
Habit Control using the Swish method can be done by
identifying what is done just before the undesired
behavior is acted upon. In the case of smoking, it
would probably be you reaching for a cigarette. Make
that the first, unpleasant image frame. Make sure you
internally feel the craving as you would if you actually
were reaching for a cigarette. Now the next (desired)
image frame should be of you retracting your hand.
Make something about the second frame pleasant.
Feel satisfied.
Now Swish the two image frames and repeat until the
two are one. In this way, the first act (reaching for a
cigarette) elicits the second act, which is to pull your
hand away and feel happy and satisfied about it. So in
effect your desire to light up a cigarette will extinguish
itself.
Injury
See yourself about to go to bed, looking at your wound.

That is the unpleasant, first frame. Now picture yourself
waking up, looking at your wound and seeing that it is
completely healed.
Swish the two images and repeat until even thinking
about the wound gives you a happy picture of it fully
healed. This will trigger accelerated healing while you
are sleeping. All you have to do is remember to look at
your wound in the same way you imagined it. By using
sleep as an intermediate, it allows the technique to not
be contradicted right after triggering the response.
Remember that the second response is automatic, so
don't bother looking over your wound in the morning for
the purposes of consistency. Just remember to trigger
the response every night before bed until the wound is
healed.
6.7.3
Anchors / Triggers
What is an Anchor/Trigger?
Anchors and Triggers are essentially small, very specific mental programs meant to serve a very
specific purpose; to evoke a mental response immediately after the introduction of a stimulus.
The stimulus could be anything from a snap of your fingers to the opening of a car door. The
148
purpose of an Anchor/Trigger could also be almost anything, as long as it is very specific. It could
be to put you into an energetic mental state or to stop a food craving in its tracks. Whatever the
purpose, Anchors and Triggers are very useful mental tools, used extensively by hypnotists and
hypnotherapists, as well as NLP practitioners.
For the purposes of these documents, Anchors and Triggers mean slightly different things.
Anchors
An Anchor is a stimulus/response mechanism that is meant to put you into a certain mental state.
For example, the mental state could induce more Theta waves, allowing you easier access to
your memory or accelerated learning abilities. The mental state could also be calming, meant to
sedate you in times of stress.
Creating Anchors involves first getting into the mental state that you wish to reproduce at a later
time. When you have reached the peak of your mental state, create your Anchor by introducing
the stimulus, which can be anything you want (a mental image, your index finger touching your
knuckle, etc). Creating an Anchor is as simple as introducing the specific stimulus at the time of
your desired mental state. Repeat the stimulus over and over, crossing multiple programming
sessions if you have to, until the Anchor is properly coded. (Scroll to the bottom to get more
information on creating Anchors/Triggers)
Research has proven that Anchors are more effective when used with more than one
Sensory Modality. So your Anchor could involve touching your middle finger to your palm, seeing
the certain mental picture, or an auto-suggestion of some kind.
If you decide to only use one modality for your anchor we strongly recommend that you use your
Primary Sensory Modality. Other Mind Programming methods suggest using only Kinesthetic
anchors, such as touching specific fingers together. Although this is effective, it is far more
effective to find out what your primary sensory modality is and choose an Anchor that fits the
modality. If your primary modality is visual, you should use mental imagery. If your primary
modality is auditory, you should use phrases and rhymes to evoke responses. If it is kinesthetic,
the most common Anchor stimuli involves the hands in some way. Touching two fingers and your
thumb together, touching your index knuckle with your thumb, etc. The trick is to use an Anchor
that is easy to execute, to remember and to use without drawing attention to yourself.
Your Anchor stimulus should not be a common gesture or a stimulus that could occur at random
times throughout the day, like a handshake or a phrase you repeat to yourself often. Such
Anchors will quickly wear off because of their frequent use in non-specific situations. Also, you
should try to make a different Anchor stimulus for each Anchor. Some methods use one universal
Anchor for everything, but that can become very confusing and ends up diluting the overall effect
of the Anchor. Be creative and try to think of many different ways to evoke Anchors using a
variety of stimuli.
Anchors are more effective if you know what situation you will be in when you plan to use the
Anchor. If you plan to use a calming-state Anchor when in the presence of your supervisor,
imagine your supervisor as you create the Anchor. For example, first you would picture yourself
at work, then you would probably be in front of your supervisor. At that point, freeze your mental
movie and make sure you are at the peak of the desired mental state before programming the
Anchor.
Triggers
Triggers differ from Anchors in that the stimulus usually comes from an unconscious,
unintentional or external source. Say, for example, you have a road rage problem. You could
create a Trigger that is meant to execute upon the opening of your car door, or the vibrations
149
from the engine starting, or seeing someone tailgating you in your rear view mirror.
However, Trigger stimuli do not always come from outside sources. Consider the frequent panic
attack victim. That person could put a Trigger in place to evoke a desired reaction when feeling
the panic attack is about to start. In this case, extreme calm and relaxation would probably be
appropriate.
Additionally, triggers may serve as reminders. You could set up a Trigger that reminds you to stop
on the way home to fetch some groceries for dinner.
Triggers may be created in the same manner as Anchors, or you can simply use suggestions
such as "Upon seeing the grocery store I am reminded to stop and get groceries for dinner." Using
an Anchor-like approach, you could imagine yourself near the grocery store and then abruptly
hearing the words "You need to buy eggs and bread for dinner." (Scroll down for more information
on creating Anchors/Triggers)
Anchor/Trigger Guidelines
1) Give it a minute
As mentioned at the bottom of the Programming Guide, it is very important not to ask yourself
"Did it work?" immediately after using an Anchor or Trigger. Give it a minute, relax, let the
program execute. After you develop a sense of confidence for this technology, Mental Programs
will execute faster and be more powerful.
2) For tactile anchors/triggers, use your non-dominant arm
For reasons not quite understood, it is more effective to use your non-dominant arm (and hand)
for Kinesthetic anchors and triggers. It is also usually more convenient, considering you could
write or gesture with your dominant hand and induce a mental state at the same time with the
other hand.
3) Pick a stimulus that is related to the Mental State
When choosing an appropriate Anchor stimulus, try to think of something that is appropriate for
the situation. For example, if you create an Anchor for concentration and focus, you could pick
the mental image of a Pencil or pile of books and for an audio stimulus you could choose to say
"I am as sharp and focused as a needle."
How To Create Anchors / Triggers

The trick to successfully creating an Anchor/Trigger is vividness and repetition. The desired
mental state or physical situation must be vivid at the time of Anchor/Trigger creation.
In order to create a Mental State or situation, you should first be near the brink of sleep or at least
deeply relaxed. From that drowsy platform, you can create nearly any state or situation you want.
Remember, dreams and visualizations can be very real. Your task, in creating an Anchor or
Trigger, is to create a dream that is intensely real. When the dream has reached its peak,
introduce a stimulus of your choice. Keep repeating the stimulus until you are sure that the Mental
State or situation is clearly associated with it.
If you choose the act of crossing two of your fingers as an Anchor, you would need to keep
crossing your fingers, dozens of times, while at the peak of your desired Mental State. When
doing that, you could be imagining a mental picture and hearing a specific sentence. All of these
things would form a perfect Anchor, but only if your Mental State is vivid and the stimuli is
150
repeated as many times as necessary.
Examples Of Sensory-based Anchors

Note: These are just examples. Use your best judgment. All Mind Programming should personally
fit you.
Desired Mental State
Relaxation
Anchor Protocol
Imagine yourself at your favorite relaxation spot. This is
most likely your bed or couch. Imagine yourself there.
Relaxation is an easy thing to Anchor, especially with the
Neuro-Programmer, since nearly all the Sessions
profoundly relax the user.
(Visual) You imagine your couch and/or bed.
(Auditory) You [mentally] hear words, softly spoken: "You
are floating. You are relaxed." Alternatively, you could
speak any Auditory Anchor to yourself.
(Kinesthetic) You tilt your head slightly to the right.
Pride / Self-Love
Try to recreate your proudest moment. Make sure you have

the situation fully mapped out in your brain. Make sure it is
vivid and that you actually feel the pride and allencompassing self-love that comes with the situation.
(Visual) Imagine a piece of furniture or some other prop in
the above situation. Anything to remind you of that
situation.
(Auditory) You hear words, softly spoken: "I am amazing."
(Kinesthetic) You touch your middle finger to your palm.
Aggressiveness
Imagine or remember yourself being very aggressive, in a

number of appropriate situations. Get yourself to a state
where you feel you can do anything. Cause yourself to feel
aggressive, whether you are timid by nature or not.
(Visual) Imagine a car engine revving.
(Auditory) You hear word "Yes!" aggressively spoken:
(Kinesthetic) You cross two of your toes.
6.7.4
Using Color, Intensity & Position

The way the brain processes information is strongly tied to color, intensity, position, and a host of
other sub-modalities. For example, experiences that are intriguing to us tend to be remembered in
finer detail. The colors are brighter, more vibrant. The mental "image" is larger and directly in front
151
of our inner eye's field of vision, while a memory less intriguing may would be smaller, dimmer and
perhaps off to the side. Think of someone you find intensely attractive and interesting. While
thinking about him or her, note the details of your mental image. Now put that image aside and
think of someone you rarely think about, someone you barely even notice. Notice that the mental
image will be fuzzier, out of focus, off to the side, less vibrant and smaller.
If you want to take the "bite" out of a bad memory, a great strategy is to unfocus your mental image
of it, dim its color or change it to black and white, and decrease its size. Conversely, a great way to
motivate yourself to a task is to think of yourself doing the task, and the end result, while increasing
the color, brightness and size of the mental image.
Special Uses of Color

Colors have numerous emotional reactions virtually hard wired into your brain. As you may guess,
Red is most often associated with power, excitement, authority and that which is forbidden, but is
also the universal color of sexual attraction. Blue is a soothing color, while green is natural. White
is a clean, angelic color.
You can use colors to your advantage while mental programming. Try framing all of your mental
images in different colors to suite your goals. For example, you could also use red to reinvigorate
a youthful sexual attraction to your spouse. Picture your spouse framed in red, with red lips and
red clothing. On the other hand, you could use the color black to reduce your attraction to
someone. Think of someone you are very attracted to and paint their lips black. Note the reaction.
Of course, emotional reaction to color may be different between individuals. Experiment to find
how your emotions are associated with various colors.
Special Uses of Position

The position of a mental object in your inner eye's field of vision can have a huge impact on your
perception of it. For instance, your left field of vision is processed by the right (emotional) side of
your brain, while the right field is processed by the left (logical) brain hemisphere. So, if you take
a painful memory and move it to your right, your emotional reaction to it may be dramatically
reduced. Conversely, if you want to empathize with someone, you try moving your memory of
them to your left field of vision, where it will be processed by your right, emotional, brain.
Additionally, your visualization of a mental object (or memory) may be nearer or farther away
from you based on the age of the memory (older memories may seem "farther away" or behind
you, for example) or the mental priority the visualization holds (visualizing someone you are very
attracted to may seem very close, while visualizing someone you are ambiguous about may
seem farther away and off to the side). Changing the position of a mental object can have a huge
impact on how you perceive it.
6.7.5
6.7.5.1
Introduction
The mind loves objects, symbols and metaphor. The human brain is built from the ground up to
recognize patterns and associate ideas. This fact can be used to our advantage while mental
programming. It can be much easier to work with a single mental object, associated with a mental
function or goal, as opposed to working with a scene or abstract emotional state.
152
The mind can objectify and symbolize nearly anything, from sickness to emotions to the
subconscious mind itself. You are also not limited as to what object you choose. It can even be a
living thing. For example, you could symbolize your fear as a cockroach, and then proceed to
squish it. Or you could associate something edible. For instance, you could mentally symbolize
confidence with a magic red apple. You could then imagine yourself eating this apple, endowing
your body with all confidence you will ever need.
Objectify Emotions / Feelings
Objectify Body Functions (such as the Immune System)
Use Well Known Symbols & Text
6.7.5.2
Objectifying Emotions & Feelings

These are some examples of mental "objects' being used to help release negative emotions.
Analysis
Identify an emotion, or a feeling, you wish to desensitize yourself to. Ask yourself a number of
questions.
1) If the emotion/feeling were an object, what would it feel like to touch it?
2) If the emotion/feeling were an object, what would it look like?
3) If the object had a taste, what would it taste like?
4) If you shook the object, what would it sound like?
5) How big is the object?
6) What could this object fit inside? A landfill? A small box?
With each question, take a moment to develop the associative object in your mind. After the last
step, you may actually put your newly created "object" into the container chosen in step 6. A reallife example was given by a young man who was trying to rid himself of anxiety and nervousness,
which came in the form of a constant knot in his stomach. Upon visualizing, the feeling looked to
him like a fish, constantly wriggling inside his stomach. So he took the fish, analyzed it and put it
in a box, which he locked a moment later. He said it completely rid him of the pain, and it did not
return for days after only a single session.
Kites
Picture yourself holding on to a number of kites on a very windy day. Each kite represents a
negative emotion/feeling, or part of a whole. One at a time, release the kites. With each release
feel and know that the associated emotion/feeling is now gone.
Feather
Similarly, you could see your emotion as a feather. Simply throw it into the air on a windy day and
watch it blow away, never to be seen again.
Smashing Orbs
Your mind, oddly enough, responds to violence, though only if you use it properly. Picture
yourself facing a colorless, concrete wall. Beside you, on the ground, there are a number of orbs
of different colors and patterns, much like a pile of marbles, only these orbs are the size of
bowling balls. These orbs are alive; they glow, pulse, and breathe. They are filled with a material
that represents what you are attempting to rid yourself of.
153
Find the orb that represents the emotion you wish to destroy. Make sure to get a good look at it,
maybe breathe on it and write the emotion's name onto the condensation. Finally, throw the orb at
the wall and watch it burst. Picture gas escaping into the air and picture a watery, colored splat on
an otherwise featureless concrete wall.
6.7.5.3
Objectifying Body Functions

As mentioned, mental objects are not limited to being associated with emotions. The mind has the
capacity to associate incredibly complex bodily tasks with a relatively simple set of visualizations.
Have you ever seen TV commercials that present an internal view of the human body in order to
explain how a drug works. The areas of the body colored red typically represent problem areas. For
example, in an antacid commercial the stomach may be red and enlarged. The drug is usually
represented by a blue or green liquid which travels down the esophagus to the stomach, soothing it
and changing its color from red to a blue or green.
In the same way, you can form your own mental image of your own body. Buddhists, Qigong
experts and Yogis have long used visualization for this purpose. For example, one way to quickly
heat up the body is to imagine your heart pumping magma, fire or boiling water. Visualize it and feel
it moving through your veins. As you grow comfortable with a simple visualization of the inner body,
try a 3d view, perhaps even from the perspective of a camera traveling in the blood stream.
Remember: a lack of human anatomy knowledge does not matter. If you have knowledge, use
it, otherwise just remember that what you are doing is objectifying a function in order to give your
mind the correct instructions. Your subconscious will handle the rest.
Examples:
Sharks & Fish
If you have a cold or other disease, try visualizing sharks swimming through your veins
(representing the immune system, antibodies and white blood cells), eating red fish which
represent bacteria or virii.
Blue Liquid to help with heartburn
If you have heartburn you could visualize a blue, soothing liquid traveling down your esophagus
to your stomach. When it reaches your stomach, imagine steam rising up as if a fire had just
been extinguished.
Microscopic Robots
A stroke victim, told that her brain had been permanently damaged, used visualization by
imagining her brain being electrically repaired by millions of tiny robots. After a few months of
regular visualization, she started showing major improvements, far beyond what her doctors
thought was possible.
The Inhale Energy, Exhale Smoke Technique
This serves many purposes, but its main purpose is release and energy. If you ever feel
stressed, angry, full of emotion or lacking of energy, this technique can be used. It is incredibly
effective and has been used, in one form or another, for thousands of years. There is a long
tradition of techniques similar to this one in Qigong and Yoga. The Qigong version is longer and
goes through more mental imagery, but requires more practice and for the purposes of this
application a short, easy to repeat technique is best.
This technique is mainly meant for Real-Time Programming or as a prelude to deeper
relaxation, but like most mental activities it can be greatly enhanced using the NeuroProgrammer.
Step 1
154
Close or unfocus your eyes. Relax but keep your back straight so as to allow maximum lung
capacity.
Step 2
Take a slow, deep breath from your abdomen (as explained in the Relaxation Guide). As you
breathe in, picture white light or energy particles in the air, being sucked into your system by
your breath. Feel the energy in your body as you breathe. Feel the energy peak as you are
about to exhale.
Step 3
Now picture all the bad, destructive, painful emotions as thick, black smoke rolling around in
your system. Identify your emotions and insecurities, building them up in the smoke. Picture it
as if it is forming in your chest, ready to be released. Take a moment to make sure you have
a firm grasp on the black smoke before proceeding, remembering that it represents
everything that you want to get rid of.
Step 4
Exhale slowly, making sure to visualize your breath as black smoke.
Step 5
Repeat steps 1 - 4 until the color of the air you exhale matches the air you inhale. In other
words, keep doing it as long as you feel there is still smoke to release.
As mentioned above, this technique is particularly effective. We have even seen people that
were so full of negative emotion that they literally coughed upon the first couple exhales.
6.7.5.4
Using Text & Symbols

In addition to associating objects, you can also use well known symbols (such as a stop sign) or
even text. Words are, after all, simply symbols representing ideas.
Examples:
To build a dislike for something
First, visualize an image or a scene (preferably still-life or freeze-framed) that you now enjoy,
such as a bakery with cakes and cookies. Now pick a symbol that means "forbidden" or "STOP"
to you. It could be the word "no" written in red ink, or maybe a big red X. Take an imaginary
brush to paint on your scene like a canvas, as if there is a life-size photo of the scene in front of
you. Make sure to take time to visualize yourself painting, instead of just letting the symbol
appear out of nowhere.
When done, your image should be the same, with big red text or a big red symbol painted onto
it. Make sure you feel that it is now forbidden.
To build an affinity for something
As above, first visualize an image or scene, but this time make it a scene you wish to like more,
such as the health-food isle at the store or a big bowl of salad. After making sure you have the
visualization firmly in place, use your brush to paint a symbol in any color other than red. We
recommend green or gold. The symbol should be something inviting, like "Yes" or "Welcome!".
You could even imagine your scene as a picture in a (color) magazine, allowing you to circle it
repeatedly.
6.7.6
155
Event Programming
What is Event Programming?
Event Programming involves Visualizing an event and Suggesting that the event is happening or
will happen. The event can be almost anything; a raise, making a new friend, getting a date,
finding a solution to a problem, etc. If done properly, this technique gets your subconscious
working for you, in the background, until the event is made real.
How does it work?

The subconscious mind is constantly working. It affects our mind and body in every way, as well
as the way everyone else perceives us. Only the completely self-mastered can hide subconscious
cues well enough to not be seen on any level by other people (or even pets). Take the poker face,
for instance, it has to do with much more than the face. In the game of poker when you find you
have a winning hand of cards, the subconscious tells your body to relax; now you have a winning
hand. If you let your body relax, the other players will know, subconsciously and, if they are
experienced, consciously as well. Similarly, you have to control your breathing, the color of your
skin, all facial gestures, eye movements, fidgets, changes in personality; the list goes on and
delves into many more subtle and finer layers of sub-conscious expression.
Did you know that when humans are lying they tend to look down and to the left and when
humans are imagining things, or making them up, they tend to look to the right? You might not
have known this, but your subconscious did. The human brain is world's most powerful pattern
recognition machine. It learns by recognizing patterns but for your own well being often keeps
these patterns from your conscious awareness.
Changes in behavior are often the most (consciously) noticeable expressions of the subconscious. If you find someone annoying, your behavior instantly changes to suit the situation. On
the other hand if you find someone intimidating, your behavior will likely change there as well,
perhaps acting nervous or needy for attention.
It is often impossible to hide what you are thinking from people who are frequently in your
presence such as a spouse, friends, colleagues or children. After being exposed to someone for
an extended period of time, people often find themselves finishing each other's sentences and
"sensing" what the other person is thinking. It is not psychic, it's just subconscious!
The point of all this is that when you tell your subconscious to do something it will put every
ounce of its power to work for you. Every cue it sends out will further the goal you have set for it.
Whether you realize it consciously or not, if properly programmed, the sub-conscious will make
things work for you. In the end, at the successful arrival of your goal, it may seem like luck or
coincidence. In reality it was your sub-conscious simply working in ways which you were not
aware.
How to use Event Programming

Event Programming is as simple as imagining yourself in a scene or imagining any scene in
general, while obeying all the rules of Visualization. The difference is that it is an event you are
programming, not a mental state or mental process. You are coding a program into your memory
that will be constantly running for a period of time until the event materializes.
Play the entire event in your head, second by second. Try not to skip anything, but realize that
your subconscious isn't perfect and the event will in all likelihood not play out the exact way you
envision it.
Remember, the more vivid your Visualization, the more effective your mental programming will
156
be.
Repeat the event many times in your head and make sure to replay the event many times during
the day. This will lend reinforcement to the images and help your subconscious focus on the task.
After you are done Visualizing the whole event, suggest to yourself that the situation is happening
or is going to happen, making sure to follow all the rules of Suggestion. Say something like "This
event is taking place." or, if you are spiritual, "Let this event happen in divine order."
Examples Of Event Programming In Action

Event Programming
Result
You visualize an event where you ask for a raise.
Your subconscious gives you

the confidence you need when
You could start by seeing yourself walk in to your boss's office and you confront your boss. You
become very relaxed, as if
having a conversation about why you need a raise. Don't bother
you have already been
figuring out the details of the conversation. That will take too
through the situation. When
much mental processing and will bring your mind out of an open
you speak you are very
state. Just focus on the gestures. See yourself smiling and see
convincing and every gesture
your boss being very receptive to what you say. Next you could
you make furthers your goal of
picture and hear your boss saying "You're a good employee and
a raise.
you deserve a raise." Lastly, you could picture yourself looking at
a paystub with the new amount.
In addition, your subconscious
knows the way to a raise could
be through opportunities. It
would be constantly listening
to the world around you,
searching for promising
information.
In the end, it could just seem
like a lot of luck. An
opportunity just pops up or
your boss suddenly starts
treating you with more
respect.
6.7.7
Modeling & Roles

The brain is the world's most powerful pattern recognition machine. In that sense, a single brain is
more powerful than all the computers of the world combined. Of course, many of these patterns are
so complex that your subconscious keeps them hidden from your outward awareness. For example,
if you want to make a good impression in an interview try mimicking the interviewer's behavior. You
could synchronize breathing, tone of voice, the way you laugh, your body position, posture and so
on, with that of the interviewer. The subconscious mind of the interviewer will pick up on this and
start sending subtle messages to the conscious mind, saying "this person is similar to me!" or "I feel
a special connection to this person".
157
In addition to recognizing patterns, the mind is also built to emulate patterns. "Monkey see, monkey
do" is hard-wired into every human brain. From the time you were born your mind has been
constantly searching its environment for patterns to emulate. This is how you learned your native
language, and developed many of your motor skills and behaviors, good or bad.
The ability to emulate, or model, other people is still built into your adult brain, even now that you
have developed a mature identity. For example, think of a friend you have recently met and spent a
significant amount of time with. After even a few short weeks you may have found yourself using
the same phrases, telling similar jokes in a similar style, perhaps even taking on a similar posture
and style of clothing.
How to Model
Modeling another person can be as easy as visualizing yourself behind their eyelids, experiencing
what he or she would experience and noting all the additional resources at your disposal.
The trick to effective Modeling is to make the situation as vivid as possible, taking note of all the
feelings, motives and behaviors of the person you are Modeling.
Who you choose to Model is also important. Make sure it is someone you have great respect for,
and make sure he or she is suited to the situation.
Using Modeling To Attain New Resources
Step 1
Think about a situation where your current behaviors or limiting beliefs might work against
you. For example, if you have the limiting belief that you are not good at math, you could
envision a math test. Similarly, if you are shy around members of the opposite sex, you could
try envisioning a situation at a night club or a cafe, where you are about to ask someone out.
Step 2
Visualize a person that would behave the way you would like to in this situation.
Step 3
Let the entire situation play out (as vividly as possible), and watch from your perspective as
this person performs the task exactly as you wish you could.
Step 4
Step into that person. Notice the difference in perspective and all the new opportunities
available to you. Notice how all of your limiting beliefs are gone. Note the relaxed confidence
and how good it feels to be performing a task exactly as it should be performed.
Step 5
Let the situation play out again, only this time it is you, inside the model, performing perfectly.
Step 6
Repeat Step 5 in a different way (considering you have a world of flexibility available now),
and observe how it turns out perfectly again and again. Keep repeating the process until you
have let the aspects of your Model integrate into your behaviors, beliefs and attitudes.
Step 7
Step out of your Model but keep all the resources you had available. Notice your increased
confidence and the larger number of choices now available to you.
Switching Heads
158
One age-old modeling technique is to picture yourself literally removing your own head and
placing a new one on top of your body. An aspiring female artist once mentally switched heads
with Picasso and then proceeded to paint, until the work was completed. Not surprisingly, the
resulting piece of art had an absolutely uncanny resemblance to the work of Picasso!
Exercises in Modeling:
Modeling Your Hero
Think of someone you greatly admire, someone inspiring and motivating to you. It could be a
historical figure like Martin Luther King or a fictional super hero like Super Man.
Once you have made your choice, picture your hero in a situation that represents his or her
values and goals. For example, if you chose Martin Luther King, you could picture him
making his famous "I have a dream" speech. Add color to the scene. Make it as realistic as
possible. View the scene in 3D and look around. Make note of everything in the scene. In the
case of Dr. Luther, you could picture the crowd, the microphone, trees and other buildings in
the distance. Run through the entire scene and then rewind it.
After you have a firm grasp on the scene, switch roles with your hero. Pretend you are the
hero in that particular scene. Run through the entire scene again from this perspective. While
doing that, take special note of all the goals and values of you feel. Feel the determination
and the sense of mission, exactly as your hero would.
After the scene completes, think about what you saw and felt while assuming the role of your
hero. Think of all the additional skills, abilities and resources you seemed to have available to
you at the time. Now think of how these additional resources could help you accomplish your
goals.
Roles
The most successful people in the world are not typically the most intelligent, but are instead
the most flexible. Successful people have learned to easily assume different roles on
command. These people can, at a moments notice, switch from a leader to a student, or from a
worker to a coach, or from an artist to a businessman. Successful entrepreneurs often become
experts on dozens of subjects, and are highly accustomed to switching from one role to the next
as necessary.
The first step to accomplishing your goals is to figure out what Roles you need to play to
accomplish them. If you are a student and you want to increase your GPA, you will need
assume the Role of an ardent student, motivated and ambitious. Next you need to figure out
how to assume that role to the greatest extent. Modeling a friend who is doing well in school
would be a great first step. You could also pick someone in your field for whom you have great
respect.
Once you have learned to model, you should be able to emulate nearly any Role you like. Once
you assume the desired role, try setting an Anchor for the mental state, so you can recall back
to it at any time. Or you could simply remember back to your Modeling experience and try to
recreate the same inner state by assuming a similar physiology (posture, facial features,
relaxed breathing, etc).
It is often beneficial to use Modeling in real-time as well. To take the student example a step
further, suppose you have a test and are stuck on a difficult answer. Try closing your eyes and
visualizing yourself removing your own head and replacing it with the head of your professor,
who obviously knows the answer you seek. When you open your eyes, the answer may leap
from the page.
6.7.8
159
Aversion / Attraction
The Aversion/Attraction technique is similar to other mental techniques in that it takes an undesired
idea and associates it with a desired one (or visa versa).
Using Aversion To Induce Disgust

Have you ever eaten something that caused you to feel nauseous? The food itself might not have
even been the actual cause of sickness, but later when smelling or eating the same food, the
nausea returns doesn't it? This effect is known as Aversion and can be used to your advantage,
especially in habit control.
Aversion can be used to free you from destructive habits such as over eating or drug addiction.
The idea is to associate the pleasurable experience of a habit with the intensely un-pleasurable
experience of sickness or disgust.
Say you have a problem eating too much chocolate. In order to rid yourself of this habit, you
could first mentally picture a piece of chocolate on a table. See it and smell it as it if were there.
Then morph it into something disturbing and not appetizing. The more disturbing the better, like a
piece of 2 month old cheese. Make sure to take special note of the transition, where you can
smell both chocolate and the moldy cheese.
Next, you could picture yourself eating the chocolate and feeling deathly sick. Feel your stomach
wretch and feel the unpleasant taste in your mouth. Make sure a bit of the original chocolate
flavor is still there so the association sticks.
After using this method and repeating it a few times, the chocolate cravings should be all but
completely replaced by feelings of disgust and outright nausea.
Using Attraction To Induce Intrigue And Nero-Chemical Release

Suppose you want to love your spouse more. The long years of marriage have taken their toll on
your opinions of each other. Instead of seeking a therapist, you decide to try Mind Programming.
You could use the Attraction Technique to solve this problem. Picture your spouse as is, without a
change in your perception. After you have a good mental picture, morph her (or him) into
something you find intriguing, something that you love and find intensely interesting. You could
morph your spouse into an angelic looking statue, a monument, or you could see her (or him) at a
table in a jazzy nightclub, looking mysterious and intimately attractive. Ultimately, what you
"morph" your spouse into, or where you place him or her is entirely up to you. It should be a very
personal place that means something to you. As long as it gives you a feeling of euphoria and
intrigue, it is the right image.
Note on this example: Of course, most psychologists will probably cite lack of communication as
the cause of marital dysfunction. We propose that it is as much a lack of essential neurochemistry
as it is a lack of communication. Take a moment to imagine a time when you first met someone
you found very attractive. Feel that chemical jolt? Using mind programming, you can reproduce
these chemicals as much as you like and for whomever you like. Though both communication
and neuro-chemicals probably need to be worked on. See a psychologist for the communication
part.
160
6.7.9
Your Mental Movie Projector
6.7.9.1
Introduction
Memories and visualizations naturally display in our mind's eye in a similar way to a movie seen in
a theater. In many memories, you may even see yourself in third person. Using these techniques,
you can act as the director, editor and lead actor in your own mental movie. By doing so, you can
change the emotion of a mental "scene", desensitize yourself or even change a scene altogether.
Your Mental Theater

Before using any of the below techniques, imagine yourself in a large movie complex with
hundreds of theaters. You can choose to see any movie you want simply by entering the theater
of your choice. For beginners, you may want to pick a situation in which you were mildly anxious.
It could be public speaking engagement, an embarrassing moment, or any other memory or
situation that you have a negative emotional response to.
Once in the theater, seat yourself in the center so that the projected movie fills almost your entire
vision. From this seat, you can affect all aspects of the movie. If it helps, you may want to make
your way up to the projection booth when you want to add or edit something about the scene.
Adding a Soundtrack or Theme Music
Playing the movie backwards
Editing the scenes
6.7.9.2
Adding Soundtrack / Theme Music

This technique is based on a well-known NLP mind trick, good for changing your emotional and
physiological reaction to a situation. This is particularly effective because emotional reaction to
music is hard wired into nearly every human brain.
Think about some familiar movies with notable soundtracks. Star Wars, Jaws, Indiana Jones, The
Natural, etc. If you can, try to remember the soundtracks of those movies, and scenes in which the
music would play. Music can be directly associated with the emotions of every scene. Fast paced
music is always playing during the action scenes, while slow, flowing music is always playing during
the emotional scenes.
In many situations, the perspective of a movie scene can be manipulated simply by changing the
theme music, and in some cases adding sound effects. For example, take a moment to remember
a negative confrontation between two of your co-workers or friends. If the scene were made into a
movie, the theme music would probably be dramatic and anxious, right? But what if it instead of
dramatic music there was a happy, jovial theme song with a laugh track in the background.
Suddenly the scene switches from a dramatic confrontation to a situation comedy. That is the power
of music, and that is what this technique targets.
To use this technique you must be able to not only visualize a scene, but add a soundtrack to the
scene, all in your head. For some people this can take some practice. Start by thinking of a movie
which is very familiar to you. Think of the scenes and the associated musical score. Once you have
a good grasp of the format, try to go through the following steps:
Step 1
Pick the desired situation. This situation could be a painful memory, a future event, a phobia or
anything that can fit into a situational role. Picture the situation as if it were on a movie screen
and let it play out, taking note of any emotions you experience.
161
Step 2
Mentally play the movie again, but this time add a soundtrack that reflects the way you want to
react to the situation. If the situation is a tense memory, you could add a cartoon-like
soundtrack. If the situation is a confrontation with your boss, you could give it an
action/adventure soundtrack to give yourself courage and confidence. It is all about adding a
soundtrack that changes the mood of the moment, and thereby changes your reaction to it.
Step 3
Make sure your reaction to the situation is now changed. Keep replaying the scene until you are
sure.
6.7.9.3
Rewinding
Running the Movie Backwards

A great way to desensitize or neutralize the effect of a bad memory, is to replay it backwards and
toggle the movie from black and white to color. This will help you detach yourself from the scene
and reduce your negative reaction to it.
You can also use this technique to rid yourself of extreme fears and phobias, using a scene that
evokes the phobic response in you. For example, if you have an intense fear of public speaking,
you may want to use a scene of you making a presentation or giving a speech.
Step 1
Pick an unpleasant memory and project it onto your mental movie screen in color. Start playing
the movie and freeze it at a point before the character (you) starts to become fearful or anxious.
It should be at a point when your character looks safe and confident.
Step 2
Next, picture yourself as someone else, in the movie projection booth. You are objective and
desensitized to the movie (having seen it a thousand times already). Un-freeze the movie from
the projection booth, and play it to the end. Only this time, you see the movie in black and
white.
Step 3
Once the entire scene is done, move your perspective again back to your seat in the theater
and watch the movie run backward in color. Make sure it is as if the movie is being rewound. It
will happen very quickly. Rewind the movie all the way to the beginning and freeze it. It should
be frozen at a point where your character feels great, looking confident and safe.
Step 4
Rewind the movie from the end, in color, as many times as necessary to desensitize you to the
scene.
6.7.9.4
Editing Scenes
Since all the memories you have are stored in your own head, you can edit them and in some cases
erase a memory altogether. Memories are very malleable. Studies have proven the power of
suggestion can alter a memory as recent as a few minutes old.
Not only are memories easily altered, but what we remember in the first place is based on a unique
perspective. Sometimes, if you analyze a situation, change small details or switch perspective, it
completely transforms the emotion of the scene. For example, think of someone you know who
takes everything the wrong way. A playful joke could easily become an insult. When people whisper
this person always thinks he is being talked about. This person's mind is probably filled to the brim
162
with bad memories, because all of the memories are from a paranoid, overly sensitive perspective.
Change perspective, and nearly all of the bad memories could be disregarded as insignificant.
Step 1
Pick an unpleasant memory and project it onto your mental movie screen. Run through the
entire scene in black and white.
Step 2
Next, identify parts of the scene you need to change in order to form a new scene with a
positive effect. Pretend you have the latest in movie editing equipment which allows you to
change anything you want, from small details such as the lighting, body positions of the
characters, facial features or the perspective of the "camera", to larger details such as the
characters themselves. Feel free to replace any of the characters in your scene, even yourself
if need be.
Step 3
Once you have reached the last frame of your movie (now edited to your preference) change
the movie back to full color and rewind it quickly. When ready, play it all the way through again,
this time in full color with all the characters and perspectives as you want them to be.
Step 4
Keep rewinding and replaying the movie until you have successfully alerted the memory or
taken the "bite" out of it.
6.7.10 Your Mental Workshop

Once you become comfortable with visualization, you may want to consider adding some regularity
to your sessions, in the form of a "mental workshop" that you create for yourself and regularly visit.
This Workshop will become a familiar place, full of familiar faces and useful tools. The purpose of
the Workshop is to provide you with a relaxation Anchor, and to provide a safe, consistent place
where you can build confidence and security.
Creating the Perfect Workshop: Your mental workshop should be a room that is perfectly suited
and customized to you. If you can, take a moment to think of an appropriate location. If your
perfect workshop is a Japanese-style house in the middle of a Zen garden, use that. If your
perfect workshop is a palace built into the side of a mountain, use that. There are no limits,
except that you should be 100% comfortable and at peace when you think of this place.
Once you have created a location and a building, start work on the inside of the building.
Decorate it as you wish. Make sure to create a desk, a projection screen (for your
mental movies), a couch (or hammock) and a shelf full of tools for every problem.
Workshop Staff: Pick 2 or 3 people to work with you in your mental workshop. These people can
be anyone, from your role models to members of your family.
The purpose of staffing your workshop is to give you a unique perspective. Imagining a
conversation can be just as enlightening as a real conversation. Think of a dream in which you
had a conversation that resulted in an insight, or a fresh perspective. Like dreams, visualizations
can often be a gateway to the answers and solutions we seek.
163
Using the Workshop for Relaxation: Start by using the workshop as a place you regularly
imagine yourself at. Picture (and feel) yourself on the workshop couch, relaxing by the fireplace,
or by the window or anywhere else you feel at peace.
Using the Workshop to solve problems: Inside your shop you have all the tools needed to
solve any problem, and obtain any answer. You can call up any memory you like and project it
onto your own personal movie screen, or you can use one of the thousands of tools on your shelf
to solve any problem, such as healing a wound or ridding yourself of a condition. Inside your
workshop is an innumerable number of objects which can be used for any number of purposes.
See the section on Objects for more information.
Using the Workshop to confront yourself: While in the workshop, you are deep within your
own brain, and in the middle of your subconscious mind. When you talk to people in your
workshop, you are essentially talking to yourself - just a different part of yourself. You can use this
to learn more about who you are, to see yourself objectively or to confront your inner demons.
In your Workshop, imagine a door-sized panel that opens from the bottom up has a pane of
Plexiglas in front, similar to the barriers you would see used in a zoo to protect visitors. On your
desk imagine that there is a button to open the panel. Upon pushing the button the panel opens
slowly, revealing whoever your subconscious decides to show you. Do not decide who will appear
before the panel reveals it. As the panel slowly moves up, you will see the person's feet, then
legs, then torso, and so on until he or she is fully revealed. Once done, talk to the person. It may
be very interesting to hear what he or she has to say. Remember, of course, that Plexiglas
protects you and keeps you safe at all times. Also keep in mind that you are in YOUR workshop.
While there, you control everything and are completely safe.
6.8
Using Sensory Modalities

To Learn about Sensory Modalities, click here.
Using Your Primary Sensory Modality

Primary Senses have a very big place in Mind Programming as well as Hypnotism. Discovering a
client's primary sensory modality is essential in inducing a hypnotic trance and is also a very
useful tool in programming the mind of a client. For instance, if you wanted to explain a beach
scene to someone you might say "You see the waves rolling in..." if the person is primarily visual
or "You hear the waves and the wind..." if the person is primarily auditory or "You feel the sand
under you feet and smell the salty air..." if the person is primarily kinesthetic (feeling).
Visualization and Mind Programming in general is best done using your Primary Sensory
Modality. Your mind will understand the situation easier if you do, and it will take less mental
processing to do so.
Researchers have also found that people tend to get along best with other people of the same
primary sense.
Use the NLP test (off of the Tools menu) to determine what your Primary Sensory Modality
is.
164
Using Your Secondary Sensory Modality

Secondary senses have special use in Mind Programming. By trying to interpret reality using your
non-dominant senses, you may indeed see yourself and the world around you in an entirely new
way. They can be used to view situations from different perspectives, which can desensitize you
to painful memories, or help you see the other side of an argument.
Secondary senses can also be used to enhance Mind Programming. While programming with
your Primary sense is ideal, using all your senses is very much recommended.
Examples Of Sensory Modalities In Action

Visualization
Modalities In Action
You are walking confidently down the street.
165
(Visual) You see yourself, in 3rd person, walking

down the street, looking confident, head held
high, with good posture.
(Auditory) You hear the sounds around you,
hear yourself humming a confident tune.
(Kinesthetic) You have an overwhelming feeling
of confidence and feel the wind in your hair as
you walk.
You are calmly driving your car, free of rage.
(Visual) You see yourself driving a car with a

smile. The world around you is a blur of action
yet you remain calm and at peace.
(Auditory) You hear the distant sounds of
honking but remain at peace. You hear a
calming peace of music on the radio.
(Kinesthetic) You feel at calm and at peace.
You have the window cracked open and feel the
wind whizzing by.
You are weighing yourself and finding out that

you are 10 pounds lighter.
(Visual) You see yourself or you see the scale's

number. You are 10 pounds lighter.
(Auditory) You hear your friend, husband or
someone else saying "wow, look at that, you've
lost 10 pounds and you look great!"
(Kinesthetic) You also feel the scale under your
feet yet you feel 200 pounds lighter. You feel a
great sense of satisfaction and relief.
You are healing an arm injury.
(Visual) You see yourself, looking at your

completely healed arm. You see your healed
arm. You see yourself twisting and testing it,
seeming very happy to be healed.
(Auditory) You hear the doctor exclaim
"Amazing, you healed so quickly!"
(Kinesthetic) You feel the relief of a healed
injury. Your arm is in complete working order.
You feel yourself twisting and testing your arm
as you see it happen.
6.9
Real-Time Mental Programming

What is Real-Time Mental Programming?
Real-time programming uses a set of techniques to affect your mind's functioning immediately,
without the help of the Neuro-Programmer or any other mind-altering technology. Real-time
programming is not near as powerful as pre-programming (with the Neuro-Programmer) but can
166
be used at any time. In truth, you are programming your mind at this very moment, to an extent.
The difference is that using the guidelines (below) and various techniques (explained in the
Mental Techniques section) you can bypass mental filters and affect your mind directly, at the
source.
Note that Real-time programming is most effective when used in conjunction with regular
programming methods.
Real-Time Programming Guidelines
167
1) Relax (!!)
Relaxation is vitally important in all types of mental programming. A flustered, distracted mind
cannot be easily re-programmed because a mind in that condition is not receptive. Mental
programming (especially Real-Time) also takes a certain amount of internal concentration which
may not be available while "on the spot" or in a stressful situation.
When you are about to use Real-Time Programming, relax your shoulders and your legs, start
breathing deeply from your abdomen. If you have the time, relax using the relaxation guidelines.
2) Use Imagination / Visualization, Not Willpower

Willpower is meant to fail. Instead, imagine what you want to happen. After a couple weeks of
practice in Real-Time Programming, your imagination becomes part of your willpower and you
start using it automatically instead, especially after realizing how much more effective it is.
3) Realize Your Authority
Your mind directly controls every cell in your body. At any time of day your mind can tell your
body to do anything and it obeys the mind without question. Simply by realizing this authority you
can often double or triple the control you have over your body. Next time you have a dull pain
that won't go away, try closing your eyes, tilting your eyes upward, and realizing that YOU have
the power. Then softly will the pain away.
5) Pre-Program For Real-Time Situations
You can pre-program mental responses that can be activated at a later date.
Anchors and Triggers can be used for this purpose.
6) Unfocus Your Eyes
Unfocusing your eyes causes your mind to produce Alpha waves which can give you insight and
differing perspectives on recent events. Looking at the world through unfocused eyes can also
desensitize you to it. For instance, it is much easier to stare someone in the eyes when your eyes
are unfocused.
Closing your eyes and rolling them back also causes your mind to produce Alpha waves. There is
a always a big difference in wave activity between eyes open and eyes closed EEG sessions. In
fact, most EEG sessions include eyes open and eyes closed analysis because of the incredible
difference between the two. You can use this to accelerate learning or to gain insight into current
situations.
7) Use ALL the programming guidelines from other sections
Read over the Programming and Relaxation Guidelines as well as the guidelines under
Visualization and Suggestion. Most of them apply to Real-Time Programming as well.
Further Reading
168
Patterns Of The hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, M.D., Bandler and Grinder
6.10
When to use what

When to use Visualization
Visualization is essential to achieving rapid, effective mental programming. If you really want to
make an impression on your mind, accompany all suggestions and auto-suggestions with
complimentary visualizations. And of course, visualization is an integral part of most
Mental Techniques.
When to use Auto-Suggestions

Auto-suggestions should be used in alpha and should be repeated in a similar way to recorded
suggestions.
When to use the Recording feature

In Theta, the mind is at its most suggestible, but staying in Theta requires that you simply let your
mind go. Therefore, actively programming your mind in deep Theta is not really plausible, though
some say it can be done. The Neuro-Programmer provides an easier solution: simply pre-record
your suggestions, following the Suggestion Guidelines, and they will start playing when the
Neuro-Programmer has taken your mind to its most open state.
For Alpha sessions, you should normally use auto-suggestions, which can be the most powerful
form of programming when used effectively with visualization.
When to use Real-Time Programming

After some practice, it will become automatic, but Real-Time programming should be used when
you have no time to relax and use more powerful Mental Techniques or recorded suggestions.
When to use Brainwave Training Sessions

Brainwave Training sessions have specific purposes. Look them over and determine if any of
them offer something of interest to you, such as increased IQ or accelerated healing/growth.
Using these sessions as a compliment to regular sessions and mental techniques is the most
comprehensive way to program your mind.
When to use your Sensory Modalities

When doing Alpha or Real-Time Programming, using Mental Techniques, you should try to
use your sensory modalities. Remember, the more you use, the more effective and memorable
169
your mental programming will be.
When to use Theta and when to use Alpha Sessions

Theta programming is very powerful but limited in the complexity of programming you can use. In
Theta, letting the recording do most of the work is usually best, otherwise you will accidentally
take your mind back up to Alpha or Beta, where programming is less effective. However, there
are special situations where Theta is a good (and sometimes the only) option:
1) For physical or genetic re-programming (such as for skin conditions and body building).
2) For sleep reduction (A half-hour Theta session can replace up to 4 hours of sleep)
3) For very deep emotional or physical problems (in combination with Alpha)
4) For accelerated healing (in combination with visualization at Alpha)
5) For accelerated learning (in combination with Alpha)
6) For programming Anchors and Triggers (in combination with Alpha, or at the divide between
Alpha and Theta)
7) Habit re-programming (in combination with Alpha)
Alpha programming is great for more complex problems and for using the wide variety of very
powerful techniques provided in this documentation.
Alpha, combined with these techniques, can be more powerful than even Theta suggestions, but
only after some practice. In Alpha, your mind still has some resistance to mental programming. It
may take a little bit of practice to stop your mind from sabotaging your programming.
Alpha has these special uses:
1) Instant Mental Programs (programs meant to be executed almost immediately after
programming them, such as making yourself wide awake, or preparing yourself for a speech or
other type of performance)
2) Problem solving
3) Accelerated learning
4) Habit control and re-programming (getting rid of urges)
5) Event Programming
6.11
Executing A Mental Program

The execution time and effectiveness of a new mental program is directly affected by the following
variables:
1) Confidence - Confidence in this technology is essential. It is recommended to do a few tests
of the Neuro-Programmer before programming something essential.
2) Relaxation - The more you relax, the closer your mind will be to the state in which you new
mental program was "coded" in (during the session), making the memory of the new behavior
easier to access.
3) Expectation/Conflict - If you are a hardcore skeptic or are very religious, the NeuroProgrammer may conflict with your values and beliefs. This will obviously hurt your mental
programming success because you expect AND want it to fail. Expectation combined with desire
is a force that no therapeutic system can tackle.
Here are some tips to help you when you execute new mental programs.
170
1) Pre-Execution Relaxation and why it is important

If you realize that a program is about to execute, it is highly recommended that you use the
techniques explained in the Relaxation Guide to help you get to a state where your mind is more
likely to use the new program over an old one. Keep in mind that experienced users of the NeuroProgrammer have no such problems because their minds have learned to trust new programs
faster and they may also have learned to relax more in pressured situations, where mental fitness
must be at its peak.
2) Beginners: Give it a minute
Just assume that your mental program worked or will start working shortly. The last thing you
want to do is ask yourself if it did work. Give it a minute, it will take effect. The best programming
experiences happen when you are completely unaware of their execution until after they have
already done their job. Then you can exclaim "wow, that really worked!" which will build
confidence and expectation.
3) Act As If
Don't question if you're doing right, just play the role of someone whose mind has been
programmed correctly. Be happy that your new program is working for you. Expect it to work, Act
as if it working.
If you expect and act as if your mental program is going to work for you, it will encourage the new
behavior and help build confidence in the technology.
Top Level Intro

Part
VII
172
Academic Strategies for Students

Introduction
There are a huge number of ways to use NP2 to enhance your Academic performance by leaps
and bounds. Not only can mental programming help increase you confidence and rid you of
limiting beliefs, but entrainment itself has been proven to enhance concentration, memory,
mental speed and general IQ. Brainwave Entrainment is starting to be used more and more in
schools across the country, and the results have been nothing short of extraordinary.
Brainwave Training
The first step to improving your academic performance is to start regularly using the many
sessions under the "Brainwave Training" tab. A large number of them are meant for this specific
purpose. Here are a few:
[Study Helper] Concentration, Focus & Memory - Great for general studying, reading, or
when you are engaged in activities which can benefit from increased concentration. Gives you a
"laser-like" focus, while improving your memory and mental speed. It also has many permanent
effects (like all the Brainwave Training sessions). The more you use it, the less you need it!
[Study Helper] Learning / Complex Tasks / Frustration Reduction - Better for complex
tasks (like higher mathematics) and reducing frustration.
[ADD/ADHD] Adult ADD / Learning / Hyperactivity Reduction - If you have adult ADD, this
is the session for you. ADD reduction is one of the most well tested uses of entrainment to date.
[ADD/ADHD] Performance Anxiety / Hyperactivity Help - If you have ADD and performance
anxiety, try this session, based on a very well tested protocol that is popular in the industry.
Beta Session - This is a general Beta session. Increasing Beta waves helps improve numerous
cognitive functions. This session is very similar to the IQ Increase and Study Helper sessions,
though is more generalized. This session will also help with Depression and SAD (Seasonal
Affective Disorder).
SMR Session - SMR a special band of brainwaves emitted from the sensory motor cortex of
the brain. People who lack daily physical activity (most students do) will have a chronic lack of
SMR activity. If you find you have trouble focusing or getting a good night's rest, SMR
stimulation may be just what you need.
IQ / Intelligence Increase [Simple] - This is a simple Beta session focusing on improving
cognitive functioning. It is short and easy to use on a daily basis. The results of using this
session (or better yet, the longer IQ session) will be absolutely tremendous. Use it for a week
and gauge the results.
IQ / Intelligence Increase [Comprehensive] - Similar to the short IQ session, this session
focuses on IQ enhancement. This session is longer, so it has more time to focus on both SMR
and Beta frequencies. It is generally more comprehensive. Use this session if you have time.
Pre-Test Performance Anxiety Reduction - This is a great session to use before a test,
especially if you regularly experience performance anxiety. This session will not only relax you,
but help focus your mind and build confidence.
Academic Strategies for Students
173
Additionally, there are a number of sessions which may also be of great use
during your stay in Academia:
Creativity / Brainstorm Session - You can use this session to help think up ideas for creative
writing and other classes. Do not use this session if you think you have ADD.
Energy / Motivation Session
Headache / Migraine Relief
Anxiety Relief
Stress Relief
Wake Up Session - Acting as a replacement to caffeine, use this session any time you need a
mental state similar to what you would get after a few cups of strong coffee.
Strategy for the Super Learning Tool (SLT)

The Super Learning Tool is every student's second best friend (second to the Study Helper
sessions, of course). Using this tool you can memorize huge amounts of information in a very
short period of time. The below strategy is the best way to use the SLT for maximum benefit.
Step 1: Study the information you wish to learn, and take notes along the way. The more
detailed the notes the better.
Step 2: Record your notes to a recording using the Text-ToSpeech or microphone recording features in NP2. You can also use other applications to
record your notes, and then import the resulting recording into NP2.
Step 3: Use the SLT with your recorded notes. The notes will act as an anchor for the material
you learned in depth. Using the SLT will also help commit the information directly to long term
memory. Studies have proven that long term memory is committed during periods of rest, such
as sleep. Using the SLT right after studying and taking notes will greatly increase your retention,
and will commit all of your notes directly to long term memory.
You can also use the SLT to memorize recorded lectures given by your professors. Simply
transfer the recording to the computer and import it into the SLT. This is a very popular way to
use the SLT.
Mental Programming Strategies

NOTE: If you believe you have ADD or experience similar symptoms, we recommend that you
use Alpha sessions instead of Theta. Theta sessions are more or less the opposite of Beta
sessions which is what many of the Brainwave Training sessions are (mentioned above). Wait
until you have accomplished your goals of increasing focus and mental speed before using Theta
sessions. If you simply want to increase memory retention, Theta sessions will be fine for you.
Anchors
Anchors are incredibly useful tools for everyone, particularly students. Remember, if you have
174
ever experienced a mental state, you can recreate it using an Anchor. This means that at any
time you can access a state of confidence, relaxation, focus, courage or any number of other
mental states
One popular anchor is to touch your thumb to two fingers using your non-dominant hand. This is
particularly useful when you are giving presentations, speeches or engaging in a debate. In
those situations you probably won't have a chance to use a visual or auditory anchor. A
kinesthetic anchor is therefore your best choice. You could use this to trigger a state of relaxed
confidence, aggressive wit or any other useful state.
See the section on Anchors for information on how to create them. You may even want to use
Modeling (below) to help create the appropriate Anchors.
Modeling & Your Academic "Role"

Many students struggle with Academia simply because they have not yet developed their
mental "Role" as a student. For example, you may find it hard to stay inside and study on a
beautiful day when the sun is shining, or when one of your favorite shows is on. What you need
is to switch Roles. In this case you would be switching from a care-free young adult to an ardent
student, ambitious and driven by a need to learn.
To develop the appropriate Role, you need to Model someone who has developed an academic
role. No doubt you know at least one person who studies frequently, who loves learning and
always makes the grade. Use the modeling techniques explained here to expand the Roles
available to you. And while you're at it, set up some Anchors.
For more information on modeling, click here.
Event Programming
Event Programming is a powerful way to get your subconscious working in the background on
tasks you wish to accomplish. In this case, you want to get your mind working on giving you the
grades and motivation you need.
Start by visualizing future events as you want them to be. For example, you could visualize
yourself taking a test. See yourself looking confident and relaxed, easily making your way
through the test questions as if you made the test yourself or have a secret cheat sheet nobody
else knew about. Next, visualize yourself looking at the test after it has been graded. See your
score as an A+, 100% (or near it). Feel how great it will feel when that happens. Believe it will
happen and is happening. Cause yourself to KNOW it will happen.
Remember, the subconscious mind acts on what you believe to be true. Imagination and belief
are very closely related mechanisms of the brain, so as you visualize it your subconscious will
instantly start to act on it. Have you ever heard of a self-fulfilling prophecy? That is what you
making by using this technique. Your prophecy is to become motivated and to raise the curve
on everyone else!
Top Level Intro

Part
VIII
176

Introduction
Brainwave stimulation and psychological techniques have been used for decades by coaches and
athletes with startling success. Not only can brainwave entrainment help you enter the "zone",
accelerate growth, promote needed energy and help you sleep better, but using visualization and
other self-programming methods you can better prepare yourself psychologically, and get your
subconscious working FOR you, not against you. Instead of being nervous, tense and full of
anxiety during an athletic event, you can be fully confident and relaxed.
Brainwave Training
Athletic Performance / Sports Enhancement - This is a special session to familiarize you
with the "zone" state. It starts by relaxing you deeply, and then ramps to Beta while the
relaxation is carried over. The end result is a state of relaxed alertness, where Alpha and Beta
waves blend to form a perfect state for athletic performance. This session is best used with
visualization techniques, Anchoring and Audio Cues (Triggers).
Alpha / Theta Sessions (under Programming) and Stress Relief - If you are an Athlete, It is
vitally important that you learn to relax. Tense muscles take much more energy to use. If you
are relaxed and loose, you will last longer and move and respond effortlessly to any situation.
Accelerated Growth / Healing (hGH Release) - This session will help you build muscle and
recover from injuries by stimulating HGH release.
Energy / Motivation Session - If you are feeling fatigued and need a drug-free "pick me up",
try this session.
Insomnia and Sleep Induction Sessions - Sleep is incredibly important for athletes,
especially the night before an athletic event. Most athletes will have trouble sleeping before a
big event, so if you get a deep, healthy, full night's rest you will likely have an advantage over
the competition from the beginning.
Wake Up Session - Use this session to help jump start a day of intense training.
Mental Programming Strategies

NOTE: You can use these strategies with Alpha or Theta sessions, but you may want to try using
them with the Athletic Performance / Sports Enhancement session instead. It will relax you
enough for mental programming to be effective, and will also help Anchor the incredibly important
"zone" state.
If you use Recorded suggestions, consider using them with the Accelerated Growth / Healing
session.
Visualization - The true key to Athletic Performance

The Importance of Visualization
Active visualization is beyond important for Athletes. Whether knowingly or not, we have all
177
experienced the power of visualization in regard to performance. You have probably had the
experience of spending a few hours in front of the TV, watching a game, event or movie about
your favorite sport, and afterwards playing the game only to find yourself playing drastically
better, in the zone, just like the pros you saw while watching TV. You may have had a similar
experience while watching an action/adventure film. After watching an action movie many
people feel like they can take on the world, and win!
So why does "seeing" peak athletic performance lead to improved athletic performance?
Because of what is called "neuromuscular programming. According to psychologist Richard
Suinn, who has done some very important work in regards to mental imagery, says "What
visualization does is program the muscles. Every time you do it, you're setting up a kind of
computer program. When you get to the competition, all you have to do is press the start button
and your body takes over--you're along for the ride."
Visualization is important not only because it helps train muscles, but because it acts to
counteract all the negative visualization that athletes and performers usually put themselves
through. When many athletes are about to compete, all they think about is what could go wrong
- in other words they visualize a negative outcome of the competition, thus inadvertently
programming themselves to fail!
How to Visualize
To visualize, use an Alpha session (or the Athletic Performance / Sports Enhancement
session). This will increase both your receptivity and your ability to visualize. When we watch
movies or are glued to the television we are commonly in a high alpha, low beta state, which
lends itself to the above mentioned "zone" we feel afterwards. An NP2 Alpha session is
significantly more powerful, focused and long lasting.
Some people have trouble visualizing. This is normal. You have to realize that visualization is
not actually "seeing" anything. Instead, it is using your mind's eye. When you think of anything
visual - when you day dream - when you think of your significant other's face - you are
visualizing. Use that same power to help with your sports performance.
Look at the Visualization Guide for more information.
What to Visualize
Always visualize yourself performing perfectly. If you visualize an entire event, picture yourself
doing everything the way you expect a seasoned pro, perhaps one of your role models, would
do it.
In your visualization, you are always relaxed and confident. Before the event you are calm, your
muscles are loose so moving them is effortless. While performing you are confident - you even
make it look easy. You ALWAYS perform perfectly and effortlessly.
In this way you will program your muscles to perform perfectly, so during the event your mind is
on winning, not on fighting your own body.
Tips
To help with the visualization process, many coaches will film their students practicing and then
splice the entire performance into an example of the "perfect" game. If you are not already
filming yourself while practicing, start immediately. You may also want to tape the perfect
games of the pros in your field and watch those as if you ARE the pro (like modeling, below).
Using Audio Cues, or Triggers

178
A very effective trick developed and used extensively by coaches around the world is to relax
while listening to audio cues similar to what you would hear during an competition or game. For
example, if you are a tennis player, you may want to record the hum of the crowd and the
sound of the ball hitting the court. The more environmental sounds you can pick up the better.
By relaxing regularly while listening to these sounds, your mind will develop a relaxation Trigger
associated with the ambient sounds you will most likely hear while competing. As soon as you
hear these sounds, your mind and body will return to the state, decreasing any muscle tension
and anxiety that could hurt your performance.
You can take this a step farther by using the Athletic Performance / Sports Enhancement
session, which will help you Trigger the "Zone" state, while listening to the recorded sounds .
How to implement Audio Cues
To implement audio cues use the Scripting features. Scripts act like hypnosis scripts, and play
the entire session, though you can easily specify where in the session you want your audio cues
to play.
Anchors
Anchors are incredibly useful tools for everyone, and can very useful for athletes. Remember,
if you have ever experienced a mental state, you can recreate it using an Anchor. This means
that at any time you can access a state of confidence, relaxation, focus, the "Zone" or any
number of other mental states
One popular anchor is to touch your thumb to two fingers using your non-dominant hand. If your
sport does not require use of both hands, you could use this type of anchor very easily. It is
advisable to use it just before competing. Let the Audio Triggers (above) work for you while
actually competing, so you don't have to keep your mind on maintaining the Anchor.
See the section on Anchors for information on how to create them. You may even want to use
Modeling (below) to help create the appropriate Anchors.
Modeling
As mentioned in the section on Visualization (above), watching TV or a movie about your sport
can vastly enhance performance. You can take this a step further by assuming the "Role" of
your role model or a big name in your sport. Once inside the role, you can Anchor the state and
familiarize yourself with the state of supreme confidence and relaxation only experienced by
winners.
See the section on Modeling for more information.
Top Level Intro

Part
IX
180
Example Protocols
9.1
Introduction
This section includes a number of example protocols.
What is a Protocol?
A protocol is essentially a regimen that you make for yourself in order to solve a specific problem.
It usually includes a number of suggestions, visualizations and sessions used.
Examples:
Energy / Motivation
Overcoming Shyness
Healing
Public Speaking
Stop Nail Biting
Stop Smoking
Weight Loss / Muscle Gain
Getting Over Your Ex
9.2
Energy / Motivation
Note: This is just an example. This is not a common protocol nor a recommended one. It is simply
one that you may try or take example from. To be successful at mind programming you must
experiment and judge what works best for you based on results. If what you are trying is not
working, use something else.
Protocol Basis:
Lack of Energy/Motivation is a problem for most people, though its causes are often unique to
each individual. For some people it could be an underlying anxiety or depression problem. For
others it could be a lack of sleep, perhaps caused by insomnia. For others it could be a
environmental difference that built itself into a strong Mental Program over time (maybe your
parents weren't very energetic or motivated?). It could also be caused by the natural aging
process or lack of control over body energy (levels of arousal).
For this protocol we're going to attack the problem superficially, and try to increase
Energy/Motivation without looking at the underlying problems. It's up to you, the user, to find any
deeper solutions. Once you do that, however, the Neuro-Programmer will prove to be a great
ally in tackling those issues as well.
Protocol:
Example Protocols
181
Sessions Used:
For Programming: Alpha Sessions of your choice, or recommended by the Wizard. Possibly
Theta sessions as well. For some people, Theta is a great way to increase energy throughout
the day. But it can also have the opposite effect. Remember that Theta is like sleep. Not
enough and too much can both make you tired during the day, so you just have to experiment
to find out how much is OK for you.
Brainwave Training: Energy / Motivation sessions. Possibly Beta, SMR, Depression and SAD
sessions as well
Mental Techniques & Suggestions Used

Possible Suggestions:
"You are energetic and motivated. You start new projects with ease."
"You are brimming with energy."
Possible Auto-Suggestions:
"I am energetic and motivated. I feel a surge of energy every time I think about it."
"I am overflowing with energy."
Possible Visualizations:
Visualize yourself working on projects, smiling and happy. See yourself bouncing off the walls
with Energy.
Possible Mental Techniques:

Use the Inhale Energy / Exhale Smoke technique. Use this technique to build up energy while
exhaling the negative emotions (or "toxins") from your body.
Use Anchors / Triggers. Create an Anchor when you are feeling very energetic and
motivated. Use this anchor to recall to that state whenever necessary, throughout the day..
Post Programming
Keep telling yourself that you are energetic and that you want more energy.
9.3
Overcoming Shyness
182
Protocol Basis:
Shyness is a complex problem that has strong mental defenses. Many shy people have lived their
entire lives in social anxiety. This is a very hard wall to break.
The good news is that the Neuro-Programmer can do it!
Shyness is built around a lack of confidence and an overabundance of inhibitions. Both of these
problems must be taken care of before the treatment can truly be called successful.
Protocol:
Sessions Used:
For Programming: Alpha & Theta Sessions of your choice, or recommended by the Wizard
Brainwave Training: Possibly Depression, Anxiety or Energy/Motivation sessions.

"You are confident and assertive. You enjoy people and they enjoy you."
"You are a social person. You love talking. As other people talk you are waiting for your turn
to reply."
"I am social and talkative. I smile and make conversation with everyone I like."
"I am comfortable in social situations."
See yourself in a crowd of people, feeling confident. See yourself being talked to and
interacting with others without having to think about what to say. Don't bother making up a
mental conversation with other people. This is important because shy people often have such
low self-esteem that even a conversation in their mind will go awry and end up embarrassing.
So, make sure to just see yourself talking, laughing and being happy around other people.
See other people enjoying your presence. This may seem hard at first, but keep at it. Keep
imagining yourself with people, comfortable and confident.

Use an Adapted Swish technique. Unpleasant frame contains you talking with strangers.
Pleasant frame contains something you are already very comfortable with, maybe a group of
friends that you already know and love.
Example Protocols
183
Use Anchors / Triggers. Create an Anchor when you are completely comfortable, feeling
loved and nonchalant. After doing this you will have access to this state any time during the
day, whether in a group of people or not.
Create a Trigger surrounding groups of people or particular people. Make the Trigger induce
a feeling of ease, relaxation and confidence.
Use Scene Editing. Play past and future situations out in your mind. If you made a social
mistake today, or simply didn't talk to anyone, play parts of the day back in your head and
change them like a director of a movie. Remember that you are in control, so make yourself
as social as you want to be. Everyone smiles as they see you and everyone enjoys hearing
you speak.
Use Event Programming. Picture tomorrow in your mind. Picture yourself interacting with
other people and picture them enjoying your presence. If you have trouble talking to one
person in particular, use Event Programming to map out a conversation with that person.
Please remember not to use programming time to figure out what you are going to say to
people. It should be natural; conversation should flow naturally, like it does with friends and
family. In Event Programming, simply see yourself interacting.
Use Attraction. Picture yourself having a conversation with someone. Morph this scene into
something you are already very comfortable with.
Post Programming
Real-Time Programming is absolutely essential to this protocol. You must learn to relax. Don't
do anything you are not comfortable with. Let your subconscious do all the work for you. The
only thing you need to do is keep a positive mental attitude and learn to be very relaxed. When
you feel like talking, do it. Don't be discouraged by any failures. Try to learn from your failures.
Ask yourself "why did that not work." and use this information in future programming situations.
9.4
Healing
Protocol Basis:
It is common knowledge that the body heals itself during sleep. Experienced medical practitioners
will confirm that healing can easily be accelerated by longer sleep cycles. It is therefore easy to
see why Alpha/Theta training is so good at accelerating healing. In addition to this, it helps in pain
control. Endorphins are released into the bloodstream. In Theta, pain can be almost completely
numbed.
It is also a well known fact that those with the will to recover often do, while those without often
don't, or take significantly longer. This holds true even when the subject is paralyzed and there is
no other course for the patient other than mental action or inaction.
This shows the incredible power the subconscious has over the body's healing and immune
systems. Mind Programming can focus subconscious efforts on healing, accelerating the process
and decreasing the pain involved.
184
Protocol:
Sessions Used:
Brainwave Training: Accelerated Healing / Growth Sessions

"You are healing very quickly" - Visualize this coming from a doctor in a white coat.
"You are healing. Your body is accelerating the healing process."
"Every cell in your body is acting to repair and heal you"
"I am healing. I am healthy. My body is balanced and I feel great!"
"I have the will to heal and recover. My purpose is to become better and better with every
passing day"
Visualize yourself completely healed. Keep that image in your mind and make it more and
more vivid until your mind believes it.

Use objects and symbols. If you have a disease, you may want to imagine sharks swimming
through your bloodstream eating bacteria. If you have
Use an Adapted Swish technique. Put your wounded, sick self in the unpleasant frame and
your healed, happy self in the pleasant frame.
Post Programming
Be consistent. Don't tell yourself or others that you are sick, even if you are joking. Say instead
"I am getting better!" or "I'll be all better soon!".
9.5
Public Speaking
Example Protocols
185
Protocol Basis:
Public speaking has been consistently rated as one of the top fears in the world, along with dying,
heights and spiders.
The good news is that Mind Programming is incredibly effective at curing it. In fact there are
many commonly used techniques that you have no doubt heard of; picturing the audience naked,
picturing the audience wearing chicken costumes, picturing yourself after the speech is over, etc.
These techniques are great and work for some people, but they are not near as powerful as true
Mind Programming. With Mind Programming you can completely eliminate the fear of public
speaking, or you can program for a specific engagement and focus your entire subconscious on
making you relaxed and affluent.
Protocol:
Sessions Used:
Brainwave Training: None

"You are completely at ease in front of other people."
"You speak like you have had years of public speaking experience."
"I am completely at ease in front of an audience. Words come easily to me."
Visualize yourself in front of a crowd. Feel the excitement but also the relaxation. See
yourself speaking. Zoom through the crowd of impressed audience members. The more vivid
you make this visualization, the better the effect.

Use Modeling. Model someone you have seen speak in front of a crowd before. Step into that
person while visualizing your speech, and play the situation out a number of ways, performing
perfectly every time.
Use the Swish technique. Put yourself speaking (in front of an audience) in the unpleasant
186
frame. Make it as realistic and vivid as possible. In the pleasant frame place something very
relaxing, perhaps an interaction with a friend or family member, where you have no trouble
being affluent and relaxed.
Post Programming
Be consistent. Don't tell yourself or others that you are horrible at public speaking. Tell others
that you will do your best and tell yourself that you are the best public speaker on earth.
9.6
Stop Nail Biting

Protocol Basis:
Nail biting is a great example for Mind Programming beginners because it is a problem that is
particularly hard to figure out a protocol for.
Take a moment to try and think of a suggestion to use for Nail Biting. Remember, you can't use
negatives and you shouldn't bring up biting nails at all, since biting is the problem, not the
solution. You can't say "I have stopped biting my nails," because that is a negative AND it
mentions biting nails. So take a moment to try and think of ways to program it.
Now scroll down to see an example of how you could solve Nail Biting using Mind Programming.
Protocol:
Sessions Used:
Brainwave Training: Possibly Stress or Anxiety Relief

"Your nails are long and healthy. When you are nervous, you only need to chew gum to feel
relaxed."
"My nails are long and healthy. Every time my arm raises it will lower to my side."
Example Protocols
187
Visualize your nails as long as healthy looking, with no bite marks whatsoever.

Mental Techniques are particularly effective for this problem.
Use Aversion. First, imagine the taste of your nails and visualize yourself biting them. Next
taste something else in your mouth, like moldy cheese or curdled milk. Smell it and taste it.
Feel the nausea intensely but still taste the nails. In this way, biting nails becomes associated
with nausea. Problem solved!
Create a Trigger that will fire when your hand reaches to your mouth. At that time, the trigger
should put your hand back down by your side.
Post Programming
The first few days you should be relaxed. If you catch yourself biting your nails, don't be
discouraged, just stop and move on. Soon you will notice that you are doing it less and less until
one day you will realize that you haven't bitten them all day. Soon after that, your nails will look
exactly as you visualize them: strong, long and healthy.
9.7
Stop Smoking
Protocol Basis:
Smoking is a widespread problem because of the addictive nature of cigarettes and the chemicals
contained in them. Smoking is also a habit and an essential part of the routine and social
structure for many people.
Because of these reasons it is very hard for most people to quit smoking.
Using the Neuro-Programmer you can program your mind to resist the cravings. In addition to
that, you can use the Anti-Addictive Brainwave Training session, which helps those with addictive
personalities (most frequent smokers have addictive personalities).
One thing to note would be that Mind Programming can quell your cravings and your addictive
personality traits, but it can't keep other people from pressuring you to smoke, nor can it keep
people from smoking around you. Social situations quickly become the largest obstacle to
complete recovery from smoking addiction. You just have to keep at it, keep programming, and
eventually the programming will far stronger than any environmental factors.
Protocol:
188
Sessions Used:
Brainwave Training: Addiction session and possibly Anxiety and Depression sessions as well.

"You love your new, healthy lungs! To feel relaxed, you only need to think of relaxation."
"I love feeling healthy and having healthy lungs. I am relaxed, calm and free."
Visualize yourself at your usual smoking spots, only this time you are happy, healthy and
without a cigarette in your hands.
Visualize your lungs, as if your skin is transparent. See them as pink and healthy.

Use Aversion. Picture a cigarette. Put it in your mouth, taste the smoke and the cigarette the
way it is normally. Now picture the cigarette morphing into moldy cottage cheese in your
mouth. Make sure to note the time in mid-morph, where you can taste both the cigarette, the
tobacco, the smoke and the moldy cottage cheese. The cigarette must be associated with the
unpleasantness of the cottage cheese. You might actually want to pick something unpleasant
that you are more familiar with, such as curdled milk or a food you hate.
Use Anchors / Triggers. Create an Anchor just after having a cigarette. Feel the relaxation.
After doing this you can return to that state any time you wish, without the assistance of a
cigarette.
Create a Trigger that will fire when your hand reaches for a cigarette. Make the Trigger keep
your hand from reaching the cigarettes, perhaps pulling out a piece of gum (not the nicotinefilled kind).
Post Programming
Be consistent. Don't tell yourself or others that you want a cigarette or even that you are quitting
smoking. Simply say "I'm enjoying healthier lungs." or "I'm going to stay healthy for a while."
Bringing up smoking itself will only work to remind your brain of it, which can cause a craving.
Example Protocols
9.8
189
Weight Loss / Muscle Gain

Protocol Basis:
What are you doing when you exercise? Most people will say "burning fat" or "building muscle."
For building muscle, what you are really doing is causing your mind to believe that you need more
muscle. The only reason a body is instructed to build muscle (by the brain) is if the brain thinks
you need it. From an evolutionary standpoint, this would mean you need muscle for hunting,
chopping wood, running long distances, defending your cave. The thought process is like this:
"We seem to be using our muscles a lot lately. In fact we seem to be pushed to our limits. Maybe
we should tell the body to bulk up so it won't be such a strain from now on and we can focus on
more important things like reproduction."
Why not skip the middle man? You can simply visualize and feel yourself exercising, while
keeping the mental picture of yourself (slimmer, more muscular) in your mind. Of course, actual
exercise will probably work faster, however if you put both of them together you will achieve
fantastic results. You would be surprised by how many athletes use mind technology as a
supplement to steroids.
There are also numerous Brainwave Training sessions dedicated to increasing HGH (Human
Growth Hormone) which is great for healing and body building.
For burning fat, it is the opposite. With your current Mental Program, your mind will almost never
intentionally shed weight. From an evolutionary standpoint, fat is an advantage. This is why it is
so hard to burn fat. In order to even start burning fat you have to work out for 20 minutes to use
up the stored sugar in your muscles.
But the Neuro-Programmer can help! Using Mind Programming you can eliminate hunger
cravings as well as program yourself to only want healthy food. Further, by mentally picturing
yourself at the weight you want, parts of your mind will slowly start working in that direction,
helping you shed weight and increasing your metabolism accordingly. There is even a lot of
anecdotal evidence to support the idea that you can use Visualization and Suggestion to burn fat
without dieting or even exercising!
Note that we recommend using the following program in conjunction with traditional dieting and
body building methods.
Protocol:
Sessions Used:
Brainwave Training: Accelerated Growth & Healing Sessions (HGH)
190
"You are fit and feeling great. You are thin and in shape."
"You are quickly getting thinner." or "You are rapidly building muscle."
"I am thin and in shape"
"I love exercising. Every morning I feel the need to work out."
"I am getting thinner every day." or "I am getting more muscular every day."
Visualize looking down at the scale and seeing a reasonable weight for your incremental
goals. Perhaps drop 10 - 20 pounds for every goal. Adapt goals according to results. Never
set unreachable goals. Your goals should always be within what YOU believe to be possible,
otherwise you will have a difficult time fooling your mind into doing as you tell it.

Use an Adapted Swish technique. Unpleasant frame contains you as you are now. See
yourself as looking into a mirror. Pleasant frame contains you as you want to be in the future:
thin, healthy, in shape.
Use Text & Symbols. Picture your favorite unhealthy food on a table. Draw a big red "NO"
over it as if the visualization was a photo. Now picture greens and other healthy food on a
different table, circle it with gold and green sparkling paint. Also paint a big "YES!" over it in
yellow.
Use Anchors / Triggers. Create an Anchor when you have a completely full stomach. Use this
anchor when you are feeling hungry. This will help temper the hunger and perhaps eliminate
it altogether.
Create a number of Triggers having to do with your habits. Make a Trigger for the fridge
perhaps, or the dining room.
Use Aversion. Picture your favorite unhealthy foods individually. For example, take a
hamburger. Make the hamburger morph into something disgusting, like a wet, stinking
cigarette butt.
Post Programming
Every day, throughout the day, you must be consistent. Don't complain about being out of
shape, even if you are just joking. Don't think about it. Keep the image of yourself as you want
to be.
Example Protocols
9.9
191
Getting Over Your Ex

Protocol Basis:
Getting over someone is quite easy and is a great relief after it is over. One thing you have to
make sure of is that you want to get over this person. Mind Programming effectiveness is vastly
reduced because of mental conflicts. In fact, it is probably the single most common problem that
beginners encounter. You must learn to judge yourself and your true desires.
Protocol:
Sessions Used:
Brainwave Training: Possibly the Depression Reduction sessions.

"You know this is just the beginning for you. You have a happy life ahead. :You are loved"
"You love yourself and love being with yourself. You are free and happier than ever."
"I love myself and love being with myself. I am free. I am happier than ever!" Make sure to be
enthusiastic.
Picture yourself alone and incredibly happy, much happier than you were with the person.
Alternatively, you could picture yourself with a nameless someone else, much happier than
you were.

Use an Adapted Swish technique. Put the person in the unpleasant frame, but make him or
her as you remember them, perhaps in a memory that you recall a lot during the day: the
memory that makes you long for this person the most. Now, in the pleasant frame, put
something unpleasant, like a high school bully or something you could go the rest of your life
without ever seeing again. Maybe even a stranger on the street.
192
Objectify your emotion. Embody your emotion in an object, such as kite. Make sure to feel the
emotion as you merge it with the kite. Now let the kite go. Feel the instant release of emotion.
Feel relieved. Watch it float into the distance until it can no longer be seen.
Post Programming
Every time a memory or longing pops up, use an Anchor or use an affirmation until the memory
goes away (affirmation such as "I am happy!")
Top Level Intro

Part
194
10
Your Brain System
10.1
Brain System Maintenance

Here are some tips to keep your mental Operating System healthy and up to
date.
Your Brain System
195
1) Change of thought patterns

Most people talk to themselves regularly. Many even do it aloud when alone. Unfortunately, most
people don't consider their subconscious when engaging in self-talk. Often, people blurt out
horrible things about themselves especially when embarrassing or painful memories pop up.
Phrases like "I was so stupid" or even worse "God, I am such an idiot." If these phrases are
repeated enough, they will eventually get a reaction from your subconscious, and it will not be a
good one.
However, you can use self-talk to your advantage. For some reason, people feel the need to blurt
out insults to themselves when painful memories arise, but the trick is to remember to never,
under any circumstances, finish a negative thought or sentence. People can usually catch
themselves in the middle of a negative phrase and find a way to reshape it, or simply start over.
For example, say a memory of an embarrassing school memory comes up and you are about to
say, "Man, I'm such a klutz." but you catch yourself, saying "Man, I'm such a-- cool person"
You can use this to integrate your goals into your speech patterns. Instead of habitually calling
yourself an idiot or a klutz, you could call yourself intelligent in order to increase your intelligence,
if that is your goal. Or you could call yourself thin if your goal is to lose weight. So for this
example you would catch yourself and say "man, I'm such a-- thin person."
You will be surprised how automatic it is after a while. Soon, every embarrassing and painful
thought will conjure up the image of you as you want yourself to be. A very powerful and healthy
method indeed.
Similarly, it is essential to Mind Programming that you keep your pre-programming consistent
with your Real-Time Programming. If you program for health, you should not talk about how sick
you are. Remember that the more you believe, the more it works. Even if you are just joking
around, your mind takes things literally. Do not contradict your new mental programs.
2) Meditation
Meditation is the best thing you could possibly do for yourself, but there is plenty of online
information about it, so we won't go into it here. When using the Neuro-Programmer you are
pretty much meditating as it is anyway, by decreasing your brainwaves to the Alpha and Theta
states. However, purposefully meditating, that is, for the sake of meditation alone, is extremely
healthy and acts as a great tune up for your brain system. It also allows you to explore your
subconscious and have fun with mental imagery. Some people create entire worlds for
themselves, complete with houses and landscapes; all within their own minds
3) Always give your sleeping mind something to work on
No sense wasting your subconscious power on daily worries and problems. Why is it that people
always think of problems as they nod off to sleep? That can't be healthy. For one, it probably
keeps them awake. For another, it helps manifest those worries. Your subconscious has no idea
that you don't want these things to come true. It only knows that you are thinking about them.
When you are nodding off to sleep, use suggestion and visualization to express goals to your
subconscious. As you are sleeping, your mind will act on those goals and build synapses to
support them. When you wake up, who knows, you may no longer want a cigarette or you may
feel more energetic than you've felt for years.
4) Build up a collection of Anchors
Build up a large collection of Anchors for various mental states. These will help you relax
whenever you desire, among many other things, such as accelerated learning and heightened
creativity. Any mental state you have ever experienced can be anchored. Think of your happiest,
proudest moment. That moment can be anchored and returned to at any time. Building a large
196
10.2
Brain Nutrients
Here are some nutrients to help keep your mind and body at the top of their
game.
Although Neuro-Programmer and its affiliated products contribute to wellness, they are not intended
as a replacement for medical or psychological treatment. No medical claims are intended express
or implied. Statements made in the application or related documentation have not been evaluated
or approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration.
Germanium sesquioxide (also known as Ge-132): Germanium is a mineral found in many
natural healing foods and herbs like ginseng, garlic, aloe, comfrey, and others. It is both a natural
pain killer that releases endorphins, and it is a powerful enhancer of the whole immune system. It
is also shown to have antioxidant effects.
Glutathione: Glutathione is a common substance in the body that decreases with age. It
enhances brain activity by increasing the flow of blood and oxygen to the cells. Additionally, it has
been shown to protect cells from free radicals and toxins and helps protect the liver.
Ginseng: Ginseng has been used for centuries to boost energy, sharpen the mind, reduce stress,
treat impotence, extend life, enhance the immune system, control blood pressure, regulate blood
sugar levels, and strengthen the cardiovascular system.
Dimethylglycine (DMG): DMG increases the transport of oxygen from the blood to the brain.
Furthermore, it helps improve oxygen consumption and reduces the buildup of lactic acid which
causes fatigue. It is also used to enhance blood sugar metabolism, to improve liver function and
to strengthen the cardiovascular system. Athletes have long used DMG to improve overall
performance and endurance, to enhance oxygen utilization, and to improve recovery after
strenuous exercise. **NOTE: DMG is not advised for pregnant women or nursing mothers and
should only be used in children under medical supervision.
Ginkgo Biloba: Ginkgo Biloba is widely used to aid in improving and mental alertness. Ailments
such as vertigo and tinnitus, allergies, early stage Alzheimer's disease, asthma, impotence,
intermittent claudication(lameness), macular degeneration, migraines, and overall aging are
believed to be reduced by Ginkgo Biloba. Users of the supplement often identify mood
enhancement as a side effect.
Dimethylaminoethanol (DMAE): DMAE is a naturally occurring substance in the brain and in
several foods. Sardines and other cold water fish are a natural source. DMAE is a choline
precursor that easily moves across the brain-blood barrier and increases the production of
acetylocholine. Users of DMAE report that the effects are much more potent when it is taken
along with Phosphatidyl Choline: It has been known to act as a mild antidepressant and have
positive effects on mental energy, attention and concentration.
Coenzyme Q-10: Coenzyme Q10 is a vitamin-like nutrient in that it is essential, required in small
quantities, and catalyzes crucial metabolism. Coenzyme Q10 has been proven to act as an
essential catalyst of energy production metabolism in cells. It is a powerful anti-oxidant that can
readily absorb (and release) electrons from chemically active and thus potentially harmful free
radical. Additionally, it has been shown to enhance cognitive activity.
Melatonin: Melatonin is a natural substance secreted by the pineal gland. Melatonin is produced
to help our bodies regulate our sleep-wake cycles. However, the amount of it produced by our
body seems to lessen as we get older. Supplements help induce sleep and ease jet lag. Other
Your Brain System
197
benefits of Melatonin include a strengthening of the immune system, and a reduction of free
radicals in the body.
GABA (Gamma-Amino Butyric Acid): GABA is a calming and anti-epileptic agent in the brain that
is naturally manufactured in the body and can be found in foods high in protein. Ingestion of
additional synthetic GABA may help to reduce: symptoms of alcohol withdrawal, anxiety, high
blood pressure, appetite (hunger), and symptoms associated with depression.
Glycine: Glycine is a natural substance found in protein food and is synthesized in your nervous
system. Glycine helps build up glycogen levels, helps make DNA, skin proteins, stimulates growth
hormone release in higher doses, and participates in the major energy producing biochemical
reaction in your body. It also has a calming sedative effect, which is helpful in relaxation.
Taurine: Taurine is a non-essential amino acid that is found naturally in the body's white blood
cells, skeletal muscles, central nervous system as well as the heart muscles. It is believed to be
helpful with anxiety, hyperactivity, poor brain function and epilepsy as well as hydrating the brain.
Recent research performed by British researchers has shown that Taurine combined with caffeine
produces a cognitive enhancement effect. Significant improvements have been shown in healthy
volunteers for reaction time, concentration and memory.
Choline: Choline is critical for normal membrane structure and function. The human body uses
Choline to manufacture acetylcholine, a neurotransmitter involved in the formation and recall of
memories. Choline also assists in controlling weight, cholesterol levels, and contributes to the
prevention gallstones. It is also most useful in the maintenance of the nervous system, assisting
memory and learning, and may help to fight infections, including hepatitis and AIDS.
Vitamin B1 (thiamine): Thiamine is essential for the functioning of the heart, muscles and
nervous system. Thiamine may enhance circulation, helps with blood formation and the
metabolism of carbohydrates. It is also required for the health of the nervous system and is used
in the biosynthesis of a number of cell constituents, including the neurotransmitter acetylcholine
and gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA). It is used in the manufacture of hydrochloric acid, and
therefore plays a part in digestion.
Vitamin B2 (riboflavin): Riboflavin is an essential vitamin and is important for energy
metabolism, normal eyesight and healthy skin. Foods high in Riboflavin are milk, yogurt, cheeses,
meat, leafy green vegetables, and whole and enriched grains.
Vitamin B3 (niacin): Niacin is required for cell respiration, helps in the release of energy and
metabolism of carbohydrates, fats, and proteins, proper circulation and healthy skin, and
functioning of the nervous system. It is well known as a memory-enhancer. Users of Niacin report
more mental alertness when this vitamin is in sufficient supply.
Pantothenic acid (B5): Pantothetic acid is a vitamin B complex that is involved in energy
metabolism of carbohydrates, proteins and lipids, and the synthesis of lipids, neurotransmitters,
steroid hormones, porphyrins and hemoglobin. It has been used to treat cognitive impairments in
pathological states such as Alzheimer's disease.
Vitamin B6 (pyridoxine): Pyridoxine affects both physical and mental health. It is required by the
nervous system, and is needed for normal brain function and for the synthesis of the nucleic acids
RNA and DNA, which contain the genetic instructions for the reproduction of all cells and for
normal cellular growth.
Vitamin B9 (folic acid): Folic Acid or folate is needed to synthesize DNA. DNA allows cells to
replicate normally.
198
Vitamin B12 (cyanocobalamin): Cyanocobalamin is necessary for the formation and regeneration
of red blood cells. It has been linked to increases in appetite in children, increases in energy for
people of all ages, and aids in maintaining a healthy nervous system. Many elderly people
suffering from neurological impairment find that Cyanocobalamin supplementation greatly
improves their cognitive function.
Glutamine: Glutamine is a brain energizer. Like glucose it travels into brain cells easily and
serves as a fuel source. It is also used by white blood cells and is important for immune function.
Pyroglutamate: Pyroglutamate improves learning, improves memory and lowers anxiety.
Pyroglutamaic acid is the source from which several "smart drugs" have been developed. The
effect of Pyroglutamate when taken as a supplement is similar (though less powerful) on
cognition. It is a naturally occurring chemical in dairy products, meat, fruit and vegetables. In the
body it concentrates in cerebrospinal fluid and the brain. It is widely available either alone, or as
arginine pyroglutamate.
Vitamin C: Vitamin C provides an abundant and varied number of health benefits. Vitamin C is
best known as an immunity booster and powerful antioxidant. Like all antioxidants, vitamin C
counters the effects of cell-damaging molecules called free radicals. As an added benefit, it even
helps the body recycle other antioxidants. Vitamin C is abundant in fresh fruits and vegetables. It
is also available in synthetically manufactured forms. Vitamin C has been found to boost the
immune system and reduce cholesterol. It also is imperative in growing and maintaining tissue.
Vitamin C contributes greatly to cognitive ability and is in its highest concentrations in the brain.
Studies have shown a positive correlation between the levels of vitamin C in individuals and
performance on IQ tests. Those with more C did better. Those with lower scores increased their
scores when they were given more C.
Arginine Pyroglutamate: Arginine Pyroglutamate may help improve cognitive functions in older
individuals, especially in people with brain dysfunction. Some studies have indicated that
pyroglutamate may help improve cognition in aging alcoholics. **NOTE: Effects may seem to
diminish with daily use.
Phosphatidyl Choline (PC): PC is found in lecithin. Studies on PC have shown that it aids in
increasing metabolism of fats, regulating cholesterol, and is a source material for the manufacture
of cell membranes.
N-Acetyl-L-Carnitine (ALC): Studies have shown that ALC improves memory and learning in
young women and has had a positive effect on attention and alertness in Alzheimer's and other
senility sufferers. ALC slows the decrease in nerve growth factor that comes with aging and
thereby helps keep the brain younger.
COQ-10: COQ-10 stimulates energy release in the cells and has a large number of beneficial
effects, including: stimulating the immune system, boosting energy, enhancing athletic
performance, lowering blood pressure, positive effects on heart disease, and improved mental
functioning. Although research is still continuing on COQ-10, many scientists believe COQ-10
helps to lengthen life span.
Phenylalanine: Phenylalanine is naturally produced by the brain and has been found to
contribute to positive mood, increased energy, and memory formation. Unfortunately for a some
people, with age the brain becomes less capable of producing Phenylalanine in required amounts.
This is part of the addiction cycle. Supplementing the diet with Phenylalanine helps overcome
such depletion. As a result it is recommended for everyone over age 45.
Eleuthero: Eleuthero helps the body to adapt to various kinds of stress such as heat, cold,
Your Brain System
199
exertion, sleep deprivation, infection or psychological stress. Used alongside Eleutherosides

(active components in Eleuthero) Eleuthero is extremely helpful in fighting fatigue. It also
improves the use of oxygen in a working muscle to help maintain activity for longer periods of
time, while shortening recovery.
Biotin: Biotin plays a vital role in the production of energy from the metabolism of carbohydrates
and fats. It is also known as the vitamin that produces healthy hair and helps prevent graying.
Biotin deficiency has been linked to retarded physical and mental development, alopecia,
keratoconjunctivitis, and defects in T-cell and B-cell immunity.
Further Reading
The Merck Manual
Mega Brain, Michael Hutchison
The A-Z Guide to Drug-Herb and Vitamin Interactions, D.C. Jr. Schuyler W. Lininger, N.D. Steve
Austin, Forrest Batz, M.D. Alan Gaby
Encyclopedia of Nutritional Supplements, N.D. Michael T. Murray
Mind Food and Smart Pills: A Sourcebook for the Vitamins, Herbs and Drugs That Can Increase
Intelligence, Improve Memory and Prevent Brain Aging, Ross and Taffy Pelton
Smart Drugs II: The Next Generation. Fowkes, Morgenthaler and Dean.
Disclaimer:
Every effort has been made to make this reference as accurate as possible. The purpose of this
reference is to educate and is presented for informational purposes. This reference is not
intended for self-diagnosis, treatment, or justification in accepting or declining any medical
therapy for any health problems or diseases. No medical claims are intended express or implied.
Any application of the reference herein is at the reader's own discretion and risk. Therefore, any
individual who has a specific health problem or who is taking medications must first seek advice
from his or her personal physician or health-care provider before starting a nutrition program.
Neither Neuro-Programmer nor its parent company Transparent Corp shall have neither liability
nor responsibility to any person or entity with respect to loss, damage, or injury caused or alleged
to be caused directly or indirectly by the information contained in this reference. Neither NeuroProgrammer nor its parent company Transparent Corp assumes any responsibility for errors,
inaccuracies, omissions, or any inconsistency herein. Any slights of people, places, or
organizations are unintentional. Statements made in the application or related documentation
have not been evaluated or approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration.
Top Level Intro

Part
XI
Research & EEG Data
11
Research & EEG Data
11.1
Introduction
201
Sessions - Research & EEG Data

In this section you will find explanations of much of the research behind this application.
Everything contained in NP2 is based on solid research and decades (or more) of study.
Before proceeding you may want to look over the following sections to get a basic understanding
of the concepts:
Brainwaves
Brainwave Entrainment
Session Research
Alpha / Theta - Inducing Hyper-Suggestibility
Beta/SMR (ADD / IQ / Study) Sessions
Sports Enhancement
Anxiety / Stress / Chemical Dependency
Depression / SAD
PMS Relief
Headache Relief
Fibromyalgia / Chronic Pain Sessions
Energy / Chronic Fatigue / Wake Up!
Blood Pressure / Hypertension
Insomnia & Sleep Induction
Relaxation Methods
Simple Relaxation Sessions
Hypnotic Induction Techniques
202
EEG Data
EEG Guide
Alpha / Theta "Programming" Sessions
Beta / SMR Sessions
Complex & Hemisphere-Specific Sessions
11.2
Session Research
11.2.1 Alpha / Theta - Inducing Hyper-Suggestibility

Introduction
In NP2, Alpha and Theta sessions have one main purpose: to make your mind more receptive to
suggestion so it can be "reprogrammed", changing your emotional reactions and anchoring
mental states.
These sessions can also be used for relaxation, stress-relief and "altered states".
Notes On Session Effects

During Theta, conscious access to older memories is increased, so if there are any repressed or
traumatic memories hiding in your subconscious they are likely to surface during a Theta session.
This is largely because memory is state-based. Children spend most of their time in Alpha and
Theta states, until the brain has matured enough to actively produce Beta activity. Now, when you
descend to Theta you can more easily return to that child-like, at which point you may find
yourself recalling many of your childhood memories in vivid detail.
Research
In a study called The Case for Alpha-Theta: A Dynamic Hemispheric Asymmetry Model, Thomas
Budzynski, Ph.D., noted "At the low end of the arousal continuum, images and/or verbal
suggestions are processed without the full effect of the critical screening, and therefore, are more
likely to be accepted and acted upon."
A study was done by Felipe in 1965 at Yale University where attitude changing suggestions were
Research & EEG Data
203
given to subjects during different mental states. Only during drowsiness or sleep did the
suggestions have any significant effect. During alert, waking states and deeper sleep stages, the
suggestions had little to no effect on attitude and, therefore, little effect on behavior.
As mentioned before in the documentation, the purpose of Alpha / Theta sessions is to guide the
mind to state not unlike the state of "hypnosis", which is one of profound relaxation and internal
focus, yet receptivity to "reprogramming". Research has shown that only 35% of the population is
easily hypnotizable [See Rossi]. The rest of the population has trouble reaching a state of
receptivity without added stimulation.
The study EEG Patterns Associated with High Hypnotizability, conducted by D. Corydon
Hammond, Ph.D., suggests a very specific brainwave pattern associated with high levels of
Hypnotizability, with a significant frequency of 6.5 Hz. These brainwave patterns are reproduced
using NP2 Theta sessions.
But while Theta is best for external suggestion, Alpha is better for visualization. High levels of
conscious interaction with your subconscious (visualization, auto-suggestion, etc) often brings
your brainwave pattern into conflict with a Theta session, while Alpha is perfect for it. In fact, the
moment you close your eyes and start visualizing Alpha levels skyrocket. It is a common EEG
test to ask the patient to close his/her eyes in order to measure baseline Alpha levels.
Further Reading
EEG Patterns Associated with High Hypnotizability: Practical Clinical Implications Hammond, D.
Corydon, Ph.D.
The Case for Alpha-Theta: A Dynamic Hemispheric Asymmetry Model, Tom Budzynski, Ph.D.
A Technique For Rapidly Inducing Hypnosis, Margolis, B., CAL., June 1966
Programming and Metaprogramming in the Human Biocomputer, John C. Lilly, M.D.
Attitude change during interrupted sleep, A. Felipe, Yale University Doctoral dissertation
Verbally induced behavioral response during sleep. Evans, R J., Gustafson, L. A., O'Connell, D.
N., Orne, M. T. & Shor, R. E., Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 1, 1-26.
Learning and sleep. Rubin, R (1970). Nature, 226, 447.
The PsychoBiology Of Mind-Body Healing, New Concepts In Therapeutic Hypnosis, Ernest
Lawrence Rossi
204
11.2.2 Beta/SMR (ADD / IQ / Study) Sessions

Introduction
Beta sessions very much act like a "mental workout", increasing electrical activity and blood flow
to the brain, speeding it up, even promoting new dendrite and synapse growth.

The first few times a more intense beta session is used (such as the IQ session), you may
experience a mild headache. A headache during a session is almost always what is called a
vascular headache, resulting from increased blood flow to your brain or forehead. Remember that
entrainment, particularly Beta entrainment, increases neural electrical activity. To compensate,
the brain increases blood flow. If you are not used to that much activity, it may cause a slight,
annoying headache until you get used to it. Consider it a good thing: a sign that the session is
doing its work. This side effect typically goes away after the first few uses. You probably won't
even experience this unless you use a focused beta session like the IQ session, meant as a brain
workout.
Research
Numerous studies have found that Beta training can greatly increase cognitive abilities,
enhancing memory, increasing focus and mental speed, and reducing "slow-wave" disorders such
as ADD.
Harold Russel Ph.D. and John Carter, Ph.D., of the University of Houston, did several studies in
which they used brainwave entrainment to treat ADHD and other learning disorders. After a short
period of treatment, they observed 5 to 7 point increases in IQ. Michael Tansey used a similar
protocol to increase 11 - 19hz brainwaves in people suffering from dyslexia and other learning
disorders, reporting a 19 point average increase in IQ.
Drs. Siegfried and Susan Othmer found, in a controlled study, that beta training in the 15-18
range produces average IQ increases of 23 percent with ADD children. In cases where the
starting IQ value is less than 100, the average IQ increase was 33 points! They also found
significant improvements in memory, reading and arithmetic. In a one year follow-up, trainees
showed major improvements in self-esteem, concentration and self-expression.
Psychologist Michael Joyce used brainwave entrainment with a group of 30 children and
observed vast improvements in reading level and a half year advancement in grade level as well
as substantial improvements in attention, reaction and a reduction in impulsivity and variability.
Note that these studies were done using groups of people who probably needed an IQ increase.
For those who are already overachievers, these sessions may have less effect. We do believe
they will be of great benefit to most people, however. To the learning disabled, it could be a god
send.
Further Reading
Academic Performance Enhancement with Photic Stimulation and EDR Feedback. Thomas
Budzynski, Ph.D., John Jordy, M.Ed., Helen Kogan Budzynski, Ph.D., Hsin-Yi Tang, M.S., and
Keith Claypoole, Ph.D.
Audio-Visual Entrainment (AVE) Program as a Treatment for Behavior Disorders in a School
Setting, Michael Joyce & Dave Siever, 1997
Research & EEG Data
205
AVS (Audio-Visual Stimulation) Effects in an Alzheimer's Patients Documented by QEEG and

LORETA, Tom Budzynski, Annual Conference, Society of Neuronal Regulation
EEG Training for ADHD and Learning Disorders, Othmer, S & Othmer, S.F., March, 1989
Differences in EEG Alpha Activity Related to Giftedness. Jausovec, N. (1996)., Intelligence, 23,
159-173.
Righting the Rhythms of Reason: EEG Biofeedback Training as a Therapeutic Modality in a
Clinical Office Setting. Tansey, M.A., Medical Psychotherapy 3 (1990): 57-68
New Visions School NeuroTechnology Replication Project 2000 - 2001, Michael Joyce
Resting EEG theta activity predicts cognitive performance in attention-deficit hyperactivity
disorder. Hermens DF, Soei EX, Clarke SD, Kohn MR, Gordon E, Williams LM., 2005
Intelligence, Academic Achievement, and EEG Abnormalities in Hyperactive Children, Am J
Psychiatry 131:4, April 1974, James H. Satterfield, M.D., Dennis P. Cantwell, M.D., Ronald E.
Saul, M.D., Alvin Yusin, M.D.
EEG Average Frequency and Intelligence. Giannitrapani, D. (1969)., Electroencephalography &
Clinical Neurophysiology, 27, 480-486.
EEG Alpha Rhythm Frequency and Intelligence in Normal Individuals. Anoukhin, A., Intelligence,
23: 1-14
EEG differences in ADHD-combined type during baseline and cognitive tasks., Swartwood JN,
Swartwood MO, Lubar JF, Timmermann DL.
Exceptional Results with 'Exceptional Children' Lynda Thompson, Ph.D. and Michael Thompson,
M.D., Journal Of NeuroTherapy
Electroencephalographic Biofeedback of SMR and Beta for Treatment of Attention Deficit
Disorders in a Clinical Setting, Lubar, J. O., and J.F. Lubar. Biofeedback and Self Regulation 9,
no. 1 (1984) 1-23
EEG and behavioral changes in a hyperactive child concurrent training of the sensorimotor rhythm
(SMR). A preliminary report. Biofeedback and Self-Regulation, 1, 293-306. Lubar, J.F., Shabsin,
H.S., Natelson, S.E., Holder, G.S., Whitsett, S.F., Pamplin, W.E., and Krulikowski, D.I. (1981).
The Physiological Response to "Beta Sweep" Entrainment, Gontgovsky, S., Montgomery, D.,
Proceedings AAPB Thirteenth Anniversary Annual Meeting (1999)
11.2.3 Sports Enhancement

Introduction
Any athlete will tell you that sports is as much a psychological battle as much as it is a physical
challenge. Performance anxiety and other common problems often lead to muscle tension. Tense
muscles require much more energy to operate and a confused, anxious athlete will not be able to
respond dynamically to unexpected challenges.
206
There is a huge body of evidence that brainwave entrainment, relaxation, visualization and
various Anchoring techniques can vastly improve sports performance. Athletes who use this
technology often report rapid improvements, not only in performance but in general mental
attitude and the ability to respond easier to changing situations. If you read some of the articles in
the Further Reading section you will find dozens of success stories from athletes. For example, a
golfer lost over 600 professional tournaments before turning to entrainment and visualization, and
won soon after! More than a few athletes have tripled their earnings using this technology.
The evidence for sports enhancement is particularly prevalent because coaches often recognize
the importance of psychology in sports, and develop relaxation and visualization regimens for
their students.
"I just turned fifty and yet I'm in the best shape of my life. Mind machines help me recover more
quickly, rest more deeply , and, I believe, stimulate growth hormone" - Frank Zane, three-time Mr.
Olympia.

There are many ways in which the Neuro-Programmer can be used to enhance skill/sports
performance. The first is to use NP2 as a relaxation device, helping teach the user how to deeply
relax on command. Anchoring and other techniques can be used to access these profound inner
states of calm at any time, even in the middle of an event or competition. See the sports strategy
section for more information.
The second is enhancing visualization. Visualization is an age-old method of increasing
performance. For instance, a martial artist will visualize an entire move before executing it,
particularly when breaking bricks or boards. When you are in an Alpha state, your ability to
visualize is doubled and your mind's receptivity to positive suggestion is increased. Not only that,
but if you are relaxed while visualizing yourself performing a task, it is likely that when you
perform the task you will return to that state of inner relaxation!
Yet another use of brainwave stimulation for sports enhancement is to help the user get a full
night's sleep. NP2 comes with numerous insomnia and sleep induction sessions
Research
Studies have shown that when you first learn a task, Alpha activity in the brain is suppressed,
because faster brain activity is needed to learn the complexities involved in the task. As you learn
and master the task, Alpha activity increases until it becomes dominant while performing. Studies
have proven that the "peak performance" state, the state that successful athletes are in while
performing, is a relaxed mental state, often dominated by Alpha waves and inner calm, as well as
a positive, optimistic attitude. Winning athletes have higher levels of testosterone, Serotonin and
human growth hormone. They get a full night's rest and are better able to cope with stress and
anxiety.
Brainwave stimulation can help promote relaxation and familiarity with the "zone" state. Research
and thousands of anecdotal reports have consistently shown that the relaxation and inner calm
produced during a session can last for days. In a study done by sports psychologist Thomas
Hawes, a single light & sound session reduced EMG (muscle tension) by 2/3 in a little under 6
minutes.
Studies have also shown that Brainwave stimulation can help promote the release of Human
Growth Hormone (HGH), with its accelerated growth and anti-aging properties, as well as
Testosterone and Serotonin levels, helping keep an optimistic, assertive mental attitude. Dr.
Norman Shealy, noted a release of HGH in response to a 7.8 Hz photic stimulus.. Michael
Research & EEG Data
207
Herculese, an aerospace engineer, designed a CES device that introduced a delta stimulus of
1.05 and apparently measured a significant increase in HGH.
Further Reading
Using Light And Sound Technology To Access "The Zone" In Sports And Beyond, Thomas
Hawes, M.ED., ED.S.
And the Winner is You., Abrahams, J. Golf Magazine. March 2001
Peak Performance: Mental Training Technique of the World's Greatest Athletes, Charles Garfield
and Hal Bennett
The Effect of Repetitive Audio/Visual Stimulation on Skeletomotor and Vasomotor Activity, Dr.
Norman Thomas, David Siever, 1988, Hypnosis - The Forth European Congress at Oxford
Mega Brain Power, by Michael Hutchison, 1991
11.2.4 Anxiety / Stress / Chemical Dependency

Introduction
Over-Arousal: A lack of Alpha and/or Theta brainwaves, and an overabundance of higher Beta
activity, is characteristic of Anxiety and Stress. Not surprisingly, people lacking these vital
brainwaves often turn to external substances (such as alcohol, tobacco and drugs) to induce the
production of these brainwaves, providing temporary, and potentially dangerous, relief.
Using relaxation-focused brainwave entrainment sessions, you can not only reduce stress,
anxiety and cravings for external substances, but you can also increase your brain's ability to
produce these brainwaves, allowing you to better deal with stress in the future.

Like so many mental disorders, there is no "magic-bullet" for anxiety or stress, no one-size-fits-all
solution that will work for everybody. For example, people who experience Panic Attacks and
severe anxiety may response better to Beta/SMR sessions. It can take some experimentation to
find out what works best for you. The Stress, Anxiety and Addiction sessions all increase both
relaxation and SMR/Beta activity, but if you don't have success with these sessions, try the
straight Beta or SMR sessions for a while and gauge the results.
Research
Entrainment is widely used as a way to reduce stress and anxiety. Very few studies on brainwave
training fail to mention stress reduction as a goal or healthy side effect.
It has been found that people with addictive personalities have low activity in the Alpha region.
Research done using Alpha training during the 1980's yielded incredible results with a 70%
208
success rate in a three year follow up. Henry Adams, Ph.D., of NIMH and head of the alcoholism
programs at St. Elizabeth's Hospital in Washington, found that alcoholics showed a 55% decrease
in alcohol consumption after a single relaxation session combined with a brief anti-alcohol
suggestion.
Alpha/Theta Neurofeedback results in some 80% of those addicts properly trained becoming noncraving, healthy people with well adjusted neurochemistry (Peninston & Kulkosky, 1990).
It has also been found that those with lower SMR levels tend to be more likely to self-medicate
with drugs or alcohol. Low SMR levels can lead to an inability to relax or control levels of arousal.
People suffering from chronic anxiety, panic attacks and ADD also tend to lack the SMR
brainwave. However, in one case study a 29 year long-time sufferer of panic attacks completely
rid herself of her disorder by using Alpha training [see Further Reading].
Further Reading
Case Study 4: Panic Attacks, Stress, and Anxiety. Biocybernaut Institute, available online
Effects of meditation on anxiety and chemical dependency. Wong, M.R., Brochin, N.E., &
Genfron, K.L. (1981), Journal of Drug Education, 11, 91-105.
Stress Reduction and Preventing Hypertension: Preliminary Support for Psychoneuroendocrine
Mechanism. Walton, K.G., Pugh, N., The Journal of Alternative and Complimentary Medicine
(1995), Vol 1
Treatment of Chronic Anxiety Disorder with Neurotherapy: A Case Study. Joseph E. Thomas,
Ph.D. and Elizabeth Sattlberger, B.A.
Anxiety change through electroencephalographic alpha feedback seen only in high anxiety
subjects. Hardt, J. V, & Kamiya, J. (1978). Science, 201, 79-81.
A relapse-prevention program: Effects of electromyographic training on high and low levels of
state and trait anxiety. Perceptual and Motor Skills. Hurley, J.D., & Meminger, S. R. (1992)., 74,
699705.
Differential Effects Of Relaxation Techniques on Trait Anxiety: A Meta-Analysis, Eppley, K.R.,
Abrams, A., Journal Of Clinical Psychology, (1989), Vol 45
Composite Biofeedback Conditioning and Dangerous Offenders: III, Douglas A. Quirk, Ph.D.
published in the Journal Of NeuroTherapy
Biofeedback treatments of generalized anxiety disorder: Preliminary results. Rice, K. M.,
Blanchard, E. B., & Purcell, M. (1993). Biofeedback and Self-Regulation, 18(2), 93-104.
Neurofeedback in major depression associated to addictions - a case study. Ibric, Victoria L. ,
MD, PhD., Journal Of NeuroTherapy
The Effect of the Relaxodont Brain Wave Synchronizer on Endodontic Anxiety, Morse, Chow
by Brainwave Entrainment Shealy, N., Cady, R., Cox, R., Liss, S., Clossen, W., Veehoff, D., A
study done for Comprehensive Health Care, Unpublished
Research & EEG Data
209
11.2.5 Depression / SAD

Introduction
Entrainment presents an entirely new way to treat depression. It may seem radical to you, but the
studies and science behind it have proven to be remarkably promising.

Depression is a so-called "Slow-wave" disorder, meaning those with depression tend to exhibit
lower Beta and SMR levels than do normal people. Depression also has to do with left
hemisphere asymmetry, where the right frontal cortex tends to be more active than the left.
However, high Cortisol (stress) levels, low energy, high anxiety or insomnia can also cause
depression. For those individuals, alpha/theta training has been shown to be very effective.
Research
Depression is commonly linked to inadequate levels of Serotonin. While brainwave stimulation
has been shown to increase levels of Serotonin, that is not the main purpose of the Depression
reduction sessions.
J.B. Henriques, R.J. Davidson and others have found a very distinct brainwave pattern associated
with depression: too much activity in the right (emotional) hemisphere and too little activity in the
left (logical) hemisphere, leading to irrational, overly emotional reactions to otherwise trivial
situations. Correcting this hemispheric imbalance is simple and the benefits are rapid. Often, the
correction of this brainwave "asymmetry" is enough to bring Serotonin levels back to where they
should be. So, in that sense, the root cause of depression could be said to be this hemispheric
asymmetry and a general lack of Beta brainwave activity (under-arousal), though the original
cause of the depression could be deeper still (genetic makeup, childhood experiences, etc).
Dr. Siegfried Othmer noted that depressed individuals tend to exhibit lower brainwave amplitudes
over all, and particularly in the beta range. In other words, depressed individuals exist largely in
the Alpha and Theta brainwave patterns, resulting in persistent fatigue or feeling like a "sleep
walker".
Dr. Norman Shealy, Dr. Ray Smith, Saul Rosenthal, Norman Wulfsohn, Sual Liss and many other
researchers have found that depression can be reduced with brainwave stimulation. Shealy
studied Serotonin levels in particular, and found that a mere 2 weeks of treatment was enough to
lift 60% of subjects out of depression. Subjected showed a subsequent increase not only in levels
of Serotonin, but also norepinephrine, dopamine and beta-endorphins.
In a study on Seasonal Affective Disorder, conducted by Kathy Berg and David Siever, 84% of
the subject became clinically non-depressed after treatment, and 100% of those treated
experienced a significant reduction in depression. Results also showed decreases in Anxiety,
over-eating while energy and motivation levels increased! Twelve of the participants actually lost
weight (average of 9.5 pounds) during the trial.
Further Reading
Approach-withdrawal and Cerebral Asymmetry: Emotional Expression and Brain Physiology. R.J.
Davidson, Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 58 (1990) 330-34
Regional Brain Electrical Asymmetries Discriminate between Previously Depressed and Healthy
210
Control Subjects J.B. Henriques and R.J. Davidson., Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 99 (1990)
22-31
MD, PhD., Journal Of NeuroTherapy
Audio-Visual Entrainment as a Treatment Modality for Seasonal Affective Disorder, Kathy Berg,
David Siever, 1999
Major Depressive Disorder: QEEG Subtypes and Treatment Implications, Robert Gurnee, Annual
Conference, Society of Neuronal Regulation
MD, PhD. , Annual Conference, Society of Neuronal Regulation
Relationship between depression severity and overall EEG abnormality., Lawson, Robert and
Rogers, Randy., Annual Conference, Society of Neuronal Regulation
Roshi Compared with the Rosenfeld Depression Protocol:A Case Report, D. Corydon Hammond,
Ph.D., University of Utah., Annual Conference, Society of Neuronal Regulation
Frontal Asymmetry Changes Reflect Brief Mood Shifts in both Normal and Depressed Subjects,
Elsa Baehr, PhD, J. Peter Rosenfeld, PhD, & Rufus Baehr, PhD, Annual Conference, Society of
Neuronal Regulation
EEG Asymmetry and Depression Severity: A Comparison of Various Asymmetry Measures,
Robert Lawson, M.S., QEEGT and Tim Barnes, M.A., QEEGT. University of North Texas,
Neurotherapy Lab, Annual Conference, Society of Neuronal Regulation
Anterior Alpha Asymmetry in Anxiety and Depression, Robert Lawson and Eugenia BodenhamerDavis, Annual Conference, Society of Neuronal Regulation
by Brainwave Entrainment Shealy, N., Cady, R., Cox, R., Liss, S., Clossen, W., Veehoff, D., A
study done for Comprehensive Health Care, Unpublished
11.2.6 PMS Relief

Introduction
It may seem illogical that audio/visual stimulation can have a significant impact on PMS
Research & EEG Data
211
symptoms, but the brainwave pattern of women suffering from PMS is surprisingly unique. Istra
Toner, of the Royal Medical School in London, studied brainwave patterns of subjects with PMS
and found an abnormally high amount of Delta frequencies. A lack of cerebral blood flow has
been found by other researchers.

PMS relief will be especially effective if you use LED Light Goggles with your session. Photic
stimulation is particularly effective at relieving hypofusion or insufficient cerebral blood flow, a
common cause of PMS.
Research
PMS is usually classified as a "slow-wave" disorder because of the lack of higher brainwaves in
those suffering from PMS. But while SMR/Beta training is very effective, it has also been shown
that alpha/theta training is effective. So it has been concluded by many (Toomim, David Norton,
Ph.D., and others) that it is increased cerebral blood flow that is the actual remedy, and that can
be accomplished by entrainment of nearly any frequency, even Delta (with photic stimulation at
least).
Duncan Anderson and his associates at the Royal Medical School in London completed a study
with 17 women who had long standing, severe PMS. At the end of the study a median of 76%
reduction was recorded. Twelve of the 17 technically no longer had PMS. In another study
thirteen of 17 patients reported a greater than 50% reduction in PMS symptoms.
Further Reading
EEG Biofeedback Training for PMS. Susan F. Othmer and Siegfried Othmer, Ph.D. January,
1994
PMS, EEG, and Photic Stimulation. David Noton, Phd.D.. Journal Of Neurotherapy.
11.2.7 Headache Relief

Introduction
It is easy and common to self-medicate headaches, so the purpose of any headache session
should be to eliminate the onset of headaches in the first place, if possible, in addition to relieving
any existing pain.

For certain types of headaches no entrainment-based remedy can be found or expected. A
session will do very little for "sinus" headaches or headaches resulting from trauma to the skull.
Though pain has been reported to be generally reduced by alpha/theta training, long lasting
effects of entrainment on sinus or injury-based headaches has not reached significance.
Research
Alpha training has been shown to stop headaches and reduce the number of migraine headaches
per week. [see D.J. Anderson, B.Sc., M.B., B.S., at the bottom]
212
In addition, 5 minute sessions of slow wave photic stimulation at 1-3hz have been found to be
effective. Longer sessions are expected to increase the effectiveness. Fifteen patients, 10 female
and five male, aged 21 to 41 years were treated. 14 of 15 patients in this group reported complete
relief of their headache. One patient noted a 75% reduction in headache intensity. [see Glen D
Solomon]
In another study, light stimulation was used to treat seven sufferers of migraine headaches, who
could not find relief from drug treatments. Out of 50 migraines studied, 49 were rated by subjects
as being "helped" and 36 were stopped.
Further Reading
The Treatment of Migraine with Variable Frequency Photo-Stimulation. D.J. Anderson, B.Sc.,
M.B., B.S., Headache 29;154-155, 1989
Slow wave photic stimulation in the treatment of headache. A Preliminary Report. Glen D
Solomon, Headache 25:444-446, 1985
Barebones 14 Hz EEG training for migraine. Budzynski, T. (1995, February). Presented at the
FUTUREHEALTH EEG conference
11.2.8 Immune System Enhancement

Introduction
Alpha/Theta Training has been shown to be very effective in increasing the immune system
functioning as well as T-Cell counts.
Research
A study was done on the effects of alpha/theta training on 40 subjects with HIV. Those given
Alpha-Stim therapy experienced at 34% increase in T-4 levels (helper cells). 10 subjects from the
neurotherapy (alpha/theta) group averaged a 31% increase in T-4 level. All subjects reported a
decrease in physical symptoms and stress within the first month. [see HIV study in Research &
Further Reading]
Dr. William Harris, Director of the Penwell Foundation, in 1990: Preliminary studies with audiovisual entrainment used by patients with AIDS indicated that "the devices are extremely efficient
in terms of providing mental clarity, improved sleeping patterns (for sleep preparation and sleep
duration) allowing for better physical disintoxication by the liver. The apparatus also stimulates
immunology functions through states of deep relaxation."
It is also a well documented fact that stress inhibits the immune system. So a natural reduction of
stress, which can be trained and measured using brainwave stimulation technology, will invariably
be good news for the immune system.
Further Reading
Neurofeedback and Immune Response (HIV+) Gary J. Schummer, Ph.D., M. Crane, L. Wong, C.
Aquirre, Society for the Study of Neuronal Regulation (SSNR)
Imagery and Healing. Jeanne Achtenberg, 1985
Research & EEG Data
213
Healing With Mind Power, Richard Shames and Chuck Sterin

The Psychobiology of Mind-Body Healing. Ernest Lawrence Rossi, 1984
Mega Brain Power, by Michael Hutchison
Fighting Disease, Michaud, E., Feinstein, A., Rodale Press, Inc.
11.2.9 Fibromyalgia / Chronic Pain Sessions

Introduction
Fibromyalgia and Chronic Pain are remarkably common problems. Dominant in 3-5% of women
and 2 to 4% of the general population, Fibromyalgia is characterized by persistent muscular pain,
fatigue, sleeping problems and in some cases depression, anxiety and various cognitive
difficulties. The treatment of Fibromyalgia is still being studied but the results of using brainwave
entrainment are very promising.

If you do not have success with the sessions created for these problems, you may want to try
generic Beta, SMR or Alpha sessions. Fibromyalgia is a very broad syndrome, and a variety of
treatments may be effective.
Research
A study conducted by Mike Twittey and David Siever successfully reduced Chronic Pain in 15
participants over a two month period. The Beck Depression Scale also indicated a significant
decrease in depression.
In a case study conducted by Dr. Fred Boersma, a man with a severe back injury was able to
reduce his pain killer intake from 35 extra strength Tylenol daily, to only 2 or 3 pills daily! The
man also reported a more positive attitude, no doubt due in part to the increase in endorphins and
serotonin that the light and sound sessions stimulated.
In a comparitive study on Fibromyalgia treatments, Audio/Visual entrainment beat out both
medical and nutritional treatments in many ways, including Pain and Anxiety. Combined
treatment yielded even greater success.
Further Reading
The Use of Repetitive Audiovisual Entrainment in the Management of Chronic Pain, Dr. Fred
Boersma, Gagnon, C, Medical Hypnoanalysis Journal. 1992, Vol 7
Outcome of Medical Methods, Audio-Visual Entrainment, and Nutritional Supplementation for the
Treatment of Fibromyalgia Syndrome, Kathy Berg, Host Mueller, PhD, David Siever and Donald
Seibel, MD, 1999.
The Neurochemical Basis of Fibromyalgia, I. Jon Russell, MD, PhD, SNR 2002, International
Society for Neuronal Regulation
QEEG, Psychological Status and EMG Activity in Fibromyalgia, Stuart Donaldson, PhD and Mary
214
Donaldson, MEd, SNR 2002, International Society for Neuronal Regulation

Audio-Visual Stimulation as a Treatment for Chronic Pain, Mike Twittey, David Siever
11.2.10 Energy / Chronic Fatigue / Wake Up!

Introduction
In the same way that entrainment can be used for relaxation, altered states and stress relief, it
can also be used for heightened energy, motivation, replacing caffeine and relief of Chronic
Fatigue.
Research
In a 1998 study, Dr. David Trudeau used 18 Hz as a treatment protocol for patients with Chronic
Fatigue Syndrome (CFS), reporting very promising results, including reductions of Depression
and Impulsivity. Subjects reported vastly increased energy levels and improved sleep.
18 Hz has been shown to be a very reliable frequency for inducing a state of energy and
motivation, and is used by thousands of mind machine users as a way to replace caffeine intake,
specifically in the morning hours. Michael Hutchison mentioned 18 Hz as a very useful frequency
for this purpose in his ground breaking book, MegaBrain.
In addition to entrainment, there are other audio methods used to elevate energy levels. For
example, a high tempo musical piece can be very energizing.
A binaural beat hobbyist, Mike Triggs, was experimenting with lower delta frequencies when he
discovered that a 2 slowly rising pitches woke him up. He submitted his results to the community
and the effects have been confirmed by hundreds of users. In addition to this, we asked a group
of people to try out the session. Most of the people in the group were completely inexperienced
with mind technology and were fairly skeptical about it. Despite this, all of them reported being
woken up by the session; feeling more alert and able to concentrate easier. Today, this protocol,
along with an 18 Hz stimulus, is one of the most commonly used sessions in the NeuroProgrammer. Many routinely use this session when they first wake, or a boost of energy is needed
during the day.
Further Reading
A trial of 18 Hz Audio-Visual Stimulation (AVS) on Attention and Concentration in Chronic Fatigue
Syndrome (CFS). Dr. David Trudeu. Presented at the Society for Neuronal Regulation in 1999.
Effects of 18.5 Audiovisual Stimulation On EEG Amplitude at the Vertex, Frederick, J., Lubar, J.,
Rasey, H., Brim, S., Blackburn, J., Proceedings AAPB Thirteenth Anniversary Annual Meeting,
1999
Treatment of chronic fatigue syndrome with neurofeedback and self-hypnosis: A case report.,
Hammond, D. C. (1999).Journal of Neurotherapy, 3 (3 & 4) 63-64.
The Rediscovery Of Audio-Visual Entrainment Technology, David Siever, C.E.T.
The Physiological Response to "Beta Sweep" Entrainment, Gontgovsky, S., Montgomery, D.,
Research & EEG Data
215
Proceedings AAPB Thirteenth Anniversary Annual Meeting (1999)
11.2.11 Blood Pressure / Hypertension

Introduction
Hypertension, or high blood pressure, is a common problem in our society today. A reduction in
daily stress, a change of diet and a slew of medications are usually recommended, but can
entrainment technology be used to help treat this serious condition even further?
Research
Innumerable studies have proven the relaxing effects of brainwave entrainment. In fact,
brainwave stimulation is capable of relaxing users to deeper levels than any other traditional selfhelp technique. When most people are simply instructed to relax, very little muscle tension
release is recorded, and in many cases tension actually increases though the subject my report a
"feeling" of being more relaxed.
When the mind is guided to a lower brainwave state, the body falls into a profoundly deep state of
relaxation, causing blood vessels to dilate, increasing circulation, healing and the clearing away
of lactic acids.
Further, research into treating hypertension with brainwave entrainment have revealed more
permanent effects. Entrainment was used successfully in one study to reduce the blood pressure
of 28 participants over an 8 week period, producing a drop in systolic of 20 mm Hg and diastolic
pressure by 16 mm Hg. The very best drug-based treatments produce, on average, a drop of 16
mm Hg!
Stress relief and hypertension reduction can last for days and may eventually become permanent
- once you learn how to relax and become more familiar with the states of deep relaxation,
episodes of anger and stress become more rare and quality of life improves along with the vast
reduction in blood pressure.
Further Reading
The Effect of Audio-Visual Entrainment (AVE) on Hypertension, Wendy Mullen, Kathy Berg,
C.E.T., & Dave Siever,CET
Decreased Blood Pressure in Hypertensive Subjects Who Practiced Meditation. Benson H.,
Wallace, R.K., Circulation Supplement II to Vols. 45 and 46
Stress Reduction and Preventing Hypertension: Preliminary Support for Psychoneuroendocrine
Mechanism. Walton, K.G., Pugh, N., The Journal of Alternative and Complimentary Medicine
(1995), Vol 1
Pilot Study - Effects of Synchro Energizer Mediated Stress Management With the Metro-Date
Police Department, Brucato, D., Abascal, J., 1990, Unpublished.
The Effect of Repetitive Audio/Visual Stimulation on Skeletomotor and Vasomotor Activity, Dr.
Norman Thomas, David Siever, 1988, Hypnosis - The Forth European Congress at Oxford
216

11.2.12 Insomnia & Sleep Induction

Introduction
Insomnia help and Sleep induction are some of those most common uses of brainwave
entrainment

As the research will outline, there is no one size fits all solution for Insomnia, but most chronic
insomniacs will respond very well to the built in Insomnia session (use as instructed). Not only will
the session help you fall asleep, but will also help train your brain to sleep better in the future.
The Sleep Inductions sessions should help nearly everyone, guiding the brain manually, but
gently down to a deep healthy sleep.
If you have trouble staying asleep, try building a Theta/Delta session, with no initial downward
ramp. Looping it during sleep should help you stay in as deep a sleep as you like. Or you can use
it to stimulate dreams (REM, Theta).
Research
Many studies have shown brainwave entrainment to be incredibly effective with sleep disorders.
The most obvious benefit is that it can help guide your mind to Theta, or light sleep. This method
is very effective, and while common sense says Theta training would be the most effective
treatment for Insomnia, the work of Dr. Hauri and others suggests that there is no "panacea" for
poor sleep, that a single protocol does not work for everyone. In fact, chronic, life-long insomniacs
tend to respond much better to SMR training than Theta.
One study successfully treated 16 long time psychophysiological insomniacs, randomly assigning
each of them to either SMR training or Theta training. It was found that the tense, anxious
insomniacs responded well to Theta training as opposed to those who, while deeply relaxed, still
found it difficult to sleep, responding better to SMR training.
Further Reading
EEG correlates of sleep: Evidence for separate forebrain substrates. Brain Research, 6, 143-163.
Sterman, M.B., Howe, R.C., and MacDonald, L.R. (1970).
Treating psychophysiologic insomnia with biofeedback. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1981 Jul;38(7):7528. Hauri P.
The treatment of psychophysiologic insomnia with biofeedback: a replication study. Biofeedback
Self Regul. 1982 Jun;7(2):223-35. Hauri PJ, Percy L, Hellekson C, Hartmann E, Russ D.
Fighting Disease, Michaud, E., Feinstein, A., Rodale Press, Inc.
Research & EEG Data
11.3
217
Alpha / Theta Relaxation Methods
11.3.1 Simple Relaxation Sessions

Simple Relaxation
This is the simplest form of relaxation, using a basic ramp from low Beta to Alpha or Theta over a
brief period of time (usually 1 minute per Hz) allowing the user to settle and be gently guided to a
level of relaxation appropriate for the type of mental programming used.
Simple relaxation is often preferred by advanced users and those who are typically calm and
relaxed to begin with. Hyperactive, unsettled users may find it boring, especially if just tones are
used (no background sounds).
11.3.2 Dissociative Sessions

You have probably noticed a large number of Dissociative sessions, and only for use with
Headphones. Dissociation is defined as a mental state where all thoughts, worries, feelings and
even time/space drifts from consciousness. Dissociation happens naturally whenever you are
immersed in a movie, a good book or daydream, but can also be induced artificially using a
number of modern Hemisphere-specific brainwave stimulation techniques.
In essence, a Dissociative session is the same a Simple Relaxation session, except that slightly
different stimulation is given to each brain hemisphere. The phase, modulation and pulse rates of
the left and right sides will be slightly different, and will change over time. Most of the time, the 2
sides combine later to form a single cohesive stimulant near the end of the initial downward ramp
of the session. Others will continue the dissociation throughout the entire session.
People who are unsettled, hyperactive or have a lot of "mental chatter" will likely prefer
Dissociative sessions.
11.3.3 Hypnotic Induction Techniques

Hypnotic Induction Relaxation Techniques
The mind has an Eb and a Flow nature to it. When hypnotists induce a "trance" in a client, they
typically find that the user will drop to a level and then rise out of it a little bit, only to drop deeper
still afterward. The cycle continues until the client is in sufficiently receptive state.
Hypnotic Relax sessions emulate this induction cycle:
218
People who have had trouble being hypnotized in the past will find this technique particularly
useful. Others may find it takes too long to start the recordings (suggestions) with the hypnotic
induction sessions (a simple relaxation can be induced much faster, because it doesn't have to
take the time to ramp up before ramping down again).
11.3.4 Alternating Sessions

Alternating sessions separate the right and left sides and place their pulse rates 180 degrees out
of phase with each other, so when one is playing the other is silent, and as a result when one
brain hemisphere is being stimulated the other is inactive. This can result in some wild brain
harmonics, especially if you use Light Goggles.
A session can also be alternated by using completely different type of ramp for each brain
hemisphere. The below is a "criss-crossing", dual frequency hypnotic induction technique. Notice
that while one hemisphere is in its "Eb", or relaxation period, the other is in its "Flow".
Alternating sessions are well liked by people who are unsettled, hyperactive or have excess
mental chatter. They can also be quite entertaining, particularly if you have LED Light Goggles. In
the Wizard, an alternating session will only be recommended if you have Light Goggles available.
Otherwise, a dissociative session will probably work better for most people.
11.4
EEG Data
11.4.1 Overview
EEG Data Overview
This section contains general EEG data and information on the methods used to scientifically
verify the validity of the sessions used in NP2.
Because of the huge number of sessions included (over 100), EEG results are not provided for
Research & EEG Data
219
every one (if we did, the documentation would triple in size). Instead, we have included a number
of selected EEG recordings to represent the whole. The methods used in all sessions are the
same (with the exception of the 2 binaural beat sessions), so the results of sessions targeting the
same brainwaves will be very similar. For example, results from one alpha session will be very
similar to results recording a different alpha session, even if they are using different backgrounds
and effects.
Be sure to visit the EEG Guide before looking over specific results.
11.4.2 EEG Guide

Interpreting EEG data can be very complicated. Since we let you, the user, see the data for
yourself, it is best that you look over this brief guide to get a better understanding of what you are
seeing.
For more information on brainwaves, click here.
1) The Spectrogram
Figure 1: Normal resting brainwave pattern (eyes open). Recorded before a session start.
This is a 3D Spectrum Analyzer, similar to a traditional Spectrogram. It is a powerful way to visually

represent brain activity, and analyze it across a period of time (represented by the Z axis). With our
setup, up to 2 minutes can be showing. In this figure, about a minute is showing.
220
Horizontally, it shows a band of brainwaves. In Figure 1 it is 4 - 30 Hz, just about the entire
brainwave spectrum. Because of the EEG devices we use, and the virtual irrelevance of the data,
we did not record Delta frequencies or frequencies above 30hz. For many EEG recordings, it
becomes necessary to "zoom in" to a specific band (such as Theta or SMR), to get a closer look
and analyze it in greater detail.
Vertically, the spectrogram represents the microvolts (uVolts), or amplitude of the waves. This
continuum might be increased or decreased based on levels of static, electrical interference or level
of analysis.
Figure 2: This figure shows us asking the user to close his/her eyes for a moment to test the
electrode placement and resting alpha levels. When you close your eyes, Alpha spikes show
up on the EEG at about the amplitude shown in the figure above.
2) All EEGs are different
You may have seen other studies or EEG-related data where the spectrum looks quite different
from the above figures. For example, in older devices, Delta and Theta frequencies show up as
larger than all the other frequencies because they have an amplitude response that falls as the
frequency rises. Sometimes, users of these devices will use Gain Equalization filters that come with
some software packages. Our EEG devices come with Gain Equalization built into the hardware,
ensuring consistency but also may make Theta/Delta frequencies seem sparser than data from
other devices, such as the Mind Mirror, which Anna Wise uses in her research.
3) All Brainwaves, all the time
Research & EEG Data
221
Your brain is very rarely, if ever, "in" a certain brainwave. It is a common myth, originating in the
1970's with undersensitive EEG technology, that the brain can only be in a single brainwave at any
one time. The truth is that the brain is always producing all the brainwaves across the entire
spectrum. Another lesser known fact is that different parts of the brain produce different
brainwaves. Measuring from the forehead yields very little Alpha or Theta waves. For our sessions,
we recorded most of them from the back of the head and, for SMR work, the Sensorimotor Strip.
There are special placements for certain sessions such as the Depression reduction and study
helper sessions.
4) High and Low Amplitude waves

Alpha (8 - 12hz) is a high amplitude wave. When Alpha is present, it is usually much higher than the
other frequencies. Just keep in mind that this doesn't necessarily mean that the brain is "in" Alpha
at that point. Figure 2, above, is a good example. Simply by asking the subject to close his/her
eyes, Alpha shows up as dominant over other frequencies, but the user's dominant brainwaves is
still Beta at that time.
5) Electrical / EMG Interference

EEG recordings are sometimes taken in a variety of environments. Nearby electrical appliances,
cell phones, power lines and other electrical equipment can cause interference, because the EEG
electrodes are so sensitive. This can result in EEG data containing a bit of static, usually showing
up as consistent "noise" across the entire spectrum. In addition to this, it is difficult to prevent the
user from shifting around, which can result in EMG interference, some of which our EEG device
cannot filter out.
In order to tell the general mental state of a subject, you have to look at the entire spectrum.
Sometimes there is a bit of static, so you have to judge how constant the static is. There usually
won't be peaks across the entire spectrum all at once unless it is static-based. With a static-less
brainwave pattern, you will see spikes in specific areas all across the spectrum, but not everywhere
at once.
6) Interpreting the data

To locate signs of entrainment, look for areas of consistent activity, higher or more concentrated
than the rest. Frequencies around an entrained region will often be higher and then slope down in a
wave-like effect over time (Figure 3).
Note that most of the time it is harder to notice the entrainment than it is in Figure 3. There is a lot
of brain activity going on all the time, not to mention environmental static, muscle movements and
other electrical interference. Many sessions also will not stay on a single frequency, but instead will
ramp or modulate between a set of frequencies.
Usually, to get a realistic idea of which brainwaves are being stimulated, you have to average out
an entire session and plot it on a graph, sometimes even referencing data from other EEG sources
(like a normative database). What we have tried to do in this documentation is take representative
"snap shots" of brain activity. Of course, up to 2 minutes of recorded activity is shown, so each
figure is more than just a single shot, but rather is a visual breakdown of activity over a brief
timeline.
Figure 3: 7.83 Hz Entrainment.
222
11.4.3 Alpha / Theta "Programming" Sessions

Below is EEG data for Alpha / Theta sessions, typically used in the "Programming" category of
NP2, as well as some Brainwave Training session such as in the Anxiety and Stress Relief
sessions.
Alpha Sessions
A typical alpha session will look similar to this (in the Session Editor, if you have the Pro version
of NP2):
As you can see, by about 5 or 6 minutes, the brain should be in a healthy, relaxed Alpha state. In
the above graph, the session continues to drop down until it finally rests on deep 8.4 Hz Alpha at
about 14 minutes (note that many alpha sessions drop to 8.4 Hz faster than this. The protocol
may differ but the results will be similar).
Research & EEG Data
223
Spectrogram shot at 10 minutes into the Alpha session. As you can see, high amplitude Alpha
waves dominate the graph, around 8-9 Hz where they should be according to the entrainment
presented.
Theta Sessions
In the Session Editor, a Theta session will look similar to this:
Notice that this time it takes longer to reach the target brainwave, just above 6 Hz. Since Theta is
so near sleep, it requires additional relaxation and time to guide the brain to this deeper level.
Spectrogram shot at 15 minutes into the Theta session. As you can see, high amplitude Alpha
waves are decreasing while lower amplitude Theta waves are increasing.
224
Since Theta is a lower amplitude wave on our EEG device, it is easier to analyze the data if we
zoom into the Theta band:
Before (Baseline)
Analyzing frequencies from 4-8 Hz
After (15 minutes in)
Analyzing frequencies
from 4-8 Hz
Research & EEG Data
225
11.4.4 Beta / SMR Sessions

Below is EEG data related to Beta & SMR sessions, typically found under the "Brainwave Training"
category. Beta and SMR sessions are often used for cognitive enhancement, increasing energy,
focus as well as treating ADD, Insomnia, Depression and a number of other disorders.
Beta Sessions
Beta sessions differ greatly based on their purpose. A generic beta sessions may look something
like this in the Session Editor:
Note that instead of ramping down to Alpha or Theta, this session ramps UP from Alpha,
increasing brain activity. Many beta sessions modulate within the Beta range. Staying on a single
Beta frequency (such as 18 Hz) can have a highly energizing effect, which can be good for
certain situations but may not be the best side effect for a longer session meant to focus the brain
and increase its overall cognitive potential.
Spectrogram shot (13-20 Hz) showing the baseline measurement.
Spectrogram shot (13-20 Hz), about 8 minutes into the session, showing a clear increase in Beta
activity.
226
SMR Sessions
A typical SMR session will probably look something like this:
Like the Beta session, it ramps from 10 Hz into the Beta range, only this time it stops at 14 Hz
and stays there, stimulating SMR activity.
Spectrogram shot (13-20 Hz) showing the baseline measurement.
Research & EEG Data
227
Spectrogram shot (12-20 Hz), about 8 minutes into the session, showing a clear increase in SMR
activity.
228
11.4.5 Complex & Hemisphere-Specific Sessions

There are many Neuro-Programmer 2 sessions that stimulate each brain hemisphere individually,
by delivering differing modulation rates to each ear. Input from the right ear is processed primarily
by the Left brain hemisphere, while input from the left ear is processed mainly by the right
hemisphere. By entraining hemispheres separately, it becomes easier to correct brain asymmetries
prevalent in conditions such as depression or mental states such as frustration or "fight or flight".
Entrainment (and not just from binaural beats) naturally synchronizes the two brain hemispheres. In
itself, it is a very healthy side effect, but to rapidly and effectively correct brainwave asymmetries
requires entrainment methods that can deliver separate stimulation to each hemisphere.
Depression Reduction
As mentioned in the Depression / SAD Research section, the Depression Reduction (headphonerequired) session reduces activity in the right (emotional) hemisphere, while increasing activity in
the left (logical) hemisphere.
Spectrograms (13-20 Hz), showing the Baseline measurement. As you can see, the Beta activity
in the Right hemisphere is greater than that of the Left.
Spectrograms (13-20 Hz) at 12 1/2 minutes into the session. Though beta activity is still strong in
this subject's right hemisphere, it is decreasing while the Left hemisphere's beta is increasing,
restoring control to the logical mind.
Research & EEG Data
229
Study Helper - Learning, Complex Tasks, Frustration Reduction

This particular study helper session acts like many of the ADD sessions in that it acts to increase
Beta activity in general, and in the Left hemisphere in particular, while stimulating SMR (focus) in
the Right.
Unlike other sessions, these measurements were taken with the subject's eyes open.
Spectrograms (13-20 Hz), showing the Baseline measurement.
Spectrograms (12-20 Hz) at 8 1/2 minutes into the session. Beta activity increase is confirmed in
both hemispheres.
SMR is a particularly deficient brainwave in American society, because of sedentary lifestyle

(physical activity naturally increases SMR). So, to get a good idea of SMR increase for this
session, we need to zoom into the SMR band itself.
230
Before (Baseline)
Analyzing frequencies from 12-15 Hz
After (6 minutes in)
Analyzing frequencies
from 12-15 Hz
Top Level Intro

Part
XII
232
12
FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions
12.1
General
How can I make an Audio CD out of the sessions?
Refer to the section on Exporting sessions to WAV
Once exported, a WAV can be burned to an Audio CD using programs such as Easy CD Creator
or Nero.
Remember, to sell CDs or use NP2 in a professional context, you need to purchase a
Commercial/Clinical License: http://www.transparentcorp.com/products/np/clinical_buy.php
How do I convert a session to MP3? And will converting it take away any
effects?
To convert a session to MP3: First, Export the session. Next, use any of the free MP3 converters
available online (on download sites such as Download.com).
Converting sessions to MP3 will not detract from the effects of the session. Unlike most
companies, we design our sessions with modern compression methods in mind. Even lower bit
rates will retain the full effects of the session. 128 kbps is a safe bet.
Note that AudioStrobe signals may be adversely affected by conversion to MP3. For use with
AudioStrobe, set the bit rate at its highest (320).
How do I use a Hypnosis "induction" script to help me relax?

There are a number of hypnotic induction scripts built in, and more in the Member's Area.
Creating hypnosis scripts is also very easy in NP2, since it includes an intuitive but incredibly
powerful script editor. For more information on creating scripts, click here.
To use a script with a session, click the "Scripts" item in the Recording box on the
session play screen:
After clicking Scripts, a number of items will appear listing the available scripts. You can only
233
choose one. Click the "Play Selected Recordings" button to preview it.
When the session plays, the script will start immediately. An induction script will guide you down
along with the session.
Keep in mind that you can also use Suggestions and Alerts with hypnosis scripts, since all other
recordings will play after the induction script has finished. This may not be true with other
hypnosis scripts you download or create, but should be true for inductions.
How do I share Script or Session files with other users?

See the section of Sharing Files.
How do I disable ALL session intros?

Off of the settings menu there is an option to disable all session intros. We only recommend
doing this if you are an experienced user. The Instructions are very important. Though they may
be similar with some sessions, many session instructions contain very important information on
proper session use.
How do I specify a different background for a session?

On the session play screen there is a button labeled "Customize". Click that to access the Session
Customization options below. Click the "Customization" tab:
234
Click the "Browse" button to specify a sound file to act as a background. Nearly any sound file will
work, such as MP3, WAV, OGG or WMA. Whatever background you choose will be override the
default background used in the session, but the same session effects (filters) will still be applied
(so you shouldn't lose any effectiveness).
You can also click "Browse Built In Backgrounds" which is the same as the Browse button except
that it opens directly into the backgrounds folder of the Neuro-Programmer directory. There you
can choose from a number of high quality backgrounds already provided for you.
For more information on session customization, click here.
For all other issues:

Contact support at support@transparentcorp.com
12.2
Session Effects & Proper Use

I am having trouble relaxing. Is there a way to use this away from the
computer?
If you have purchased the application, you will be able to export any session (including
Recordings and Scripts) to WAV, which can then be burnt to CD or convert to an MP3 for use
with devices like the iPod. See the general FAQ for more information.
If you are having trouble relaxing you may also want to use a Hypnosis Induction script at the
beginning of your session. Click here for more information.
When will I notice an effect?

235
The time it takes to notice results differs from person to person, but generally you should start
seeing major improvements within a few weeks (yes, it is that quick), assuming you use it
regularly (5-7 times a week) and properly. If you do not experience any success within that time
period, try changing your protocol or contacting Support (support@transparentcorp.com). We
strongly advocate that you base all of your decisions on results. If what you are doing is not
working, try something else.
The ultimate goal - permanent, comprehensive, long-lasting results - can take longer to manifest,
depending on your protocol. While permanent emotional/behavioral change can happen very
rapidly for advanced users (even after only one session), major shifts in brainwave patterns
usually take place over a series of months and 30- 60 sessions. But the benefits of those sessions
will last for days after using them, and eventually you will have trained your brain to produce the
patterns on its own.
Is NP2 safe?
Yes it is very safe, but only for those not mentioned below:
Who should not use the Neuro-Programmer?

Those meeting any of the following conditions, whether knowingly or not, should not use this
application:
Epileptics
Pregnant women
Those who are wearing a pacemaker
Those prone to seizures
Those who are photosensitive
Those who should consult a physician before the use of this product include:
Individuals under the influence of medication or drugs.
This application is not to be used while under the influence of alcohol or other mood altering
substances, whether they are legal or illegal.
Children under the age of 18 are to be examined by a physician for epilepsy or illnesses that may
contribute to seizures prior to the use of Neuro-Programmer, as they are more susceptible to
seizures.
Finally, DO NOT LISTEN TO ANY NEURO-PROGRAMMER FILES WHILE DRIVING OR
OPERATING MACHINERY.
What are the side effects, if any?

Use of the Neuro-Programmer has many side effects, but most of them are good. You will see
more emotional stability, better blood circulation, quicker thinking, heightened awareness, more
energy, and much more. Many people even report a reduced need for sleep.
The only negative side effects that have been reported are occasional temporary negative mood
change and for certain Brainwave Training sessions mild headaches have been reported, but only
for the first few uses. Headaches usually occur only as a result of increased blood flow in the
brain, which is a good thing. After you get used to this, it will go away. Consult the
Relaxation Guide for guidance on how to counteract this. In particular, relax your eyelids, scalp
and forehead.
If I use Screen Flashing, should my eyes be closed?

236
Yes, your eyes should always be closed when using Screen Flashing. If you are using a session
that
Your eyes should certainly be closed while using AudioStrobe goggles as well.
Which sessions can I use with my eyes open?

Any sessions that are not relying on relaxation can be used effectively with eyes open. Some
sessions (such as the Wake Up and Study Helper sessions) are meant to be used this way. All
sessions in the Programming category should be used with eyes closed, in a relaxed position.
Usually, the effect of brainwave stimulation will be greatly amplified if you keep your eyes closed,
because closing the eyes eliminated a huge percentage of all external stimuli, making it easier for
the Session to make a positive shift in brainwave patterns. So, if you are using a session like the
Depression Reduction or ADD sessions, you should close your eyes for maximum effect.
As a rule of thumb, if you want to get the maximum amount of your use of NP2, follow the
instructions given for every session.
Is it OK to sleep through a session?

This depends. If you are using recorded Suggestions or mental programming techniques,
maintaining a level of conscious awareness is necessary to retain maximum effect. If you find
yourself nodding off during a session, try using a different session (for example, an Alpha
session).
If you are falling asleep during Brainwave Training sessions, it should not have much of a
negative effect. You may even fall asleep during Beta sessions. Most people won't be able to,
since Beta sessions are usually energizing, but some people (particularly those with ADD) find
Beta sessions very relaxing. In fact, a popular method for treating ADHD children is to equip them
with a Light & Sound device early in the morning before waking (to avoid the complications of
hyperactivity).
Do any Brainwave Training sessions cancel out the effects of other

sessions?
In certain circumstances, yes. For example, if you have Brain Damage or ADD (or symptoms
thereof) Theta sessions may worsen your condition. This is why the Wizard integrates a specific
question related to ADD and Brain Damage.
In general, Theta sessions should not be used in conjunction with Beta sessions, if the effects of
Beta entrainment are your primary goal. If your main goal is to increase concentration and focus,
do not use Theta sessions until you have accomplished your goal.
On the other hand, a well balanced brainwave pattern is essential to healthy living. If you have a
deficiency in Alpha or Theta brainwaves, you are likely to develop conditions in the same way you
would be if you lacked Beta brainwaves. So, using different sessions side by side can actually be
advantageous in many cases. The only thing you really have to worry about is Theta being used if
you have ADD, Brain Damage or severe Depression.
At what point should I use the Advanced Sessions?

The Advanced sessions assume you have become confident and comfortable with the
technology, and have learned to relax on your own (using the relaxation techniques in the guide),
237
so they don't focus as much on manually relaxing the user. It also decreases the "programming
time" of the session, assuming you have learned to program yourself more rapidly.
So, use the Advanced sessions when you feel sufficiently experienced. There is no set amount of
time. Sometimes beginners even prefer the advanced sessions, because they are shorter. If you
are normally a very calm, relaxed person the advanced sessions may just the right length for you.

12.3
Brainwave Stimulation (Entrainment)

Brainwave Stimulation FAQ
What are Brainwaves?
See the section on Brainwaves.
What is Brainwave Entrainment?

See the section of Brainwave Entrainment
In the Session Editor, what does "Intensity" refer to?

Intensity values control the level of modulation. For example, if you set Pulse, or volume
modulation, to 100%, it will modulate the volume from 0 to 100%. If you set it at 50% it will
modulate from 50-100%.
Essentially, intensity controls the level of effectiveness. The higher the intensity, the greater
neural response you will achieve. However, higher intensities produce greater levels of
distortion and may not be very relaxing, so some compromise is usually required. Generally, a
pulse with a 20-30% intensity is more than enough for background sounds and noise. Tones, on
the other hand, can have a depth of 100% and still be very relaxing.
How can it be used without headphones?

Unfortunately, there is a common misconception that Binaural Beats, which require
headphones, are the only form of entrainment, so we are often asked "How can NP produce
binaural beats without headphones?". The answer is that we are not producing binaural beats,
we are producing brainwave entrainment, which can be induced using ANY repeating stimulus.
What makes binaural beats a form of entrainment is that they produce "Beats", or pulses of
sound which leave individual electrical imprints on the brain. But obviously beats can be
produced in ways other than using binaural tones. A drum, for example, could be used to
induce brainwave entrainment, if the drummer could keep a very precise frequency for longer
than 6 minutes (many ancient and even modern day cultures use drums to induce meditative
states, though they may not know the science behind what they are doing).
238
If the method of entrainment does not rely on speaker assignments, it can be used effectively
without headphones.
How can you present a stimulus below 20 Hz since that is below the limit of
human hearing?
There is often a confusion in regards to the definition of Hertz, or cycles per second. When we
refer to Hertz (Hz) we are referring to pulses per second, as opposed to the pitch. The pitch of
the stimulus can be anything within the range of human hearing (20-20,000 Hz), but the
frequency of sound bursts per second is usually below 20, since the most important brainwaves
range from 0 - 20 Hz. It is the pulse, not the pitch, that leaves the electrical imprint on the brain.
If the pitch of the stimulus is below that of human hearing, no entrainment will occur in most
cases.
Picture a metronome set at 5 clicks per second. It could be said that the metronome is clicking
at 5 Hertz (Hz). You can hear the metronome clicking 5 times a second, because the pitch of
the clicks are well within the hearing range. A 5 Hz wave, or pitch, on the other hand, could not
be heard.
The confusion here is often because of the marketing of other companies, who claim that
binaural beats produce a "third sound" that can be below 20 Hz. This is not true. What occurs is
a "beat" or pulse, which consists of the combination of the 2 tones. The same effect can be
replicated using Monaural beats or any form of pulse. It is the beat that matters, not the pitch.
For more information on binaural/monaural beats, click here.
Can differing beats entrain multiple frequencies?

For all intents and purposes, no. However, there are a number of tricks that you can use to build
a variety of brainwave patterns. For example, using certain wave forms you can build
harmonics in the brain. So while stimulating 10 Hz you may stimulate 20 and even 30 Hz, and
maybe even a subharmonic of 5. You can also deliver different stimulation to each ear in order
to entrain each brain hemisphere to a different frequency. This can be useful for depression and
other disorders.
There is a very common misconception that using multiple binaural beats will result in multiple
brainwave entrainment. We have even seen some "sessions" that have up to 10 different
binaural beats at the same time! Not only does this not result in effective entrainment, but the
tones used will always interfere with each other. If you combine 2 tones, no matter how far apart
they are, an unintended beat will be formed, so under most circumstances it is best to use a
single tone. We actually highly recommend using the more modern entrainment technique,
Isochronic tones (Pulses), over binaural beats. These are on by default in all sessions unless
otherwise noted.
Does lowering the pitch over time increase the effect of entrainment?
No, and in most cases this question is in reference to the use of binaural beats. Ironically, it is
especially untrue in that case. Joseph Licklider, during his time at MIT, developed a chart
indicating the optimal frequencies for binaural beats. Deviating from this chart (by decreasing or
increasing the tones) results in a lower neural response and therefore less effective
entrainment.
Lowering the pitch can be useful when used with Isochronic tones, since lower pitches can be
very relaxing. However, we would caution against using pitches below 80 Hz unless you are
very experienced with brainwave entrainment. A certain percentage of the population responds
239
negatively to lower tones, sometimes causing a "fight or flight" response.

And of course you should not use any stimulus with a pitch below 20 Hz. Not only will the vast
majority of headphone and speaker sets not even go down to that level, but entrainment will not
occur unless the stimulus reaches the brain, which it will not if the pitch is below the range of
human hearing. Supposedly, binaural beats can still be perceived if the carrier tone (lower of
the 2) is below the human hearing range, but the effect on the brain in this case would be
virtually non existent.
Do entrainment methods other than Binaural Beats result in Hemispheric

Synchronization?
Yes, see the section of Hemispheric Synchronization.
Why doesn't NP2 include Delta sessions?

Because, technically speaking, Delta cannot be entrained, at least not through the Sensory
Cortex (where "altered states" and profound shifts in brainwave patterns occur). Delta
stimulation simply cannot be used like a regular session. It is impossible to "guide" the brain to
a deeper than Theta.
However, what Delta stimulation can do is affect the Limbic and Autonomic nervous systems,
which themselves operate at Delta frequencies. Stimulating the Amygdala and Hypothamamus
can be useful in a variety of situations, including reducing blood pressure, migraines,
fibromyalgia and chronic pain. For these purposes we have included a number of Deltastimulating Brainwave Training sessions.
Where can I get more information about entrainment, brainwaves and

general session construction?
Once you purchase the application, you will gain access to the Member's Area, which contains
tips, articles, EEG studies, links to hundreds of other studies, a file library, a member's only
forum and much more.
12.4
Suggestions / Text-To-Speech
Is it effective to use multiple suggestions?
Yes, as long as the suggestions are not contradictory of course. Beginners, however, may want to
consider focusing on a single goal at time, at least until they have built up a confidence in the
technology.
I'm having trouble setting the volume of recording correctly.

Try previewing the Recordings with the session. There is a little button next to the "Play Selected
Recordings" button. This will allow you to specify Recording preview options:
240
NOTE: To be accurate this option will play the recordings with the part of the session where the
recordings are meant to begin.
I want more Text-To-Speech voices than just Microsoft Sam. Where can I find
more?
If you have Windows XP, try downloading some other Microsoft Voices (Mike & Mary) here:
http://www.transparentcorp.com/downloads/sapi51xp.msi
If you do not have Windows XP, download other Microsoft voices here:
http://www.transparentcorp.com/downloads/sapi.msi
For higher quality voices, try the excellent voices available at Cepstral.com.
Are there any Text-To-Speech voices available in languages other than

English?
As of the time of this writing, Microsoft has not updated its SAPI 4 international voices to be
compatible with SAPI 5.1. So there are no free voices available at this time. However, there are a
number of compatible voices available from Cepstral.com
Should I use Suggestions/Visualizations with Brainwave Training sessions?

You can use mental programming techniques with any session, and in most cases it will be very
beneficial. However, using recorded suggestions and not keeping your attention on the session
itself can have a slightly negative effect on the brainwave stimulation. This is because the mind
responds to attention. If you pay attention and focus on the sounds of the session, the electrical
"imprint" the session leaves will be larger, because your mind believes it is something important.
Ultimately, you should experiment and find a protocol that works best for you, basing your
decision on results.
Why doesn't NP2 use Subliminal Messages or "Silent Sounds"?

We don't use subliminal messages because they don't work. Before making NP, we did extensive
research into the subject and in fact performed many of our own tests on silent sound and
subliminal messaging products. If, during our research, we had found even the slightest trace of
effectiveness, we would have implemented them into NP. Dozens of very professional yet open
minded studies have been conducted on subliminal perception, and all of them have come to the
same conclusion: there is no such thing as subliminal perception, and even if there were, it
wouldn't have any affect on behavior.
Researchers found no trace of brain response to any subliminal messages or silent sounds. This
means that if subliminal messages are perceived, it isn't by the brain.
In an effort to dispel the myth of subliminal messages, we have included a special section
241
outlining the history and research of subliminal messages.

12.5
Licensing / Registration
12.5.1 Licensing
Can I use NP2 to sell CDs or in a professional or clinical setting?
Yes, but you need a Commercial License. You can purchase one here:
http://www.transparentcorp.com/products/np/clinical_buy.php
The Personal License for NP2 only allows for personal, at home use, and does not allow any
output to be sold or used in a professional/clinical setting.

Contact the Licensing department at licenses@transparentcorp.com
12.5.2 Registration
Click here if you have the Download-able version of NP2
Click here if you have the CD Version
For Licensing Issues: Licensing FAQ
242
12.5.3 Download License FAQ

This FAQ is for the Downloadable versions only
My hard drive crashed, so I had to reinstall and now my license is not
working. What do I do?
If you made major system changes recently your old license may not work, because all licenses
are based on hardware "fingerprints". What you need to is acquire a new license, which can be
done free of charge (see below instructions).
I lost my license, what do I do? or

I just got a new computer and my license is not working. What do I do? or
To get a new license:
On the first screen you will see a link labeled "Click here to get a new license":
Clicking it will take you to a web form.

On the web form the Hardware ID field should be prefilled with the correct value. Do not change
it.
Enter in the name and email you registered with, and click Submit. You should be able to find this
information in your email receipt.
What if the "Click here to get a new license" link doesn't work?
243
When the application first opens you will see a button labeled "Enter Key". Click that and note the
numbers in the Hardware ID box:
After you have your Hardware ID, go to this page:

http://www.transparentcorp.com/products/np/getlicense.php and type in the same information you
used to purchase the application (should be in your email receipt).
On the online License web form it says it can't find my name or email. What
do I do?
If you purchased the application from us your name and email are in our system, but you must
use the exact name and email you purchased with. This information can be found in your email
receipt. Most problems occur when people purchase the application using a name like "Phillip"
and then when acquiring the license they instead enter "Phil" and the system says it cannot find
the name. Also, if you used your middle initial during purchase you will need to include that as
well.
If your email has changed since the time of purchase, contact licenses@transparentcorp.com to
have the email on your account changed.
My License Key is not working! What do I do?

First, make sure you are typing in the License exactly as it is printed, dashes, CAPS and all. Make
sure to take into account capital letters and dashes. Also make sure you are not typing in 0 (zero)
where there should be an 'O' or visa versa. Also make sure you typing in 1 where there should be
an 'I', or visa versa. Make sure you type the dashes ("-") in between the sets of numbers and
letters.
If you received your license by email, copy and paste both the registered name and license key
into their respective fields, if possible. To copy, select the text and hit Control+C. Then put your
cursor in the appropriate box and hit Control+V.
If you still cannot get your license working, and you registered online using the license form,
make sure the Hardware ID for your computer was correctly entered into the Hardware ID field.
244
Typing in other numbers, or an ID from a different computer, will not work. The hardware ID you
register with must be the ID of the computer you are trying to enter the license into. Scroll up to
the "To get a new license" question for more information.

12.5.4 CD Activation FAQ

This FAQ is for CD Versions only
Why do I have to activate my CD version? I already paid for it!
Mandatory activation is simply a security measure. You will not have to pay for the application
again. Activation is free, easy, completely automated, and you only have to do it once per
computer.
How do I activate my NP2 on a computer that is disconnected from the

internet?
Open NP2 on the computer you wish to activate it on. On the activation screen, click the link to
manually activate:
On the next screen click "Next", which will take you to the Enter Key screen:
245
Jot down your computer's Hardware ID. You will need both your Activation Key and Hardware ID
to manually activate the software.
Once you have your Hardware ID, use a different computer to navigate to this web form:
http://www.transparentcorp.com/products/np/activate.php and enter in your Activation Key and
Hardware ID. Click submit and your License Key will be given to you. After you have it, print it off
and type it manually into the disconnected computer.
Alternatively, you can find our contact information at the following link. Be sure to have your
Hardware ID and Activation Key ready when you contact us:
http://www.transparentcorp.com/contact.php
The 'Activate' function doesn't work! What do I do?

You need to manually activate the application. Click the link to manually activate the software,
and then follow the instructions.
246
I'm trying to manually activate and my License Key is not working! What do I
do?
First, make sure you are typing in the License exactly as it is printed, dashes, CAPS and all. Make
sure to take into account capital letters and dashes. Also make sure you are not typing in 0 (zero)
where there should be an 'O' or visa versa. Also make sure you typing in 1 where there should be
an 'I', or visa versa. Make sure you type the dashes ("-") in between the sets of numbers and
letters.
If you received your license by email, copy and paste both the registered name and license key
into their respective fields, if possible. To copy, select the text and hit Control+C. Then put your
cursor in the appropriate box and hit Control+V.
If you still cannot get your license working, and you activated online using the license form, make
sure the Hardware ID for your computer was correctly entered into the Hardware ID field. Typing
in other numbers, or an ID from a different computer, will not work. The hardware ID you Activate
with must be the ID of the computer you are trying to enter the license into. Scroll up to the "How
do I activate my NP2 on a computer that is disconnected from the internet?" question for more
information.

12.6
Troubleshooting
Having trouble using the Text-To-Speech features?
Try installing the Microsoft Text-To-Speech engine (SAPI 5.1), available here:
http://www.transparentcorp.com/downloads/TTS_Install.exe
247
After installing, restart NP2 and try again.

If you still have trouble, try changing the audio format from SAFTDefault to something else. If you
are having trouble with a particular voice, contact the customer service of the company behind
the voice.
Some Sessions appear to have disappeared completely. I can't see or access

them anymore.
Make sure the Session Filter isn't filtering the sessions you wish to view. Use the "Show All
Sessions" setting to view all available sessions.
Click here for more information.
Having trouble using a WMA file?

WMA is a format developed by Microsoft, and support for this format comes from downloading
and installing their Windows Media Player product. If you are having trouble using WMA files, you
may not have the latest version of Windows Media Player installed. You can try going to
www.windowsupdate.com or downloading and installing only the necessary files, available here:
http://www.transparentcorp.com/downloads/wmfdist.exe
If you still have trouble using a WMA file, it is probably because the file has licensing restrictions.
When you rip a CD using Windows Media Player, you have to turn off copyright protections if you
want to use the ripped sound/music with the Neuro-Programmer.
I'm getting an error and it says I need to send a file to Transparent Support.
Where can I find the err.log file?
Typically, the err.log file will be in the C:\Program Files\Neuro-Programmer 2 directory. If, during
installation, you specified a different installation directory, you will need to locate that directory
and find the err.log file.

Top Level Intro

Part
XIII
Member's Area
13
249
Member's Area
What is the Member's Area?
The Member's Area is an extensive resource area for users of Transparent products.
It includes:
A user-supported library of sessions, backgrounds, recordings, scripts and other files
Tips / Tricks
Important industry links and outside resources (Industry Journals, Magazines, communities,
stores, etc)
Intriguing Articles related to entrainment
Studies
Member's only forum
Much more!
How do I get access to the Member's Area?

Easy. All you have to do is purchase NP2. A temporary password will automatically be included in
your email receipt.
If you have already purchased, login here: http://www.transparentcorp.com/members/
What if I did not purchase NP2 online or if I purchased it from another

company?
If you purchased NP2, but have not been given a password for the Member's Area, please email
support@transparentcorp.com with your purchase details. You must have proof of purchase in
order to obtain access.
Top Level Intro

Part
XIV
Suggested Reading
14
251
Suggested Reading
General:
The Rediscovery of Audio-Visual Entrainment Technology, David Siever, C.E.T.
(available at mindalive.ca)
Mental Programming
NLP: The New Technology Of Achievement, Steve Andreas, Charles Faulkner
and the NLP Comprehensive Training Team
What To Say When you Talk To Yourself, Shad Helmstetter, Ph.D.
Awaken the Giant Within, Anthony Robbins
Monsters And Magical Sticks, Steven Heller, PhD. and Terry Steele
Hypnotic Suggestions and Metaphors, D. Corydon Hammond, Ph.D.
For Students:
Superlearning, by Sheila Ostrander and Lynn Schroeder, or the more recent
Superlearning 2000 : New Triple Fast Ways You Can Learn, Earn, and Succeed
in the 21st Century
Your Memory : How It Works and How to Improve It , Kenneth L. Higbee
Memory, Meaning and Method - Earl Stevick
For Healing:
Imagery and Healing. Jeanne Achtenberg
Healing With Mind Power, Richard Shames and Chuck Sterin
For Athletes:
252

The Ultimate Athlete, George Leonard
Peak performance: Mental training techniques of the world's greatest athletes,
Charles Garfield
Top Level Intro

Part
XV
254
15
Copyright & Disclaimer
15.1
Disclaimer
Those who should not use this application include: pregnant women and those who are wear a
pacemaker, or are have had or are prone to seizures, are photosensitive, epileptic, whether
knowingly or not, should not use this application.
Those who should consult a physician before the use of this product include: individuals under the
influence of medication or drugs.
This application is not to be used while under the influence of alcohol or other mood altering
substances, whether they be legal or illegal.
Children under the age of 18 are to be examined by a physician for epilepsy or illnesses that may
contribute to seizures prior to the use of Neuro-Programmer, as they are more susceptible to
seizures.
Finally, DO NOT LISTEN TO ANY NEURO-PROGRAMMER AUDIO WHILE DRIVING OR
OPERATING MACHINERY.
The user of the Neuro-Programmer application assumes all risks in using the Neuro-Programmer,
waving any claims against Transparent Corp. and its affiliates for any and all mental or physical
injuries. This includes all self-created suggestions for mood altering, brain wave states altering, and
for self-improvement or motivation. The user also agrees to assume liabilities when allowing other
persons access to the Neuro-Programmer application.
In no case will Transparent Corp & trade. or other distributors of the Neuro-Programmer application
be liable for chance, accidental, special, direct or indirect damages resulting from use, misuse or
defect of its software, instructions or documentation.
Although Neuro-Programmer and its affiliated products contribute to wellness, they are not intended
as a replacement for medical or psychological treatment. No medical claims are intended express or
implied. Statements made in the application or related documentation have not been evaluated or
approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration.
15.2
Copyright
All content included in this application, such as documentation, independent research, text,
graphics, logos, button icons, images, audio files, video files, digital downloads, data compilations,
and software, is the property of Transparent corp and are protected by United States and
international copyright laws. Unless otherwise noted, no part of this application may be reproduced,
reverse engineered, stored in a retrieval system, redistributed, source for file sharing or transmitted,
in any form or by any means, electronic, printing, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or
otherwise, without the specific, prior written permission of Transparent Corp.
Please understand that even if credit is given with publication (including electronic publication) of a
copyrighted material, IT REMAINS A COPYRIGHT VIOLATION if the material has been used
without express permission of the copyright owner.
If you have any questions on the use or reproduction of any of the content, the trademarks,
or the copyrights belonging to Transparent Corp, please contact us at
questions@transparentcorp.com
Index
Brainwaves 109
Index
"Peripheral" / Dual Induction Hypnotic Scripts
-A-
-BBackground 31
Backgrounds 119
Beta 109
Beta / SMR EEG Data 225
Beta Sessions 204
Binaural 57
Binaural Beats 117
Blood Pressure 215
Brain Nutrients 196
Brain System Maintenance 194
Brainwave Entrainment 113
Brainwave Overview 109
Brainwave Stim FAQ 237
113
-C-
-"-
ADD Sessions 204

Addiction Sessions 207
Adding New Session Tracks 55
Advanced Script Track Options 84
Alpha 109
Alpha / Theta EEG Data 222
Alpha/Theta Sessions 202
Alternating Sessions 218
Anchors 147
Anxiety Sessions 207
Applying Settings To All Session Nodes
Athletes 176
Attraction 159
Audio CD 232
Audio Settings 14
AudioStrobe Brightness 31
AudioStrobe Configuration Tool 14
AudioStrobe Settings 14
Auto-Suggestions 136
Aversion 159
255
64
84
Caffeine 214
Chronic Fatigue 214
Chronic Pain 213
Color 150
Intensity & Position 150
Colors 120
Complex EEG Data 228
Copying and Pasting Nodes 69
Copying Nodes from and existing Track
Copyright 254
Creating a new session 51
Creating Recordings 38
Creating Scripts 83
Custom Session Tabs 22
Customization 31
Cut Selections 69
55
-DDelay between recordings 31

Deleting Nodes 69
Deleting Recordings 36
Deleting Scripts 82
Deleting Sessions 49
Delta 109
Depression Sessions 209
Determine your goals 17
Disable All Session Intros 26
Disable Session Start Delay 26
Disclaimer 254
Dissociative Sessions 217
DRIVING OR OPERATING MACHINERY
drugs 234
Dual Induction 84
Duplicating Node Patterns 73
Duplicating Scripts 82
Duplicating Sessions 49
Dynamic Scaling 73
234
256
-EEditing Mental "Scenes" 161

EEG Data 218
EEG Guide 219
Energy 180, 214
Entrainment 113
Epileptics 234
err.log 246
error 246
Event Programming 155
Example Protocols 180
Executing a mental program 169
Exporting Scripts 82
Exporting Sessions 30, 49
Exporting to CD 49
eyes open 232
-FFavorites 22
Fibromyalgia 213
Filtering 119
Frames 145
Further Reading 251
-GGeneral FAQ 232

Getting Started 17
-HHeadache Relief 211

Headphone Testing 14
Healing 183
Hemispheric Synchronization 123
History of Brainwave Entrainment 115
How does NP work? 8
How to become a Member? 249
How to begin mental programming 127
Human BioComputer 101
Hyper-Suggestibility 103
Hypertension 215
Hypnosis Script Creation 83
Hypnotic Induction 83
Hypnotic Induction Session Construction
217
-IImagination & Belief 104

Importing Recordings 41
Insert Time 73
Insomnia 216
IQ Session 204
Isochronic Tones 117
212
80
-LLicense 96
License / Registration FAQ
Light Stimulation 120
List Building 22
241
-MManaging Scripts 82
medication 234
Members 249
Member's Area 249
Mental Movie Projector 160
Mental Programming Techniques
Mental Programs 100
Mental Workshop 162
Microphone Amplification 39
Microphone Recording 39
Mind Programming 99
Mind-Body Connection 101
Mind-Brain Separation 101
Modeling & Roles 156
Modulation 26
Monaural 57
Monaural Beats 117
Motivation 180
Move All Session Nodes 64
Move Selected Nodes 69
Movies 160
MP3 232
Multiple Recording Select (Script)
144
84
Index
Muscle Gain 189

Mute (Script Track)
Mute Track 57
Rebuilding Session List 22

Recorded Lectures 172
Recording Modulation (Panning) 26
Recording Times 78
Recordings Folder 36
Refresh Session List 22
Registration 96
Registration FAQ 241
Relaxation Guide 130
Relaxation Sessions 217
Removing / Deleting Tracks 57
Removing Script Tracks 89
Renaming Recordings 36
Renaming Scripts 82
Renaming Sessions 49
Research & EEG Data 201
Rewinding Scripts 89
Roles 156
89
-NNail Biting 186

Neurological 8
Neurons 109
New Session 51
Node Patterns 73
Nodes (Session) 64
Noise 119
Noise Reduction 39
Nutrients 196
-OObjectifying Body Functions

Objectifying Emotions 152
Objects & Symbolism 151
153
-Ppacemaker 234
Pan Modulation 31
Pan Modulation (Script) 84
Photic Stimulation 120
photosensitive 234
Play Screen 26
Playing (Scripts) 89
Playing User Sessions 49
PMS Sessions 210
Pregnant women 234
Previewing Recordings 26
Programming Guide 133
Psychological 8
Public Speaking 184
Pulse 57
Purchase 96
Purchase FAQ 241
-RReading 251
Real-Time Programming
165
-Ssafe 234
Saving Your Configuration 31
Scaling 73
Screen Flashing Colors 31
Script Exporting 82
Script Previewing 89
Scripts 83
seizures 234
Selecting Nodes 69
Selection 69
Sensory Modalities 106
Sensory Modalities (Using) 163
Session End Options 31
Session Fade 31
Session Filter 22
Session List Features 22
Session Nodes 64
Session Options 78
Session Play Screen 26
Session Recommendation Wizard 25
Session Scaling 31
Session Start Delay 31
Session Tabs 22
Sessions 20, 201
Sessions Effects FAQ 234
Setting Start & End Recording Times 78
257
258
Sharing & Importing 93

Shut Down Options 31
Shyness 181
side effects 234
Sleep Induction 216
sleep through a session 232
Smoking 187
SMR 109
SMR Sessions 204
Sound 119
Soundtracks 160
Speaker Assignments (Script Tracks) 84
Speech 42
Sports Performance Strategies 176
Sports Sessions 205
Stategy for the Super Learning Tool 172
Stress Sessions 207
Students 172
Study Helper 204
Subliminal Messages 108
Suggested Reading 251
Suggestion Guide 136
Suggestions / Text-To-Speech FAQ 239
Super Learning Tool 90, 172
Swish 145
Syncing Session Tracks 64
System Volume Control 26
-TText & Symbols 154

Text-To-Speech 42
Text-To-Speech engine 246
Text-To-Speech Scripting 44
Theta 109
Theta Sessions 202
Timeline & Previewing 53
Tone Pitch 31
Tones 57, 117
Track Options (Session) 57
Track View (Script) 89
Triggers 147
Troubleshooting 246
-UUndo
51
-VVisualization 140
Visualization Guide
Volume / Intensities
140
31
-WWake Up! 214

WAV Exporting 30
Wave Generation (Node Patterns) 73
Weight Loss 189
What is NP? 8
When to use what 168
When will I notice an effect? 234
Where/When To Mental Program 128
Who should not use the Neuro-Programmer?
Willpower 104
Windows Volume Control 26
WMA 246
234
-YYour first attempt at Mind Programming

Your Sound & Recording Settings 14
127

NP2 Manual

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

NP2 Manual

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Contents

Part I Welcome & Introduction

Part II What is the Neuro-Programmer?

Part III What's new in Version 2.3!

Part IV User Guide

Editing Track Nodes

Importing BWT & Sound

Part V Important Concepts

Tones, Auditory "Beats"

Part VI How To Program The Mind

The "Swish" Pattern

Editing Scenes......................................................................................................................................................... 161

2003 - 2005 Transparent Ltd.

Part VII Academic Strategies for Students

Part VIII Sports Performance Strategies for Athletes

Part IX Example Protocols

Part X Your Brain System

Part XI Research & EEG Data

Headache Relief .......................................................................................................................................................... 211

2003 - 2005 Transparent Ltd.

Alpha / Theta "Programming"

Part XII FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions

1 General ................................................................................................................................... 232

Part XIII Member's Area

Part XIV Suggested Reading

Part XV Copyright & Disclaimer

2003 - 2005 Transparent Ltd.

Top Level Intro

Welcome & Introduction

What Is The Neuro-Programmer?

2003 - 2005 Transparent Ltd.

Top Level Intro

What is the Neuro-Programmer?

How does NP work?

2003 - 2005 Transparent Ltd.

What is the Neuro-Programmer?

Get to know the Session Play Screen

2003 - 2005 Transparent Ltd.

Top Level Intro

What's new in Version 2.3!

What's new in Version 2.3!

2003 - 2005 Transparent Ltd.

2003 - 2005 Transparent Ltd.

Top Level Intro

Audio / Visual Settings

2003 - 2005 Transparent Ltd.

Sound & Recording Devices

2003 - 2005 Transparent Ltd.

Headphone Testing Tool

AudioStrobe Configuration Tool

2003 - 2005 Transparent Ltd.

Step 1: Get to know NP2 and the interface

Step 2: Get an understanding of the concepts behind NP

Step 3: Determine your goals

Step 4: Decide on a goal, Choose a session

2003 - 2005 Transparent Ltd.

Tip: Use the Wizard

Step 5: Choose Visualizations or Create Suggestions (if necessary)

Step 6: Use your session!

2003 - 2005 Transparent Ltd.

Let's examine the difference:

Session List Features

2003 - 2005 Transparent Ltd.

Session List Features